M A-0009500-0320 Hardinge PDF

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL
TP1421
CNC Lathes
Equipped with the
GE Fanuc 18T Control
Revised: September 28, 1999
Manual No. M-320A Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. M A-0009500-0320 April, 1997
- NOTICE -
Damage resulting from misuse, negligence, or accident is not covered by the
Hardinge Machine Warranty.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
This manual covers the programming of Hardinge CONQUEST® T42

series lathes equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T control and absolute
encoders.
In no event will Hardinge Inc. be responsible for indirect or consequen-
tial damage resulting from the use or application of the information in this
manual.
Reproduction of this manual, in whole or in part, without written
permission of Hardinge Inc. is prohibited.
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL
- WARNINGS -
Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of personal in-
jury or damage to the machine, tooling, or workpiece.
- CAUTIONS -
Cautions must be followed carefully to avoid the possibility of damage to the
machine, tooling, or workpiece.
- NOTES -
Notes contain supplemental information.
Hardinge Inc.
One Hardinge Drive
P.O. Box 1507
Elmira, New York 14902-1507
Telephone: (607) 734-2281 FAX: (607) 734-8819
www.hardinge.com
© 1997, Hardinge Inc. M-320A

READ COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE OPERATING MACHINE
When this instruction book was printed, the information given was current. However, since
we are constantly improving the design of our machine tools, it is possible that the illustrations
and descriptions may vary from the machine you received.
- WARNING -
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Hazard Communica-
tion Standard 1910.1200, effective September 23, 1987, and various state “em-
ployee right-to-know laws” require that information regarding chemicals used
with this equipment be supplied to you. A complete list of the chemicals used
with this machine, their reference data sheet numbers, and their suppliers
appears as an insertion at the end of this manual. Refer to the applicable
section of the Material Safety Data Sheets supplied with your machine when
handling, storing, or disposing of chemicals.
Machine should only be used with a bar feed approved by Hardinge Inc.
HARDINGE SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS

Your Hardinge machine is designed and built for maximum ease and safety of operation.
However, some previously accepted shop practices may not reflect current safety regula-
tions and procedures, and should be re-examined to insure compliance with the current safety
and health standards.
Hardinge Inc. recommends that all shop supervisors, maintenance personnel, and machine
tool operators be advised of the importance of safe maintenance, setup, and operation of all
equipment. Our recommendations are described below. READ THESE SAFETY RECOM-
MENDATIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING ANY FURTHER.
READ THE APPROPRIATE MANUAL OR INSTRUCTIONS before attempting operation or
maintenance of the machine. Make sure you understand all instructions.
CONSULT YOUR SUPERVISOR when in doubt as to the correct way to do a job.
DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT unless proper maintenance has been regularly performed
and the equipment is known to be in good working order.
DON’T REMOVE any warning or instruction tags from machine.
DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT if unusual or excessive heat, noise, smoke, or vibration

occurs. Report any excessive or unusual vibration, sounds, smoke, or heat as well as any
damaged parts.
MAKE SURE equipment is properly grounded. Consult National Electric Code and all local
codes.
DISCONNECT MAIN ELECTRICAL POWER before attempting repair or maintenance.
DON’T REACH into any control or power case area unless electrical power if OFF.
DON’T TOUCH ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT when hands are wet or when standing on a
wet surface.
M-320A i
ALLOW ONLY AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL to have access to enclosures containing
electrical equipment.
DON’T ALLOW the operation or repair of equipment by untrained personnel.
REPLACE BLOWN FUSES with fuses of the same size and type as originally furnished.
ASCERTAIN AND CORRECT cause of a shutdown caused by overload heaters before

starting machine.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND PROPER FOOT PROTECTION at all times. When nec-
essary, wear respirator, helmet, gloves, and ear muffs or plugs.
KEEP AREA THE AROUND THE MACHINE well lighted and dry.
KEEP CHEMICAL AND FLAMMABLE MATERIAL away from electrical or operating equip-
ment.
HAVE THE CORRECT TYPE OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER handy when machining combus-
tible material and keep chips clear of the work area.
DON’T USE a toxic or flammable substance as a solvent cleaner or coolant.
MAKE SURE PROPER GUARDING is in place and all doors are closed and secured.
TO REMOVE OR REPLACE the collet closer it is necessary to remove the guard door at
left end of the machine. Make certain the guard door is replaced before starting the ma-
chine.
DON’T ALTER THE MACHINE to bypass any interlock, overload, disconnect, or other
safety device.
DON’T OPEN GUARD DOORS while any machine component is in motion. Make certain
that all people in the area are clear of the machine when opening the guard door.
MAKE SURE chucks, closers, fixture plates, and all other spindle-mounted work-holding
devices are properly mounted and secured before starting machine.
MAKE CERTAIN all tools are securely clamped in position before starting machine.
REMOVE ANY LOOSE PARTS OR TOOLS left on machine or in the work area before
operating machine. Always check machine and work area for loose tools and parts espe-
cially after work has been done by maintenance personnel.
REMOVE CHUCK WRENCHES before starting the machine.
BEFORE PRESSING THE CYCLE START PUSH BUTTON, make certain that proper
functions are programmed and that all controls are set in the desired modes.
KNOW WHERE ALL stop push buttons are located in case of an emergency.
ii M-320A
CHECK THE LUBRICATION OIL LEVEL and the status of indicator lights before operating
the machine.
MAKE CERTAIN that all guards are in good condition and are functioning properly before
operating the machine.
INSPECT ALL SAFETY DEVICES AND GUARDS to make certain that they are in good
condition and are functioning properly before the cycle is started.
CHECK THE TURRET POSITION before pressing the Cycle Start push button.
CHECK SETUP, TOOLING AND SECURITY OF WORKPIECE if the machine has been
OFF for any length of time.
DRY CYCLE a new setup to check for programming errors.
MAKE CERTAIN you are clear of any “pinch point” created by moving slides before start-
ing the machine.
DON’T OPERATE any equipment while any part of the body is in the proximity of a
potentially hazardous area.
DON’T REMOVE CHIPS with hands. Use a hook or similar device and make certain that
all machine movements have ceased.
BE CAREFUL of sharp edges when handling newly machined workpieces.
DON’T REMOVE OR LOAD workpieces while any part of the machine is in motion.
DON’T OPERATE ANY MACHINE while wearing rings, watches, jewelry, loose clothing,
neckties, or long hair not contained by a net or shop cap.
DON’T ADJUST tooling or coolant hoses while the machine is running.
DON’T LEAVE tools, workpieces or other loose items where they can come in contact
with a moving component of the machine.
DON’T CHECK finishes or dimensions of workpiece near running spindle or moving

slides.
DON’T JOG SPINDLE in either direction when checking threads with a thread gage.
DON’T ATTEMPT to brake or slow the machine with hands or any makeshift device.
ANY ATTACHMENT, TOOL, OR MACHINE MODIFICATION not obtained from Hardinge

Inc., must be reviewed by a qualified safety engineer before installation.
USE CAUTION around exposed mechanisms and tooling especially when setting up. Be
careful of sharp edges on tools.
DON’T USE worn or defective hand tools. Use the proper size and type for job being
performed.
M-320A iii
USE ONLY a soft-faced hammer on turret tools and fixtures.
DON’T USE worn or broken tooling on machine.
MAKE CERTAIN that all tool mounting surfaces are clean before mounting tools.
INSPECT ALL CHUCKING DEVICES daily to make sure they are in good operating con-
dition.
REPLACE DEFECTIVE CHUCK before starting machine.
USE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE gripping pressure on the chuck. Consider weight, shape
and balance of workpiece.
USE LIGHTER THAN NORMAL feedrates and depth of cut when machining a workpiece
diameter that is larger than the gripping diameter.
DON’T EXCEED the rated capacity of machine.
DON’T LEAVE the machine unattended while it is operating.
DON’T CLEAN the machine with an air hose.
DON’T OVERFILL tote pans.
KEEP TOTE PANS a safe distance from machine.
DON’T LET STOCK project past the back end of the collet closer or machine spindle
without being adequately covered and properly supported.
FOLLOW each bar feed manufacturer’s guidelines. For performance and safe application,
size and use feed tube bushings, pushers, and spindle liners according to bar feed infor-
mation.
MAKE CERTAIN that any bar feed mechanism is properly aligned with spindle. If floor-
mounted type, it must be securely bolted to floor.
UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, all operating and maintenance procedures are to be per-
formed by one person. To avoid injury to yourself and others, be sure that all personnel
are clear of the machine when opening or closing the coolant guard door and any access
covers.
FOR YOUR PROTECTION - WORK SAFELY
iv M-320A
- Contents -
CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Programming the GE Fanuc 18T Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Legal Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Special Programming Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Tape Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Keyboard Programming Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Program Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
X and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Decimal Point Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
O Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
N Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
G Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
G00 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
G01 Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
G02 Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
G04 Dwell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
G10 Offset Value Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
G17 Work Plane Selection [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
G20 Inch Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
G21 Metric Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
G41 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Right of Tool . . . . . . . . 1-14
G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Left of Tool . . . . . . . . 1-14
G50 Maximum RPM Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
G65 Macro Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
G71 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
G72 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
G73 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
G76 Automatic Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
G80 Cancel Face Machining Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
G81 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
G83 Peck Face Drilling Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
G84 Face Tapping Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
M-320A v
G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
G92 Canned Threading Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
G96 Constant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
G97 Direct RPM Programming (Constant Surface Speed Cancel) . . . . . . . 1-17
G98 Inches/Millimeter per Minute Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
G99 Inches/Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
G100 End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
G101 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option] . . . . . . . . 1-18
G107 Cylindrical Interpolation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
G112 Polar Interpolation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
G113 Cancel Polar Interpolation [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
X Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
U Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
W Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Y Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
V Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
B Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
C Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
I Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
K Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Variable Lead Threading (G34) [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
R Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Linear Interpolation (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Defining Tapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
P Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Q Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
F Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
S Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
M Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M00 Program Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M01 Optional Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M02 End of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M03 Main Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M04 Main Spindle Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
M05 Main Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M08 Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M09 Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M10 High Pressure Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M13 Main Spindle Forward/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
M14 Main Spindle Reverse/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
vi M-320A
M17 Headwall Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M18 Headwall Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M21 Open Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M22 Close Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M23 Activate Contouring Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M24 Cancel Contouring Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M25 Part Catcher Retract [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Machines without End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Machines with End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
M26 Part Catcher Extend [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Machines without End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Machines with End-Working Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M28 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M29 Internal Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M30 End of Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M31 Program Rewind and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M35 Sub-Spindle Stop [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M38 Automatic Guard Door Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M39 Automatic Guard Door Close [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M43 Corner Rounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M44 Enable Main Turret Bi-Directional Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
M45 Disable Main Turret Bi-Directional Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
M56 Sub-Spindle Collet Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M57 Sub-Spindle Collet Close [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M60 Synchronization Code [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M69 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M70 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M78 Enable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M79 Disable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
M81 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M84 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M85 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle Retract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M-320A vii
M86 Tailstock Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M88 Thermal Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M93 Steady Rest Open [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M94 Steady Rest Closed [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
M98 Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
M99 Subprogram End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Diameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
General Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Tool Orientation Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Activating Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Entering and Exiting the Workpiece with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . 2-5
To Switch G41/G42 Code with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . 2-6
Axis Reversals with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Modes in which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not Performed . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Multiple Repetitive Cycles with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . . . . . . . 2-7
Canned Turning and Facing Cycles with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . . 2-7
G90 Canned Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
G94 Canned Facing Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Tool Moved away from the Workpiece with Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active . 2-8
Tool Nose Radius Compensation Related Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 033 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 034 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 038 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Alarm 041 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Deactivating Tool Nose Radius Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Tool Nose Radius Compensation Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Absolute and Incremental Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Linear Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Insert Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Alarm Messages for Insert Chamfer/Insert Corner Radius . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
G02 Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Sample Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
viii M-320A
CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETS
Work Shift (Zero Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storing a Work Shift Offset from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Tooling (Main Turret) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Square Shank Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Qualified Tool Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Entering Tool Nose Radius Value and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
To Store Tool Offsets from the Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Activating Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
How the Control Positions the Slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
X and Z Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Rectangular Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Coordinate System Reference Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Axis Reference Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Machine Zero Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Main Turret Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
End-Working Turret Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Sub-Spindle Reference Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Machine Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Absolute Position Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLES
Canned Turning Cycle (G90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Example 1: G90 Straight Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Example 2: G90 Taper Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Automatic Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning (G71/G70) . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
G71/G70 Standard Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Example 3: G71/G70 Standard Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
G71 Standard Turning Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
G71/G70 Pocket Turning [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Example 4: G71/G70 Pocket Turning Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
G71 Pocket Turning Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Canned Facing Cycle (G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Example 5: G94 Straight Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Example 6: G94 Taper Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Automatic Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing (G72/G70) . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
G72 Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Automatic G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Automatic Drilling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Constant Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
G74 Auto Drilling Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
M-320A ix
Variable Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Positioning the Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Calculating the Drill Pass Increments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Optional Z Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
G75 Auto Grooving Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
P and Q Word Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Tool Movement Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
G75 Auto Grooving Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLE
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Single Block Threadcutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
To Establish A Start Point For Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
G32 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Example 1: G32 Straight Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Example 2: G32 Tapered Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
G92 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Plunge Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Compound Infeed Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Automatic Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
G76 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
P Word (First G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Q Word (First G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
R Word (First G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
G76 Execution Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
P Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Q Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
F Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
X Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Z Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
R Word (Second G76 Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Left-Hand Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
x M-320A
CHAPTER 8 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING
Blueprint Programming Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Angle Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Blueprint Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Example 1: Two Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Example 2: Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Example 3: Three Points with a Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Example 4: Three Points with a Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Example 5: Four Points with Two Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Example 6: Four Points with Two Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Example 7: Four Points with One Radius and Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Example 8: Four Points with One Chamfer and Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Method #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Method #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Blueprint Programming Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Blueprint Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
CHAPTER 9 - MISCELLANEOUS
Constant Surface Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Manual Data Input Keyboard Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tape or Floppy Disk Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Subprogram Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Safe Start Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Inch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Hardinge Permanent Macro Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Macro 9112: Safe Tool Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Macro 9136: Deep Hole Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Tailstock Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Tailstock Traverse Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Tailstock Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
M84 - Tailstock Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
M85 - Tailstock Retract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
M86 - Tailstock Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Tailstock Programming Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
English/Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Establishing English/Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
M-320A xi
CHAPTER 10 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT [Option]
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tool Life Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Number of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Amount of Machining Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Bar Feed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Determining Maximum Groups and Group Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
To Verify Maximum Groups and Group Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
To Set Maximum Groups and Group Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Determining the Measurement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
To Verify the Measurement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
To Switch the Measurement Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Resetting a Tool Group Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Program Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Data Word Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
P Word - Tool Group Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
L Word - Tool Life Value Data Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
T Word - Turret Station and Offset Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Sample Tool Life Management Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Data Block Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Combining Tool Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool Commands . . . . . . . 10-11
Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
CHAPTER 11 - LIVE TOOLING [Option]
Live Tooling M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Determining Rotational Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
B Word - Spindle Orient Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Determining Spindle Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Direction of Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Programming Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Live Tooling Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Deactivating Live Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Live Tooling Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Sample Live Tooling Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
xii M-320A
CHAPTER 12 - C AXIS PROGRAMMING [Option]
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Data Word Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
C Axis Spindle Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Live Tooling Program Format with C Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Sample Live Tooling Program with C Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Live Tooling Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Polar Coordinate Interpolation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Program Format for Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolation
used with G112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Program Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Example 2 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Example 3 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Hexagon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Example 4 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Example 5 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Tongue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Example 6 - Polar Interpolation - Radius Diamond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Live Tooling Codes used for Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Cylindrical Interpolation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Tool Nose Radius Compensation and Circular Interpolation
used with G107 Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
C Axis Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-24
CHAPTER 13 - END-WORKING TURRET [Option]
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Tooling Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Tooling Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Program Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Valid Programming Data Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
F Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
G Word (Preparatory Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
M Word (Miscellaneous Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Index on the Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Y Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Programmable Work Coordinate Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Programming Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Activating a Work Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Sub-Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Executing a Sub-Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
G110 One-Shot Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Synchronization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
M-320A xiii
End-Working Turret Part Catcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
M25 (Part Catcher Retract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
M26 (Part Catcher Extend) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Single Block Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Machining Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
G80 Cycle Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
G81 Single Pass Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Command Line Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Machining Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Sample Program Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
G83 Peck Drilling Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
G84 Tapping Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
PMC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
CNC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
CHAPTER 14 - THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Programming the Compensation Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Operator Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Part Program Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Limit Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Alarm Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Enabling Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
CHAPTER 16 - SUB-SPINDLE [Option]
(Hydraulic Axis Drive)
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Sub-Spindle G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Sub-Spindle M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
M35 Sub-Spindle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
M56 Sub-Spindle Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
M57 Sub-Spindle Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
M69 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
xiv M-320A
M84 Sub-Spindle Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
M85 Sub-Spindle Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Sub-Spindle Work Shift Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
Programming Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
U/X Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
W/Z Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Tool Geometry Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
X Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Inch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
Subprogram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
Sub-Spindle Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Running the Sub-Spindle Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
Sub-Spindle Sync with the Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Macro Program O9170 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Block Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12
Transferring from Main Spindle to Sub-spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle
(Using Standard Programming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
(Using Macro Program O9170) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle
Transferring from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle
Sub-Spindle Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Basic Sequence of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
Sub-Spindle Safety Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
Sub-Spindle Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-26
(Ball Screw Axis Drive)
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Programming Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
X/U Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Y/V Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Y Axis Position Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Z/W Axis Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
Sub-Spindle G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
M-320A xv
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
Sub-Spindle M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
M35 Sub-Spindle Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
M56 Sub-Spindle Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
M57 Sub-Spindle Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
M69 External Chucking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Part Catcher Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Sub-Spindle Work Shift Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8
Tool Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Tool Geometry Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
X Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9
Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Inch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Subprogram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Metric Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-11
Sub-Spindle Programming Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Running the Sub-Spindle Alone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Sub-Spindle Sync with the Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-13
Workpiece Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Transferring From Main Spindle To Sub-spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Collet Stock Stop Not Installed in Sub-Spindle Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Collet Stock Stop Installed in Sub-Spindle Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-15
Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-17
Transferring from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-19
Sub-Spindle Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Basic Sequence of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-21
Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-22
Sub-Spindle Programming Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-26
xvi M-320A
APPENDIX ONE
Turret Travel Specifications
CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Super-Precision® Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-1
CONQUEST T42-L Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-2
Turret Top Plate Dimensions
12 Station Top Plate (3/4" Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-3
12 Station Top Plate (20mm Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-4
10 Station Top Plate (3/4" Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-5
10 Station Top Plate (20mm Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-6
Tailstock Travel Specifications
CONQUEST T42 and T42SP Super-Precision Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7
CONQUEST T42-L Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-7
Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications
Hydraulic Axis Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-8
Ball Screw Axis Drive (1.60 Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-9
Ball Screw Axis Drive (0.46 Offset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-10
End-Working Turret Travel Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-11
Work Envelope
with 16C Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-12
with 16C Master Step Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-13
with 16C HQC®-42 Quick Change Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-14
with 16C Thru-Hole Jaw Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-15
with 20C Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-16
with 20C Master Step Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-17
with 20C HQC-42 Quick Change Collet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-18
with 20C Thru-Hole Jaw Chuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-19
Spindle Torque / Horsepower Curves
Main Spindle - 10HP Standard Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-20
Main Spindle - 10HP High Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-20
Main Spindle - 15HP High Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-21
Main Spindle - 15HP High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-21
Sub-Spindle - 5HP Standard Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1-22
APPENDIX TWO
G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-1
Standard M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-2
Optional M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-3
PMC Generated Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-5
PMC Generated Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2-9
M-320A xvii
- NOTES -
xviii M-320A
CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE
INTRODUCTION
A part program is an ordered set of instructions which define slide and spindle motion as well
as auxiliary functions. These instructions are written in a part program language consisting of a
series of data blocks. Each data block contains adequate information for the machine tool to
perform one or more machine functions.
A data block consists of one or more data words, which are treated together as a unit. Each
data word consists of a word address followed by a numerical value. A word address is a letter
which specifies the meaning of the data word.
The value of the number that follows the word address has a format which specifies the
number of characters the word contains as well as the range these values must fall within.
These formats are outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tables
on pages 1-2 and 1-3.
PROGRAMMING THE GE FANUC 18T CONTROL

Programming Hardinge CONQUEST® T42 series lathes equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T
control requires an understanding of the machine, tooling, and control.
Extreme care must be exercised when writing a part program or punching a tape since all
machine movements will be executed as programmed. A miscalculation or selection of an incor-
rect function can result in an incorrect motion.
The basic unit for part program input is the “Block”. Normally, one line or block of information
represents one describable operation or several describable operations that are independent of
each other. (For example, axis movement and spindle speed changes are independent opera-
tions which may be programmed in the same block.) A block may contain any or all of the
following:
1. Slash code (/)
2. Sequence number (N Function)
3. Preparatory Functions (G Functions)
4. Axis Movement Instructions (X or U, Y or V, and Z or W Functions)
5. Feedrate Command (F Function)
6. Spindle Speed Command (S Function)
7. Turret Station (T Function)
8. Miscellaneous Functions (M Functions)
A block MUST contain a valid End of Block character.
M-320A 1-1
FUNCTION PREPARATORY INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)
(Word) COMMANDS
Format Min. Max. Format Min. Max.
O (Prog. #) - O4 1 8999 O4 1 8999
N (Block #) - N4 1 9999 N4 1 9999
G (Command) - G3 0 999 G3 0 999
M (Command) - M2 0 99 M2 0 99
P (Block #) - P4 1 9999 P4 1 9999
P (Dwell) - P8 1 99999999 P8 1 99999999
Q (Block #) - Q4 1 9999 Q4 1 9999
U (Coordinate) G00, G01, G02, G03 U±2.4 0.0001 - U±3.3 0.001 -

U (Dwell) G04 U5.3 0.001 99999.999 U5.3 0.001 99999.999
V (Coordinate)9 G00, G01 V±2.4 0.0001 - V±3.3 0.001 -
W (Coordinate) G00, G01, G02, G03 W±2.4 0.0001 - W±3.3 0.001 -
X (Coordinate) 7 G00, G01, G02, G03 X±2.4 0.0001 12.2440 X±3.3 0.001 311.000
X (Dwell) G04 X5.3 0.001 99999.999 X5.3 0.001 99999.999
Y (Coordinate) 1 G00, G01 Y±2.4 0.0001 17.5600 Y±3.3 0.001 446.024
Y (Coordinate)10 G00, G01 Y±2.4 0.0001 15.9400 Y±3.3 0.001 404.876
Z (Coordinate)11 G00, G01, G02, G03 Z±2.4 0.0001 14.1500 Z±3.3 0.001 359.410
X (Tool Offset) G10 X±2.4 0. - X±3.3 0. -

X (Wear Offset) G10 X±0.4 0. 0.5000 X±2.3 0. 12.700
X (Zero Offset) G10 X±2.4 0. - X±3.3 0. -
Y (Tool Offset) G10 Y±2.4 0. - Y±3.3 0. -
Y (Wear Offset) G10 Y±0.4 0. 0.5000 Y±2.3 0. 12.700
Z (Tool Offset) G10 Z±2.4 0. - Z±3.3 0. -
Z (Wear Offset) G10 Z±0.4 0. 0.5000 Z±2.3 0. 12.700
Z (Zero Offset) G10 Z±2.4 0. - Z±3.3 0. -
I (Circ. Inter.) G02, G03 I±3.4 0. 999.9999 I±4.3 0. 9999.999

K (Circ. Inter.) G02, G03 K±3.4 0. 999.9999 K±4.3 0. 9999.999
K (Lead Change) G34 K±1.6 0.000001 9.999999 K±3.4 0.0001 500.0000
F (per min) [X/U]11 G98 F3.2 0.01 472.00 F5.0 1. 12000.

F (per min) [X/U]12 G98 F3.2 0.01 755.00 F5.0 1. 19200.
F (per min) [Z/W]11 G98 F3.2 0.01 630.00 F5.0 1. 16000.
F (per min) [Z/W]12 G98 F3.2 0.01 1004.00 F5.0 1. 25500.
F (per min) [Y/V] G98 F3.2 0.01 394.00 F5.0 1. 10000.
F (per rev) G99 F1.6 0.000001 9.999999 F3.4 .001 500.0000
F (Thread Lead) G32, G33, G34 F1.6 0.000001 9.999999 F3.4 .0001 500.0000
S (Spindle rpm) 2 G50, G97 S4 0 5000 S4 0 5000

S (Live Tooling) 6 G97 S4 0 4000 S4 0 4000
S (Surface Speed) G96 S4 1 9999 S4 1 9999
B (Spin. Orient) - B3 0 360 B3 0 360

C (C Axis) - C±5.3 0. 99999.999 C±5.3 0. 99999.99
T (Tool Function) - T4 0 1232 T4 0 1232
A (Angle) G00, G01 A3.4 0.0001 359.9999 A3.4 .001 359.9999

,C (Chamfer) G01 ,C2.4 0.0001 - ,C3.3 .001 -
R (Radius) G02, G03 R2.4 - - R3.3 - -
,R (Radius) G01 ,R2.4 0.0001 - ,R3.3 .001 -
Table 1.1 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments

Reference: (CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L CNC Lathes)
1 - Lathes equipped with optional end-working turret.
2 - Lathes equipped with the standard spindle drive.
3 - Lathes equipped with the 10HP [7.5 KW] Hi-Torque spindle option.
4 - Lathes equipped with the 15HP [11 KW] Hi-Torque spindle option or “Big Bore” 20C spindle option.
5 - Lathes equipped with the Hi-Speed spindle option.
6 - Lathes equipped with the Live Tooling option.
1-2 M-320A
FUNCTION PREPARATORY INCH MODE (G20) METRIC MODE (G21)
(Word) COMMANDS
Format Min. Max. Format Min. Max.
O (Prog. #) - O4 1 8999 O4 1 8999
N (Block #) - N4 1 9999 N4 1 9999
G (Command) - G3 0 999 G3 0 999
M (Command) - M2 0 99 M2 0 99
P (Block #) - P4 1 9999 P4 1 9999
P (Dwell) - P8 1 99999999 P8 1 99999999
Q (Block #) - Q4 1 9999 Q4 1 9999
U (Coordinate) G00, G01, G02, G03 U±2.5 0.00001 - U±3.4 0.0001 -

U (Dwell) G04 U4.4 0.001 9999.9999 U4.4 0.001 9999.9999
V (Coordinate)9 G00, G01 V±2.4 0.0001 - V±3.3 0.001 -
W (Coordinate) G00, G01, G02, G03 W±2.5 0.00001 - W±3.4 0.0001 -
X (Dwell) G04 X4.4 0.001 9999.9999 X4.4 0.001 9999.9999
Y (Coordinate)10 G00, G01 Y±2.4 0.00001 15.9400 Y±3.3 0.001 404.876
X (Tool Offset) G10 X±2.5 0. - X±3.4 0. -

X (Wear Offset) G10 X±0.5 0. 0.50000 X±2.4 0. 12.7000
X (Zero Offset) G10 X±2.5 0. - X±3.4 0. -
Y (Tool Offset) G10 Y±2.4 0. - Y±3.3 0. -
Y (Wear Offset) G10 Y±0.4 0. 0.5000 Y±2.3 0. 12.700
Z (Tool Offset) G10 Z±2.5 0. - Z±3.4 0. -
Z (Wear Offset) G10 Z±0.5 0. 0.50000 Z±2.4 0. 12.7000
Z (Zero Offset) G10 Z±2.5 0. - Z±3.4 0. -
I (Circ. Inter.) G02, G03 I±3.5 0. 999.99999 I±4.4 0. 9999.9999

K (Circ. Inter.) G02, G03 K±3.5 0. 999.99999 K±4.4 0. 9999.9999
K (Lead Change) G34 K±1.6 0.000001 9.999999 K±3.4 0.0001 500.0000
F (per min) [X/U]11 G98 F3.2 0.01 472.00 F5.0 1. 12000.

F (per min) [Z/W]11 G98 F3.2 0.01 630.00 F5.0 1. 16000.
F (per min) [Y/V] G98 F3.2 0.01 394.00 F5.0 1. 10000.
F (per rev) G99 F1.6 0.000001 9.999999 F3.4 0.0001 500.0000
F (Thread Lead) G32, G33, G34 F1.6 0.000001 9.999999 F3.4 0.0001 500.0000

S (Live Tooling) 6 G97 S4 0 4000 S4 0 4000
S (Surface Speed) G96 S4 1 9999 S4 1 9999
B (Spin. Orient) - B3 0 360 B3 0 360

C (C Axis) - C±5.3 0. 99999.999 C±5.3 0. 99999.999
T (Tool Function) - T4 0 1232 T4 0 1232
A (Angle) G00, G01 A3.4 0.0001 359.9999 A3.4 .001 359.9999

,C (Chamfer) G01 ,C2.5 0.00001 - ,C3.4 .0001 -
R (Radius) G02, G03 R2.5 - - R3.4 - -
,R (Radius) G01 ,R2.5 0.00001 - ,R3.4 .0001 -
Table 1.2 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments

(CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® CNC Lathes)
Reference:
7 - Lathes NOT equipped with optional sub-spindle.
8 - Lathes equipped with optional sub-spindle.
9 - Lathes equipped with optional 1.60 inch offset ball screw driven sub-spindle.
10 - Lathes equipped with optional 0.46 inch offset ball screw driven sub-spindle.
11 - Relating to CONQUEST T42 and T42SP Lathes only.
12 - Relating to CONQUEST T42-L Lathes only.
M-320A 1-3
LEGAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS
Legal alpha characters for the GE Fanuc 18T control are those used as word addresses in a
part program block that the control will accept and act on. All illegal alpha characters input
through the RS-232 serial port will be loaded into memory, but will result in a decoding error
when program execution is attempted. The illegal character must be removed or replaced with a
legal character. The following characters are illegal:
D, E, J, and L
SPECIAL PROGRAMMING CHARACTERS
An End of Record character should be the first and last character in a program which is to be
uploaded to the machine control through the RS-232 serial port. If multiple programs are to be
loaded from a single punched tape, punch the End of Record character after the last program on
the tape. The End of Record character will be followed by an End of Block character.
The End of Block character must be used after the last character in each data block of a part
program that is to be loaded into the memory of the control. If the End of Block character is
omitted from a part program data block, the control will consider the next block to be part of the
block missing the End of Block. This may cause undesirable machine behavior.
The End of Block character is a Carriage Return character in EIA (RS-224-B) format and a
Line Feed character in ASCII (ISO) (RS-358-B) format. When programming from the keyboard,
use the EOB key. This character will be displayed as a semicolon (;) on the control display
screen.
Operator messages and comments can be included in a part program loaded from tape,
provided they are enclosed in parentheses. Any legal ASCII character can be used when writing
a comment.
The Block Skip (/) code inserted at the beginning of a data block will cause that block of data
to be ignored by the control when “BLOCK SKIP” is activated by the machine operator. When
Block Skip is not active, the data block will be executed.
PROGRAMMING FORMAT
Programs to be executed by the GE Fanuc 18T control consist of alpha-numeric words that
the control recognizes as specific commands. These words consist of one letter addresses and
the designated numbers for that address. Words within a block may follow any convenient se-
quence. However, Hardinge recommends the following sequence:
/, N, G, X, Z, U, W, B, C, I, K, P, Q, R, A, F, S, T, M
The software for the system is configured to provide the following programming resolution:
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes: .0001 inch [.001 mm]
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes: .00001 inch [.0001 mm]
This causes specific data word formats to be applied to the associated values. These formats
are outlined in each of the data word descriptions and are also listed in the tables on pages 1-2
and 1-3. These numbers indicate the maximum number of places allowed to the right and left of
the decimal point.
A plus sign need not be entered since the control assumes plus if no sign is entered. A minus
sign MUST be programmed, if needed.
The general part program format is shown on page 1-40. The Safe Start Subprogram shown
in the program format is described in Chapter 9 of this manual.
1-4 M-320A
PROGRAMMING SEQUENCE
Tape Programming Sequence:
The sequence in which a tape should be programmed is as follows:
1. A few inches of tape feed (leader), as required.
2. Enter program ID code and program number. All programs are identified by the letter “O”
in front of the part program ID number and may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999).
Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID
code and program number are followed by a valid End of Block character.
3. Enter the program.
4. End of Program command (M02, M30) in the last data block. All data blocks must end
with a valid End of Block character.
5. Enter an End of Record character.
6. A few inches of tape feed (trailer), as required.
Keyboard Programming Sequence:
To program from the keyboard, follow this procedure:
1. Press the Edit push button.
2. Press the Program key.
3. Turn the Program Protect key switch to OFF.
- NOTE -
Part programs are identified by the letter “O” in front of the part program ID number
and may have 4 place ID numbers (1 - 8999). Program numbers 9000 through
9999 are reserved for macro programs. The program ID code and program number
are followed by a valid End of Block character. An example of a program number is
“O2222".
4. Key in the letter O and program number.
5. Press the Insert key.
6. Press the EOB key to enter an End of Block character.
7. Press the Insert key.
8. Enter each data block as follows:
a) Key in the letter addresses and values.
b) Press the EOB key.
c) Press the Insert key.
NOTE
A valid End of Block character must be entered at the end of each data block.
9. The End of Program command (M02 or M30) must be placed at the end of the program,
followed by a valid End of Block character.
10. Turn the Program Protect key switch to ON.
M-320A 1-5
PROGRAM NUMBER
Part programs stored in the control memory must be assigned a part program number. The
program numbers are used by the control to identify the various programs and subprograms
which are stored in the control memory.
The program number MUST be identified by the letter “O” followed by the program identifica-
tion number. It is not necessary to program the leading zeros as these are automatically inserted
by the control, when needed. The program number must be on the first line of the program. It
may be programmed on a line by itself or it may be the first entry in the first data block.
The part program numbers range from 1 to 8999. However, the following restrictions must be
observed when assigning program numbers:
1. Alpha and other miscellaneous characters (such as dashes) are not allowed.
2. Program numbers 9000 through 9999 are reserved for permanent macro programs en-
tered on the Master Macro Tape. These numbers cannot be assigned to other part
programs or macros.
- NOTE -
When entering a program from the keyboard, if the program identification number is
omitted, the active part program will be edited according to the data entered when
the Insert key is pressed. If one of the 9000 series permanent macro programs is
active and no program number is entered, the first program data block will be
rejected and the message “Write Protect” will be displayed on the control display
screen.
When a tape which does not contain a program identification number is loaded into memory,
the control will automatically assign the first programmed sequence number as the program
number.
Any attempt to store programs having numbers already stored in program memory will cause
the message “Already Exists” to be displayed on the control display screen. This message indi-
cates that the program identification number has already been assigned.
X AND Z AXES
The axis of motion parallel to the spindle face is the X axis and the axis of motion parallel to
the spindle centerline is the Z axis. From this point on, the cross slide will be referred to as the X
axis and the carriage as the Z axis. These letter designations for the two axes are recommended
by the Electronic Industries Association (E.I.A.). In an effort to promote interchangeability and
prevent misunderstandings between CNC manufacturers and purchasers, recommended stand-
ards have been set forth by E.I.A. These standards include the following: axis designation, axis
motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape, operational command format, data
format, and electrical interface between controls and machine tools.
1-6 M-320A
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
A decimal point should be used with the following address words: A, C, F, I, K, R, U, W, X,
and Z. If a decimal point is programmed in a word in which a decimal point is not allowed (P, Q,
or B word) or if two or more decimal points appear in any one data word, an error message will
be displayed.
Values with or without decimal points may be commanded in the same data block.
Trailing zeros need not be programmed when using decimal point programming.
If no decimal point is programmed, the control uses the appropriate data word format to insert
leading zeros and properly position the decimal point.
Example: In Inch mode on the CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe, the format for
the Z word is ±2.5 . If Z4. is programmed, the control will assume Z4.00000 .
- CAUTION -
The programmer must make certain all decimal points are correctly positioned
to prevent undesirable machine behavior.
This assumed decimal point is an important concept to keep in mind. There can be a great
deal of difference between values with and without decimal points.
Example: The command “X2.” sends the cross slide to coordinate X2.00000; however, the
command “X2" (no decimal point) sends the cross slide to X.00002 . Be sure the
decimal point is programmed when allowed.
Besides specifying the location of the assumed decimal point, the word address format also
indicates the maximum number of digits which can appear to the left and right of the decimal
point.
M-320A 1-7
DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS
On the following pages are descriptions of the data words used with the GE Fanuc 18T
control.
O WORD
The O word is used as the letter address for part program numbers and must precede the
part program identification number. Refer to “Program Number”, on page 1-6.
N WORD
The N word provides a sequence number consisting of the letter “N” and up to four digits
(0000 - 9999). It is not required to have a sequence number in any block. When used, they may
be placed anywhere in the block; however, it is customary to program them as the first word in
the block, except when a Block Delete (/) is programmed. Block Delete codes, when pro-
grammed, will be the first character in a block.
The N word does not affect machine operation. However, it does give operators a valuable
reference should they wish to relate an operation being performed to the program manuscript.
The numbering sequence can begin with any number, such as N0001. It is recommended that
the programmer assign sequence numbers in intervals of five or ten so that additional blocks can
be inserted into the program if necessary. This eliminates the necessity of reassigning sequence
numbers after blocks are added to the program. The only exception to this recommendation is
that the block starting each operation be assigned the number of the turret station to be used for
that operation. For example, when using turret station #6, N6 will be the block number to start
the operation.
Leading zeros may be omitted.
G WORD
The G word is a preparatory command which sets up the control for a specific type of opera-
tion. It has the word format G3, with a range of 00 to 999. Certain G codes are default codes
and are automatically activated by the control under the following conditions:
1. Machine Power-up
2. Reading an End of Program Code (M02/M30)
3. Control Reset
4. Emergency Stop
The G codes are of two types:
1. Non-modal G codes are effective only in the block in which they are programmed.
2. Modal G codes remain effective until replaced by another G code in the same group.
The chart in Appendix 2 lists the G codes that are used with the GE Fanuc 18T control by
groups.
Only one G code from each group is permitted in a data block. If more than one G code from
a group is programmed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the last of the conflicting G
codes entered in the data block will be the active G code.
G codes containing a leading zero may be programmed without the zero.
Example: G01 may be programmed as G1
1-8 M-320A
G00 Positioning
(Group 1 G Code)
This positioning command generates linear motion on one or more axes (X, Y, or Z) from the
current position to the programmed end points at a rate determined by the Rapid Override
switch. When this switch is set to 100%, axis motion takes place at the rapid traverse rates
shown below. Rapid traverse rates are shown as inches per minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST® T42 & T42SP Lathes
X Axis: 755 [19200] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Y Axis: 394 [10000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP Lathes
Z Axis: 630 [16000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP Lathes
Z Axis: 1004 [255000] CONQUEST T42-L Lathes
Axis distance may be expressed as X, Y, and Z for absolute moves or U, V, and W for
incremental moves.
A programmed feedrate (F Function) in a G00 block is ignored by the control.
When the turret is programmed to move in both axes (X & Z), the axes execute a vectorial
move at a traverse rate which is a result of the X and Z rapid traverse. When a G00 positioning
move is programmed and the Rapid Override switch is set to 100%, both axes will move at
maximum traverse.
The G00 command is modal. A programmed G00 command will cancel any currently active
Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G00 command.
G01 Linear Interpolation
(Group 1 G Code)
Linear Interpolation generates linear motion on one or more axes (X, Y, or Z) from the current
position to the programmed end points at a rate specified by a feedrate command in the same
block or by an active feedrate from a preceding block. The programmed feedrate is directly
affected by the Feedrate Override switches.
The maximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Programmable feedrates are shown
as inches per minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST T42 & T42SP Lathes
Axis distance may be expressed as X, Y, and Z for absolute moves or U, V, and W for
incremental moves. When both the X and Z axes are programmed for a taper cut, the control will
compensate X and Z axis feedrates to produce a vectorial velocity equal to the programmed
feedrate. That is, when both axes are programmed, a vectorial move is generated.
M-320A 1-9
G02 Clockwise Arc
(Group 1 G Code)
Refer to Figure 3.4 for the path traced by the tool for a clockwise arc.
The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when looking
downward at the plan view of the workpiece.
The G02 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) to
provide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.
Refer to “Circular Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc
(Group 1 G Code)
Refer to Figure 3.4 for the path traced by the tool for a counter-clockwise arc.
The arc direction is determined by the rotational direction of the cutting tool when looking
downward at the plan view of the workpiece.
The G03 command is used with I and K words (arc center offset) or R word (radius) to
provide the necessary qualifying dimensions of the arc.
G04 Dwell
(Group 0 G Code)
A dwell command must be programmed with a X, U, or P word to specify the duration of the
dwell in seconds. The range of dwell is as follows:
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes: .001 to 99999.999 seconds.
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes: .0001 to 9999.9999 seconds.
The G04 Preparatory Command and its associated X, U, or P word must be programmed
together in a data block that does not generate axis motion.
- NOTE -
Decimal point programming cannot be used when the P word is used to specify the
dwell period. The P word specifies dwell in milliseconds. Leading zero suppression
format must be used.
DWELL IN SECONDS:
A dwell of 2.5 seconds may be programmed in any of the following ways:
G04 X2.5
G04 U2.5
G04 P2500
The dwell code is non-modal and does not change the status of any modal condition of the
control. Following the dwell, the operating mode reverts to the same status as before the dwell.
The previous feedrate is reinstated.
1-10 M-320A
G10 Offset Value Setting
(Group 0 G Code)
The G10 command permits entering the Work Shift Offset and Tool Offsets with the part
program or as a separate program instead of entering the offset(s) individually from the Manual
Data Input keyboard.
When offsets are entered as a separate program, this program must be executed prior to part
program execution to insert the offset values into the offset registers.
As many offsets as needed may be entered from a separate tape. The G10 preparatory
command is non-modal and must be programmed in each offset entry block.
Refer to Chapter 4, “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”.
G17 Work Plane Selection [Option]
(Group 16 G Code)
The G17 command is used during C axis programming to select the X,C plane as the active
work plane. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional information.
(Group 16 G Code)
The G18 command is used during C axis programming to select the X,Z plane as the active
(Group 16 G Code)
The G19 command is used during C axis programming to select the Z,C plane as the active
G20 Inch Data Input
(Group 6 G Code)
Inch mode allows the programmer to program in inch units. The command is modal and can
be canceled only by a G21 (metric mode) command. Pressing the Reset key has no affect on
G20. If G20 is active when power is turned OFF, it will be active when power is restored. G20
must be programmed in a block by itself.
- NOTE -
It is recommended that all programs written with inch dimensions have the G20
code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in case
the previously executed program was in metric mode.
G21 Metric Data Input
(Group 6 G Code)
Metric mode allows the programmer to program in metric units. The command is modal and
can be canceled only by a G20 (inch mode) command. Pressing the Reset key has no affect on
G21. If G21 is active when power is turned OFF, It will be active when power is restored. G21
must be programmed in a block by itself.
- NOTE -
It is recommended that all programs written with metric dimensions have the G21
code at the beginning of the program to ensure the correct format is active in case
the previously executed program was in inch mode.
M-320A 1-11
G22 Stored Stroke Limits ON [Option]
(Group 9 G Code)
With G22 active, stored stroke limit #2 is active. The tool cannot enter the stroke limits estab-
lished by these stored stroke limits.
- NOTE -
Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G22 is inactive.
G22 is active at power-up regardless of whether it was active when the power was turned
OFF. However, a control reset will not return the control to G22 if G23 is active when the control
reset is performed.
G23 Stored Stroke Limits OFF [Option]
(Group 9 G Code)
With G23 active, stored stroke limit #2 is inactive. The tool is free to move within the rectangu-
lar areas established by these limits.
- NOTE -
Stored stroke limit #1 is active even if G23 is active.
G32 Threadcutting (Constant Lead)
(Group 1 G Code)
The G32 threadcutting command is used when the programmer wishes to maintain complete
control over the depth of each cutting pass.
Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread is
determined by the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requires
programming one axis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to be
programmed.
The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distance
between each thread. The data word format is shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Inch Mode Metric Mode
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes F1.6 F3.4
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes F1.6 F3.4
Example: The command “G32 W-6. F.05" will result in a linear thread cutting pass 6 inches
long with a .05 inch lead.
The Feedrate Override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to 0%.
Setting the Feedrate Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axis
motion. The Feedrate Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stop
push button and Reset key are active during the threading pass.
Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.
1-12 M-320A
G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting [Option]
(Group 1 G Code)
The G34 variable lead threadcutting command is used if thread lead is to increase or de-
crease.
Threading may be done in either, or both the X and Z axes. The length of the thread is
determined by the distance command for X and/or Z. If a linear thread is to be cut, it requires
programming one axis. If a tapered thread is to be cut, it requires both the X and Z axes to be
programmed.
The lead command is entered as an F word whose value is determined by the distance
between each thread.
The K word specifies the rate per revolution at which the lead increases or decreases. A
positive (+) K causes an increasing lead and a negative (-) K causes a decreasing lead.
The data word formats are shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
F1.6 F3.4
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe
K±1.6 K±3.4
F1.6 F3.4
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe
K±1.6 K±3.4
The Feedrate Override switches are not effective during the threading pass unless set to 0%.
Setting the Feedrate 1 Override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axis
motion. The Feedrate 1 Override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stop
Refer to Chapter 7 for information on threading cycles.
G40 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(Group 7 G Code)
Tool Nose radius compensation (G41/G42) is canceled by a programmed G40. If G40 is
programmed in a block by itself, tool compensation is canceled. If the G40 block contains an
axis move, tool compensation is canceled; then, the programmed move occurs without compen-
sation. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be canceled when the Emergency Stop push button
or the Reset key is pressed.
Refer to Chapter 2, “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”.
M-320A 1-13
G41 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Right of Tool
(Group 7 G Code)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool is established by
programming G41. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool
motion. If the workpiece is to the right of the operator, the correct code is G41. G41 may be
programmed with or without position data in the same data block.
G42 Tool Nose Radius Compensation - Workpiece Left of Tool
(Group 7 G Code)
Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool is established by
programming G42. Imagine the operator sitting on the tool facing in the direction of the tool
motion. If the workpiece is to the left of the operator, the correct code is G42. G42 may be
programmed with or without position data in the same data block.
G50 Maximum RPM Limit
(Group 0 G Code)
The G50 command is used with Constant Surface Speed to establish a spindle rpm limit. The
following example establishes a spindle speed limit of 4000 rpm.
Example: G50 S4000;
A Control OFF cancels a G50 rpm limit.
Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on Constant Surface Speed.
G65 Macro Call
(Group 0 G Code)
To activate a particular macro and have it executed from the current slide position, program
the following macro call command:
G65 P_____ ;
Where:G65 = Macro Call Command
P = Macro Program Number
The G65 command is non-modal. After the G65 command block is executed, G65 mode is
deactivated.
Refer to Chapter 9 for additional information on the G65 Macro Call command.
G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle
(Group 0 G Code)
The G70 command is used in conjunction with canned roughing cycles G71, G72, or G73 to
specify the section of the workpiece to be finish contoured. The G70 data block specifies the first
and last block in the part program controlling the section to be finish contoured. Refer to the
following sections for additional information:
G71/G70 Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Turning, Chapter 6
G72/G70 Multiple Repetitive Rough and Finish Facing, Chapter 6
G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat, Chapter 6
1-14 M-320A
G71 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle
(Group 0 G Code)
The G71 canned cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program rough contour-
ing of a workpiece with multiple turning passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-
tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G71 blocks specify the amount of stock to be
removed on each roughing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the first
and last block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.
Refer to “G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G72 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle
(Group 0 G Code)
ing of a workpiece with multiple facing passes. This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-
tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G72 blocks specify the amount of stock to be
removed on each roughing pass, the amount of stock to be left for finish contouring, and the first
and last block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.
Refer to “G72/G70 Rough and Finish Facing Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G73 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle
(Group 0 G Code)
ing repeatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour). This automatic cycle is usually used in conjunc-
tion with the G70 Auto Finishing Cycle. The G73 blocks specify the incremental distance be-
tween the first and last roughing pass, the number of roughing passes, and the first and last
block in the part program controlling the rough contouring.
Refer to “G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern Repeat”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G74 Automatic Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)
(Group 0 G Code)
The G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments.
In the G74 block, the programmer specifies the hole depth, size of depth increment, and drilling
feedrate. The G74 command is non-modal, it is effective only in the block in which it is pro-
grammed.
Refer to “Constant Depth Increment Auto Drilling Cycle (G74)”, in Chapter 6, for additional
information.
G75 Automatic Grooving Cycle
(Group 0 G Code)
The G75 command activates an automatic grooving cycle that uses constant depth incre-
ments. All information for the G75 Auto grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks. The
G75 command is non-modal; it is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed.
Refer to “G75 Auto Grooving Cycle”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
M-320A 1-15
G76 Automatic Threading Cycle
(Group 0 G Code)
The G76 Automatic Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program
multiple threading passes with two blocks of information instead of programming four blocks per
threading pass. The G76 command is non-modal and is canceled when the threading cycle is
completed. Straight and tapered threads using plunge or compound infeed can be programmed.
The Feedrate 1 override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to
0%. Setting the Feedrate 1 override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axis
motion. The Feedrate 1 override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stop
The Feed Hold push button is not active during the threading pass.
Refer to “Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76)”, in Chapter 7, for additional information.
G80 Cancel Face Machining Cycle
The G80 command is used to cancel the following cycles:
G81 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle
G83 Peck Face Drilling Cycle
G84 Face Tapping Cycle
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G80 command.
G81 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle
The G81 drilling cycle is used to program the optional end-working turret to perform single
pass drilling operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G81 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle.
G83 Peck Face Drilling Cycle
The G83 drilling cycle is used to program the optional end-working turret to perform peck
drilling operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G83 Peck Face Drilling Cycle.
G84 Face Tapping Cycle
The G84 tapping cycle is used to program the optional end-working turret to perform tapping
operations.
Refer to Chapter 13 for information on the G84 Face Tapping Cycle.
G90 Canned Turning Cycle
(Group 1 G Code)
The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-
ple turning passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G90 block.
Straight or tapered turn operations may be performed. The G90 command is modal. A pro-
grammed G90 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G
code will cancel an active G90 command. G90 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset.
The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons, Feedrate Override switch, and Feed Hold
push button are active.
Refer to “Canned Turning Cycle (G90)”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
1-16 M-320A
G92 Canned Threading Cycle
(Group 1 G Code)
The G92 Canned Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program
multiple threading passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G92
block. Straight or tapered threads may be cut in this mode. Compound infeeding is not possible
in this mode. The G92 command is modal. A programmed G92 command will cancel any cur-
rently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G code will cancel an active G92 command.
G92 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset. The Feed Hold push button is not active
during the threading pass, but is active during the return pass.
The Feedrate 1 override switch is not effective during the threading pass unless it is set to
0%. Setting the Feedrate 1 override switch to 0% during a threading pass will stop X and Z axis
motion. The Feedrate 1 override switch is active during the return pass. The Emergency Stop
Refer to “G92 Programming”, in Chapter 7, for additional information.
G94 Canned Facing Cycle
(Group 1 G Code)
The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability to program multi-
ple facing passes by specifying only the depth of cut in each data block after the G94 block.
Straight or tapered facing operations may be performed. The G94 command is modal. A pro-
grammed G94 command will cancel any currently active Group 1 G code. Any other Group 1 G
code will cancel an active G94 command. G94 can also be canceled by a control OFF or Reset.
The Feedrate Override switch and Feed Hold push button are active.
Refer to “Canned Facing Cycle (G94)”, in Chapter 6, for additional information.
G96 Constant Surface Speed
(Group 2 G Code)
The G96 mode allows programming the speed of the workpiece with respect to the tool point
directly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in metric
mode (G21). Constant Surface Speed is a function of the spindle speed range and the pro-
grammed constant surface speed (S word). The control automatically adjusts the spindle speed
within its range to maintain the constant surface speed as the cutting radius varies. Refer to
“G50 Spindle Limitation” for limiting spindle rpm while using G96 programming. G96 is canceled
by G97. If a new spindle speed is not programmed, the spindle will remain at the speed that was
active when Constant Surface Speed was canceled.
Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 9, for more information.
G97 Direct RPM Programming (Constant Surface Speed Cancel)
(Group 2 G Code)
G97 allows the programmer to program spindle speeds directly in revolutions per minute.
When G97 cancels G96, the spindle speed in rpm equals the speed at which the spindle was
turning when Constant Surface Speed was canceled. If a different spindle speed is desired, an S
word specifying the new spindle speed should be programmed in the same block as the G97
command. The S word format for direct rpm programming is S4.0
M-320A 1-17
G98 Inches/Millimeter per Minute Feedrate
(Group 5 G Code)
The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in inches/mm per minute. The feedrate remains
unchanged until reprogrammed. The F word format is F3.2 in inch mode (G20) and F5.0 in
metric mode (G21). When entering G98 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G98 is
modal and cancels G99. The decimal point must be programmed. The following examples are
written for inch mode (G20):
Example 1: F400 results in a feedrate of 4.00 inches per minute.
Example 2: F400. results in a feedrate of 400.00 inches per minute.
G99 Inches/Millimeter per Revolution Feedrate
(Group 5 G Code)
This is the power-up or reset state. The feedrate (F word) is programmed directly in
inches/mm per revolution. The feedrate remains unchanged until reprogrammed. The F word
format is F1.6 in inch mode (G20) and F3.4 in metric mode (G21). The maximum programmable
feedrates are 9.999999 inches/revolution and 500.0000 millimeters/revolution. When entering
G99 mode, a new feedrate should be programmed. G99 is modal and cancels G98.
G100 End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine [Option]
The G100 command is used to indicate the end of an end-working turret sub-routine, which is
embedded in the main part program. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
G101 Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option]
The G101 command is used to indicate the beginning of end-working turret sub-routine #1,
which is embedded in the main part program. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
G107 Cylindrical Interpolation [Option]
The G107 command activates cylindrical interpolation for C Axis programming. Refer to Chap-
ter 12 for additional information.
G112 Polar Interpolation [Option]
The G112 command activates polar interpolation for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter 12
for additional information.
G113 Cancel Polar Interpolation [Option]
The G113 command cancels polar interpolation. Refer to Chapter 12 for additional informa-
tion.
1-18 M-320A
X WORD
- CAUTION -
Programming an X axis move without the correct Tool or Zero Offset active could
cause the tool to strike the end-working turret, spindle, sub-spindle, tailstock, or
workpiece.
The X word is a DIAMETER DIMENSION for the cross slide. It is measured relative to the
spindle centerline and is written with an X followed by a plus or minus sign. The plus sign may
be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed. The X command
establishes the absolute position of the turret top plate reference location in relation to the spin-
dle centerline after movement has been completed.
- NOTE -
Lathes equipped with 10 station or 12 station turret top plates have the same turret
travel specifications. Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications.
Only one X command is permitted in a data block. If more than one X command is pro-
grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the X command
programmed closest to the End of Block character.
The data word format is shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe X±2.4 X±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe X±2.5 X±3.4
Assuming tool offsets are inactive, X is positive when the turret reference point is programmed
to move to a position behind the spindle centerline. X is negative when the turret reference point
is programmed to move to a position in front of the spindle centerline. X axis programming
resolution is discussed under “Diameter Programming”, page 1-39.
With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed motions will be
the final position of the turret reference point in relation to the spindle centerline. The position will
be displayed as a diameter whose center is on the spindle centerline. When X axis tool offsets
are activated by an offset command (T word), the programmed position will be modified accord-
ing to the offset.
Example: A command of X2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide with the
turret reference point 1.25 inches behind the spindle centerline.
A work shift (zero offset) can be used to establish a work coordinate system in which X0 does
not coincide with the spindle centerline. If X0 for the work coordinate system used is not on the
spindle centerline, all programmed motions will be relative to the X0 established by the work
shift. A movement in the +X direction will cause the X axis to be positioned one-half the pro-
grammed distance behind the zero point. A movement in the -X direction will cause the X axis to
be positioned one-half the programmed distance in front of the zero point. Refer to Chapter 4 for
information regarding the work shift.
The X word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The X word format
in a G04 command is 4.4, in seconds. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.
M-320A 1-19
U WORD
- CAUTION -
Programming a U axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset active
could cause the tool to strike the end-working turret, spindle, sub-spindle, tail-
stock, or workpiece.
The U command establishes the incremental move of the cross slide position in relation to the
current cross slide location.
Only one U command is permitted in a data block. If more than one U command is pro-
grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the U command
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe U±2.4 U±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe U±2.5 U±3.4
U is positive when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the back of the machine. U
is negative when the cross slide is programmed to move toward the front of the machine.
Example: A command of U2.5 will cause the control to position the cross slide 1.25 inches
in the +X direction from the previous position on the X axis.
The U word is also used to give a time factor to a “Dwell” command (G04). The U word format
in a G04 command is 4.4, in seconds. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.
1-20 M-320A
Z WORD
- CAUTION -
Programming a Z axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset active
The Z word is a distance command for the upper carriage. It is measured relative to the main
spindle face and is written with a Z followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus sign may
be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.
- NOTE -
Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications.
Only one Z command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Z command is pro-
grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the Z command
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe Z±2.4 Z±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Z±2.5 Z±3.4
Assuming tool offsets are inactive, Z is positive when the turret reference point is programmed
to the right of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System. Z is negative when the turret refer-
ence point is programmed to the left of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System.
With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed Z axis move-
ments will be the final position of the turret face in relation to the main spindle face. Since all
upper carriage movement must take place to the right of the headstock, all movements regard-
less of direction will be plus (+). When a tool offset and/or a zero offset are active, the pro-
grammed position will be modified accordingly.
Example: A command of “Z5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the upper
carriage with the turret face 5 inches from the main spindle face. A command of
“Z9.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the upper carriage with the
turret face 9 inches from the main spindle face.
A work shift (zero offset) is used to establish a work coordinate system in which Z0 does not
coincide with the main spindle face. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not the main
spindle face, all programmed Z axis movements will be relative to the Z0 established by the work
shift. A positive Z value describes a coordinate point to the right of the Z0 point. A negative Z
value describes a coordinate point to the left of the Z0 point.
M-320A 1-21
W WORD
- CAUTION -
Programming a W axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset active
The W command establishes the incremental move of the upper carriage in relation to the
current carriage location.
Only one W command is permitted in a data block. If more than one W command is pro-
grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the W command
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe W±2.4 W±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe W±2.5 W±3.4
W is positive when the upper carriage is programmed to move away from the spindle face. W
is negative when the upper carriage is programmed to move toward the spindle face.
Example: A command of “W5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the upper
carriage 5 inches in the +Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis. A
command of “W-5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the upper
carriage 5 inches in the -Z direction from the previous position on the Z axis.
1-22 M-320A
Y WORD
- CAUTION -
Programming a Y axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset active
could cause the tool to strike the workpiece.
The Y word is a distance command for the lower carriage on machines equipped with an
end-working turret or a ball screw driven sub-spindle. The Y coordinate is measured relative to
the main spindle face and is written with a Y followed by a plus (+) or minus (-) sign. The plus
sign may be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is programmed.
- NOTE -
The ball screw driven sub-spindle is available in two configurations, which differ
only in travel specifications. Be sure to refer to the appropriate specifications for the
machine to be programmed.
Refer to Appendix One for travel specifications for the end-working turret or ball screw driven
sub-spindle.
Only one Y command is permitted in a data block. If more than one Y command is pro-
grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the Y command
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 Lathe Y±2.4 Y±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Y±2.4 Y±3.3
Assuming tool offsets are inactive, Y is positive when the reference point of the lower axis is
programmed to the right of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordinate System. Y is negative when the
reference point of the lower axis is programmed to the left of Z0 on the Machine Work Coordi-
nate System.
With no tool offset active and no work shift (zero offset) active, all programmed Y axis move-
ments will be the final position of the lower axis reference point in relation to the main spindle
face. Since all lower axis movement must take place to the right of the headstock, all move-
ments regardless of direction will be plus (+). When a tool offset and/or a zero offset are active,
the programmed position will be modified accordingly.
Example: A command of “Y5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lower
carriage with the reference point 5 inches from the main spindle face. A com-
mand of “Y9.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lower carriage
with the reference point 9 inches from the main spindle face.
A work shift (zero offset) is used to establish a work coordinate system in which Z0 does not
coincide with the main spindle face. If Z0 for the work coordinate system used is not the main
spindle face, all programmed Y axis movements will be relative to the Z0 established by the
work shift. A positive Y value describes a coordinate point to the right of the Z0 point. A negative
Y value describes a coordinate point to the left of the Z0 point.
M-320A 1-23
V WORD
- CAUTION -
Programming a V axis move without the correct Tool Offset or Zero Offset active
could cause the tool to strike the workpiece.
The V command establishes the incremental move of the lower carriage on machines
equipped with a ball screw driven sub-spindle. This incremental move is in relation to the current
carriage location.
Only one V command is permitted in a data block. If more than one V command is pro-
grammed in a data block from the keyboard or tape, the control will act on the V command
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 Lathe V±2.4 V±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe V±2.4 V±3.3
V is positive when the lower carriage is programmed to move away from the main spindle
face. V is negative when the lower carriage is programmed to move toward the main spindle
face.
Example: A command of “V5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lower
carriage 5 inches in the +Y direction from the previous position on the Y axis. A
command of “V-5.” with a feedrate will cause the control to position the lower
carriage 5 inches in the -Y direction from the previous position on the Y axis.
B WORD
The B word is a spindle orient command. The spindle is stopped in relation to the spindle 0
(zero) degree mark. For more information, refer to Chapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
C WORD
The C word is an absolute C axis command. The C axis option provides the programmer with
the following machining capabilities:
- Live Tooling with Spindle Orient
- Polar Coordinate Interpolation (face milling)
- Cylindrical Interpolation (contoured milling on the O.D.)
For more information, refer to Chapter 12, “C Axis Programming”.
1-24 M-320A
I WORD
The I word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The I word is a signed value
defining the distance on the X axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a
result of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center.
Data Word Formats

Lathe
(G20) (G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe I±3.4 I±4.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe I±3.5 I±4.4

K WORD
The K word is used during Circular Interpolation and Variable Lead Threadcutting.
Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)
The K word is used during Circular Interpolation (G02/G03). The K word is a signed value
defining the distance on the Z axis from the start point of an arc to the arc center. The sign is a
result of the coordinate direction from the start point to the arc center.
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe K±3.4 K±4.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe K±3.5 K±4.4

(Continued on next page)
M-320A 1-25
Variable Lead Threading (G34) [Option]
The K word specifies the change in thread lead per spindle revolution. The value is positive
for an increasing lead and negative for a decreasing lead.
The word format is shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe K±1.5 K±3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe K±1.6 K±3.4
Refer to “Variable Lead Threadcutting”, in Chapter 7.

R WORD
Linear Interpolation (G01)
When Linear Interpolation (G01) is active, “,R” defines the numerical values of a corner radius
between any linear (G01) moves. The data word format is shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe ,R2.4 ,R3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe ,R2.5 ,R3.4
Refer to “Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius”, in Chapter 3.

Circular Interpolation (G02/G03)
When Circular Interpolation (G02 or G03) is active, R defines the numerical value of a radius
connecting two points. The data word format is shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe R2.4 R3.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe R2.5 R3.4

1-26 M-320A
Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42)
When Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41 or G42) is active, R defines the numerical value
of the tool nose radius. Values are stored in the Tool Offset Tables and are activated by a T
command. The data word format is shown in the following table:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe R1.4 R2.3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe R1.5 R2.4
Refer to “Tool Nose Radius Compensation”, in Chapter 2.

Defining Tapers
When used with the following cycles, the R word defines the amount of taper when a tapered
turning, threading, or facing cycle is executed:
Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76), Chapter 7
Canned Turning Cycle (G90), Chapter 6
G92 Programming, Chapter 7
Canned Facing Cycle (G94), Chapter 6
M-320A 1-27
P WORD
The P word is used in the following functions:
Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70), Chapter 6
Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle (G71), Chapter 6
Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle (G72), Chapter 6
Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73), Chapter 6
Subprogram Calling, Chapter 9
Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4
The P word may also be used to establish a time factor for a G04 Dwell. The P word has the
data word format P8 when used to specify dwell. Refer to “G04 Dwell”, page 1-10.
When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the P word specifies the sequence number of
the first block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured.
When used with the G70 cycle, the P word specifies the sequence number of the first block in
the program section that controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data word
format is P4. Leading zeros may be omitted.
- NOTE -
Decimal Point programming cannot be used with the P word. Leading zero sup-
pression must be used.
When used with subprogram calling, the P word appears in the M98 calling block of the main
part program and specifies the program I.D. number of the subprogram to be called. The data
word format is P4. Leading zeros may be omitted.
When used with tape entry of tool offsets or work shift offsets, the P word specifies the offset
number and has the following numerical ranges:
P00 when used with Work shift Offset
P01 to P32 when used with tool wear offsets
P10001 to P10032 when used with tool geometry offsets
Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool offsets in memory.
Q WORD
The Q word is used in the following functions:
Automatic Finishing Cycle (G70), Chapter 6
Multiple Repetitive Rough Turning Cycle (G71), Chapter 6
Multiple Repetitive Rough Facing Cycle (G72), Chapter 6
Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle (G73), Chapter 6
Program Entry of Tool Offsets, Chapter 4
When used with the G71, G72, and G73 cycles, the Q word specifies the Sequence Number
of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiece area being rough contoured.
When used with the G70 cycle, the Q word specifies the sequence number of the last block in
the program section that controls the workpiece area being finish contoured. The data word
format is Q4. Leading zeros may be omitted.
When tool geometry offsets are entered by tape, the Q word specifies the tool tip orientation
number. The data word format is Q1, with numerical values ranging from 0 to 9. Refer to “Tool
Offsets”, in Chapter 4.
1-28 M-320A
F WORD
The F word is used to establish a feedrate. When used with the G98 command, it expresses
the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute. The word format is F3.2 for inch mode (G20)
and F5.0 for metric mode (G21). The decimal point must be programmed.
When used with the G99 command, it expresses the feedrate in inches or millimeters per
revolution. The word format is F1.6 for inch mode (G20) and F3.4 for metric mode (G21). The
decimal point must be programmed. If more than one feedrate is programmed in a data block,
the last feedrate programmed will be the active feedrate.
Due to the maximum feedrates on the X, Y, and Z axes, the feedrate in G99 mode is “Lead
Limited”. When G99 mode is active, the maximum feedrate in G01 mode is derived from the
following formulas:
Maximum Feedrate (in/min) = inches per minute ÷ rev/min
Maximum Feedrate (mm/min) = mm per minute ÷ rev/min
The maximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Feedrates are shown as inches per
minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST® T42 & T42SP Lathes
The F word, which can be placed anywhere in the data block, remains unchanged until repro-
grammed. If G00 is used to obtain the rapid traverse rate, be sure it is canceled by another
Group 1 G code after the rapid traverse move is completed.
The Feedrate Override switches modify the programmed feedrate from 0% (Feed Hold) to
150%. When Dry Run mode is active, the control causes all slide motion to take place at a
feedrate selected with the Feedrate Override switches.
S WORD
The S word has several functions, depending on the G code it is associated with:
CODE FUNCTION:
G50 S word selects the spindle rpm limit for Constant Surface Speed
G96 S word specifies surface feet/meters per minute in Constant Surface Speed
G97 S word selects direct spindle rpm
When used with G50, the S word specifies the maximum rpm the spindle can attain during
Constant Surface Speed programming (G96).
In G96 Constant Surface Speed programming, the format is S4 in both inch and metric
modes. The units are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute
in metric mode (G21). Refer to “Constant Surface Speed”, in Chapter 9.
When used in G97 direct rpm mode, the word format is S4. Maximum spindle speeds are
listed in the tables on pages 1-2 and 1-3. The S word is modal, and once programmed, need not
be programmed again until a different spindle speed is required.
Do not program a decimal point with the S word.
M-320A 1-29
T WORD
The T word selects the turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position and activates
the Tool Offset number. The Tool Offset number selects the following:
Tool Geometry Offset File:
1. X and Z axis Tool Dimensions.
2. Tool Nose Radius Value.
3. Tool Orientation Number.
Tool Wear Offset File:
1. X and Z axis Tool Wear adjustments.
The T word has the word format T4. The first two digits specify the turret station and the last
two digits specify the location of the tool offsets. Note that both the geometry and wear offsets
are activated by the last two digits.
Example: N0120 G04 T0515;
Block N0120 calls for turret station 5. Tool geometry offsets on line 15 of the Tool Offset
Geometry File will be activated and tool wear offsets on line 15 of the Tool Wear File will also be
activated.
- CAUTION -
If no tool offsets are to be activated, the last two digits MUST be 00. If no digits
are programmed in the last two places, the turret will not index. Instead, the con-
trol will use the turret station number as an offset and activate that offset. This
could result in a collision as the control will attempt to position the previously
active tool using incorrect offsets or no offsets at all.
For example, if the turret is to be indexed to station 5 without an offset, T0500 must be
programmed. If T05 is programmed, the turret will not be indexed to station 5, but offset 05 will
be activated.
A turret command of “T0" should be inserted before indexing to a new turret station and at the
end of each operation to cause the active tool offsets to be cleared from the offset registers.
- NOTE -
When the Hardinge Safe-Start formats are used, it is not necessary to program
“T0" before indexing to a new turret station. ”T0" is included in the Safe-Start sub-
programs. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on Safe Start subprograms.
1-30 M-320A
M WORD
The M words convey action to the machine. They are known as miscellaneous functions and
are designated by a programmed M word having the format M2.
Only one M code is allowed in a data block. If more than one M code is programmed in a
block from the keyboard or tape, the last M code entered will be the active M code. Refer also to
the M code chart in Appendix 2.
The M code may be placed anywhere in the data block.
The following M codes have been assigned to Hardinge CONQUEST® T42 series lathes
equipped with the GE Fanuc 18T control:
M00 Program Stop
The M00 command stops the program, stops the spindle, and turns the coolant off. The Collet
Open/Close push button is enabled. This function can be used for gauging and end-for-ending
the workpiece. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program to continue. It is the programmer’s
responsibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, M14, M51, M52, M53, or M54 to restart the
spindle or live tooling (option) and/or coolant pump when restarting the program after an M00
Program Stop.
M01 Optional Stop
The M01 command performs the same function as M00, if the Optional Stop push button on
the control panel has been activated before the block containing the M01 is read by the control.
If the Optional Stop push button has not been activated by the operator, the control will ignore
the programmed M01 and will continue to execute the program. This function is useful when it is
necessary to gauge the workpiece during setup. Pressing Cycle Start causes the program to
continue. It is the programmer’s responsibility to program an M03, M04, M08, M13, M14, M51,
M52, M53, or M54 to restart the spindle or live tooling (option) and/or coolant pump when restart-
ing the program after an M01 Optional Stop.
M02 End of Program
M02 indicates the end of a part program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It
stops the spindle and turns the coolant off. The Collet Open/Close push button is enabled. Refer
also to M30.
M03 Main Spindle Forward
The M03 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwise
as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M03 remains active until canceled by M00,
M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.
M04 Main Spindle Reverse
The M04 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counter-
clockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M04 remains active until canceled
by M00, M01, M02, M03, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop
push button.
M-320A 1-31
M05 Main Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF
The M05 command causes the spindle to stop and turns the coolant off, but DOES NOT stop
axis motion unless G99 is active. M05 remains active until canceled by M03, M04, M13, or M14.
M05 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02, M30, Reset,
and Emergency Stop.
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle [Option]
M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the the sub-spindle to
match the main spindle. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically
driven sub-spindle. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven
sub-spindle.
M08 Coolant ON
M08 turns the coolant pump ON and remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M05,
M09, M30, M51, M52, Reset, or Emergency Stop.
M09 Coolant OFF
M09 turns the coolant pump OFF and remains active until canceled by M08, M13, M14, M53,
or M54. M09 is active at machine start-up and is activated by M00, M01, M02, M05, M30, M51,
M52, Reset, or Emergency Stop.
M10 High Pressure Coolant ON [Option]
M10 causes the high pressure coolant to be turned ON if this option is activated. The spindle
must be rotating and the guard door must be closed to activate the high pressure coolant fea-
ture. M10 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M11, M30, or Emergency Stop.
M11 High Pressure Coolant OFF [Option]
M11 causes the high pressure coolant to be turned OFF. M11 is active at machine start-up
and remains active until canceled by M10.
M13 Main Spindle Forward/Coolant ON
The M13 command causes the spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. The spindle is running in the forward
direction when rotating clockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M13 re-
mains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M14, M30, or by pressing the Reset
key or Emergency Stop push button.
If M04 is programmed after M13, the spindle will run in the reverse direction and the coolant
pump will remain ON.
M14 Main Spindle Reverse/Coolant ON
The M14 command causes the spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word) and turns the coolant pump ON. The spindle is running in the reverse
direction when rotating counterclockwise as viewed from the headstock end of the machine. M14
remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M04, M05, M13, M30, or by pressing the
Reset key or Emergency Stop push button.
If M03 is programmed after M14, the spindle will run in the forward direction and the coolant
pump will remain ON.
1-32 M-320A
M17 Headwall Coolant ON
- NOTE -
The headwall coolant system obtains coolant from the standard machine coolant
system; therefore, the standard coolant system must be turned ON for headwall
coolant to flow.
The M17 command causes the headwall coolant to turn ON. M17 remains active until can-
celed by M02, M18, M30, and Reset.
M18 Headwall Coolant OFF
The M18 command causes the headwall coolant to turn OFF. M18 is active at power-up and
remains active until canceled by M17.
M21 Open Collet
The M21 command causes the main spindle collet closer to release the workpiece. M21 re-
mains active until canceled by M22.
M22 Close Collet
The M22 command causes the main spindle collet closer to grip the workpiece. M22 remains
active until canceled by M21.
M23 Activate Contouring Mode [Option]
The M23 command activates contouring mode for C Axis programming. Refer to Chapter 12
for additional information.
M24 Cancel Contouring Mode [Option]
The M24 command cancels contouring mode, which is used for C Axis programming. Refer to
Chapter 12 for additional information.
M25 Part Catcher Retract [Option]
- CAUTION -
Refer to Chapter 16 for information on using the part catcher with a ball-screw
driven sub-spindle.
MACHINES WITHOUT END-WORKING TURRET
The M25 command causes the part catcher to swing into position to drop the workpiece.
This is an axial motion.
MACHINES WITH END-WORKING TURRET
The M25 command causes the part catcher plunger to retract, positioning the part catcher
cone parallel with the spindle centerline. The part catcher must be in this position to retrieve
the workpiece from the spindle. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
M-320A 1-33
M26 Part Catcher Extend [Option]
- CAUTION -
Refer to Chapter 16 for information on using the part catcher with a ball-screw
driven sub-spindle.
MACHINES WITHOUT END-WORKING TURRET
The M26 command causes the part catcher to swing into position to catch the workpiece.
This is an axial motion.
MACHINES WITH END-WORKING TURRET
The M26 command causes the part catcher plunger to extend, moving the part catcher
cone into position to release the workpiece. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional information.
M28 External Chucking Mode
M28 commands the control to use the main spindle collet closer with external-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the main spindle collet closer is checked on power-up and
the closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the main spindle collet closer is open at
power-up, it will remain open.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information on
establishing chucking modes.
M29 Internal Chucking Mode
M29 commands the control to use the main spindle collet closer with internal-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the main spindle collet closer is checked on power-up and
the closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the main spindle collet closer is open at
power-up, it will remain open.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information on estab-
lishing chucking modes.
M30 End of Program
M30 indicates the end of a program and is usually found in the last block programmed. It
stops the spindle, turns the coolant off, and rewinds the program to its beginning. The Collet
Open/Close push button is enabled. Refer also to M02.
M31 Program Rewind and Restart
The M31 command causes the program to be restarted automatically, when followed by an
M30 command.
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle [Option]
M07 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the the sub-spindle to match the main
spindle. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically driven sub-spin-
dle. Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven sub-spindle.
1-34 M-320A
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward [Option]
The M33 command causes the sub-spindle to run in the forward direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the forward direction when rotating clockwise
as viewed from the sub-spindle end of the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00,
M01, M02, M34, M35, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push button. Refer
to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically driven sub-spindle. Refer to
Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven sub-spindle.
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse [Option]
The M34 command causes the sub-spindle to run in the reverse direction at the programmed
spindle speed (S word). The spindle is running in the reverse direction when rotating counter-
clockwise as viewed from the sub-spindle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceled
by M00, M01, M02, M33, M35, M30, or by pressing the Reset key or Emergency Stop push
button. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically driven sub-spindle.
Refer to Chapter 16 for more information concerning the ball screw driven sub-spindle.
M35 Sub-Spindle Stop [Option]
The M35 command causes the sub-spindle to stop, but DOES NOT stop axis motion unless
G99 is active. M35 remains active until canceled by M33 or M34. M35 is active at machine
start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02, M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop.
M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ON [Option]
The M36 command turns the main spindle air blast ON if this option is active. The guard door
must be closed to activate the air blast feature.
M37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF [Option]
The M37 command turns the main spindle air blast OFF.
M38 Automatic Guard Door Open [Option]
The M38 command causes the main coolant guard door to open.
M39 Automatic Guard Door Close [Option]
The M39 command causes the main coolant guard door to close.
M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop
M42 is a modal command activating Exact Stop. Exact Stop permits approaching a pro-
grammed position exactly. The feedrate is decreased until it is equal to zero and the following
error is eliminated. M42 is canceled by M30, M43, or Reset.
M43 Corner Rounding
M43 is a modal command which is used if no exact position stop is desired from one block to
the next. M43 is active on machine power-up, after an M02/M30 command, and after the control
has been reset. M43 cancels M42 Exact Stop.
M44 Enable Main Turret Bi-Directional Index
M44 enables the bi-directional indexing feature of the control. M44 is active on machine
power-up. M44 is modal and cancels M45. M44 can be canceled by programming an M45 com-
mand
M-320A 1-35
M45 Disable Main Turret Bi-Directional Index
M45 disables the bi-directional indexing feature of the control. When M45 is active the main
turret top plate will rotate only in a clockwise direction, as viewed from the spindle. M45 is modal
and cancels M44. M45 can be canceled by programming an M44 command or powering down
the control.
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON [Option]
The M46 command turns the sub-spindle draw tube wiper air supply ON if this option is
active. The guard door must be closed to activate the wiper air supply.
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF [Option]
The M47 command turns the sub-spindle draw tube wiper air supply OFF.
M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Override
M48 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the use of the feedrate and
spindle override features. M48 remains active until canceled by M49.
M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Override
M49 cancels M48 and causes the feedrates and spindle speeds to operate at 100% of the
programmed values, ignoring the feedrate and spindle override controls. M49 remains active until
canceled by an M02, M30, M48, a control OFF, or a control Reset.
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF (Live Tooling Option Only)
M51 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the forward direction with
the coolant turned OFF. M51 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the
reverse direction with the coolant turned OFF. M51 cancels M52, M53, M54, and M55. Refer to
Chapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF (Live Tooling Option Only)
M52 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the reverse direction with
the coolant turned OFF. M52 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the
forward direction with the coolant turned OFF. M52 cancels M51, M53, M54, and M55. Refer to
M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON (Live Tooling Option Only)
M53 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the forward direction with
the coolant turned ON. M53 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the
reverse direction with the coolant turned ON. M53 cancels M51, M52, M54, and M55. Refer to
M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON (Live Tooling Option Only)
M54 causes cross-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the reverse direction with
the coolant turned ON. M54 causes end-working tool holders to rotate the live tooling in the
forward direction with the coolant turned ON. M54 cancels M51, M52, M53, and M55. Refer to
M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF (Live Tooling Option Only)
M55 causes live tooling to stop rotating and turns the coolant OFF. M55 cancels M51, M52,
M53, and M54. Refer to Chapter 11, “Live Tooling”.
1-36 M-320A
M56 Sub-Spindle Collet Open [Option]
The M56 command causes the sub-spindle collet closer to release the workpiece. M56 re-
mains active until canceled by M57.
M57 Sub-Spindle Collet Close [Option]
The M57 command causes the sub-spindle collet closer to grip the workpiece. M57 remains
active until canceled by M56.
M60 Synchronization Code [Option]
The M60 synchronization code used to coordinate machine activity commanded from the main
part program and an end-working turret sub-routine. Refer to Chapter 13 for additional informa-
tion.
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF [Option]
The M66 command turns OFF the drive for the ball screw driven sub-spindle. Refer to Chap-
ter 16 for additional information.
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque [Option]
The M67 command switches the drive for the ball screw driven sub-spindle to low torque
mode. Refer to Chapter 16 for additional information.
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque [Option]
The M67 command switches the drive for the ball screw driven sub-spindle to normal (full)
torque mode. Refer to Chapter 16 for additional information.
M69 Sub-Spindle External Chucking Mode [Option]
M69 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with external-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the sub-spindle collet closer is checked on power-up and
the closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the sub-spindle collet closer is open at power-
up, it will remain open. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically
sub-spindle.
M70 Sub-Spindle Internal Chucking Mode [Option]
M70 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with internal-gripping style
work-holding devices. The position of the sub-spindle collet closer is checked on power-up and
the closer is initialized accordingly; for example, if the sub-spindle collet closer is open at power-
up, it will remain open. Refer to Chapter 15 for more information concerning the hydraulically
sub-spindle.
M78 Enable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option]
M78 is the Power-up or Reset state of the control. It enables the lower axis feedrate override
feature on machines equipped with either the optional end-working turret or optional sub-spindle.
M78 remains active until canceled by M79.
M79 Disable Lower Axis Feedrate Override [Option]
M78 disables the lower axis feedrate override feature on machines equipped with either the
optional end-working turret or optional sub-spindle. M79 remains active until canceled by M78, a
control OFF, or a control Reset.
M-320A 1-37
M81 Execute End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option]
M81 commands the control to begin execution of end-working turret sub-routine #1. Refer to
M84 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle Forward
M84 causes the tailstock or hydraulic sub-spindle to move toward the spindle at a rapid tr-
averse rate of 300 in/min [7620 mm/min] until it trips a rapid-to-feed switch. At that point, the
tailstock goes to a feedrate which may be preset by the machine operator.
Refer to: Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstock
Chapter 15 for information on programming the hydraulic sub-spindle
M85 Tailstock/Sub-Spindle Retract
M85 causes the tailstock to move away from the machine spindle and stop at the first home
position encountered (adjustable home or fixed home position). M85 causes the hydraulic sub-
spindle to move away from the machine spindle and stop at the fixed home position The tailstock
or sub-spindle move at a rapid traverse rate of 300 in/min [7620 mm/min].
Refer to: Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstock
Chapter 15 for information on programming the hydraulic sub-spindle
M86 Tailstock Home
M86 causes the tailstock to move to the fixed home position at a rapid traverse rate of 300
in/min [7620 mm/min].
Refer to Chapter 9 for information on programming the tailstock
M88 Thermal Compensation
M88 activates the thermal compensation feature on CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision™
lathes. Refer to Chapter 14 for additional information.
M93 Steady Rest Open [Option]
M93 commands the steady rest to release the workpiece.
M94 Steady Rest Closed [Option]
M93 commands the steady rest to clamp the workpiece.
1-38 M-320A
M98 Subprogram Call
This code must be in the main part program block which activates a subprogram. It is pro-
grammed with a P word, which specifies the subprogram number. Refer to “Subprograms”,
Chapter 9.
M99 Subprogram End
This code is used to return to the main part program after a subprogram has been completed.
Refer to “Subprograms”, in Chapter 9.
DIAMETER PROGRAMMING
®
Hardinge CONQUEST T42 series lathes are configured to allow the programmer to use part
diameter dimensions from the workpiece drawing as X word entries. With diameter programming,
the workpiece centerline coincides with the spindle centerline unless an X axis Zero Offset is
active. Refer to Chapter 4, “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”.
- CAUTION -
It is strongly recommended that the X axis register in the Work Shift file be set
to zero at all times.
Programming Notes:
1. X words are programmed as diameters.
2. Data word formats for diameter programming:
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathes
X ±2.4 in inch mode (G20) and X ±3.3 in metric mode (G21). Maximum resolution is
.00005 inches [.0005 mm] on the diameter.
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes
X ±2.5 in inch mode (G20) and X ±3.4 in metric mode (G21). Maximum resolution is
.000005 inches [.00005 mm] on the diameter.
3. Dwell (G04) is not affected by diameter programming and is entered directly in seconds
or milliseconds, depending on the data word used.
4. Incremental or continuous jogs are unaffected by diameter programming. The actual
moves are incremental, but the final absolute X position will be displayed on the control
display screen as an X diameter.
5. Tool geometry offsets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Tool wear
offsets in the X axis are entered and displayed as diameters. Z moves are not affected.
6. X axis “Distance to Go” is displayed as a diameter value.
M-320A 1-39
GENERAL PROGRAM FORMAT
BEGINNING OF PROGRAM
% Stop Code (End of Record)

O_________ Letter “O” and the Program Number
G20 or G21 Inch or Metric Mode
BEGINNING OF OPERATION
N _____ (___________) Sequence Search Number and Message

G97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 1000 RPM and Spindle Direction
M98 P1 Call: Safe Start Subprogram
T_____ Index to Tool Station and Call Offset
X _____ Z_____ Move Tool To Activate Tool Offset
IF USING CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

G50 S ______ Maximum RPM Limit
G96 S ______ Surface Feet (Meters) Per Minute Speed
IF USING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G1 G41 (or) G42 X ____ Z ____ F100. Tool Nose Radius Compensation,
Non-Cutting Move Required, IPM Feedrate
G1 G99 X ____ Z ____ F ____ Machine Part, Inches [mm] Per Revolution
Feed
X ____ (and/or) Z ____ Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip

Diameter
M98 P1 (or) M98 P2 Call: Safe O.D. or I.D. End Subprogram
M01 Operation Stop
PROGRAM ENDING
M30 Rewind Program - Stop Machine
% Stop Code (End of Record)
BAR JOB
Use the Repeat Mode push button on the Operator Panel
1-40 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 1-41
- NOTES -
1-42 M-320A
CHAPTER 2 - TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
INTRODUCTION
Regardless of the location of the origin of the work coordinate system used, execution of the
part program causes a single point (tool nose reference point) to be moved relative to and
positioned at coordinates specified by the program. However, the tool nose is not a point; it is a
radius. Metal removal does not always take place at the same section of the tool nose. Orienta-
tion of the tool nose relative to the work surface determines which portion of the tool is involved
in metal removal. (Orientation depends on tool geometry and the type of cut.) Programming the
proper tool path for radius and angle contouring requires Tool Nose Radius Compensation. The
following example illustrates the need for such compensation.
To machine the 30 degree taper shown in Figure 2.3, a contouring tool with a tool nose
similar to the one shown in Figure 2.1 is used. The distance this tool nose extends from the X
axis turret face is measured from the turret reference point to the X axis touch-off point. The
position of the tool nose relative to the Z axis turret face is measured from the turret reference
point to the Z axis touch-off point. If a Tool Offset is active while a part program is being exe-
cuted, the “Actual Position” register will display the coordinates of the tool nose reference point.
This point is formed by the X coordinate of the X axis touch-off point and the Z coordinate of the
Z axis touch-off point. In this case, the tool nose reference point is not on the tool nose. Refer to
Figure 2.1 .
However, this is not always the case. Some tools have only one touch-off point. Refer to
Figure 2.2 . In such a case, the distance the nose extends from the turret centerline and Z axis
turret face to this single touch-off point becomes the tool nose reference point. For such tools,
the tool nose reference point is located on the tool nose. Some numerical control manuals refer
to the tool nose reference point as the “imaginary tool tip”. This term can be misleading and is
avoided in this manual.
+X +X
+Z +Z
Z-AXIS
TOUCH-OFF
POINT
TOOL NOSE X-AXIS

REFERENCE POINT X-AXIS TOUCH-OFF
TOUCH-OFF POINT
POINT
TI2373 TI2374
Figure 2.1 - Tool Nose with X and Z-Axis Figure 2.2 - Tool Nose with an X-Axis
Touch-off Points Touch-off Point
M-320A 2-1
TI2375
C(X.6 Z-.75) r=.01

B(X.6 Z-.1732) 30°
A(X.4 Z0.) START POINT

(X.4 Z.2)
.1
30° +X
.1732 N40 G01 G99 ;
+Z N50 Z0. F.01 ;
CL N60 X.6 Z-.1732 ;
Z ZERO N70 Z-.75 ;
Figure 2.3 - Example of Oversize Cut Caused By

Absence of Tool Nose Radius Compensation
To properly machine the section of the part shown in Figure 2.3, metal removal must take
place along the line connecting X.4 Z0. and X6. Z-.1732 . However, if Tool Nose Radius Com-
pensation is ignored and these coordinates are programmed, the resulting cut will be oversize.
Block N50 (See Figure 2.3) moves the tool nose reference point from X.4 Z.2 to X.4 Z0. and
block N60 moves the reference point from X.4 Z0. to X6. Z-.1732 . The tool does not reach the
full depth of cut, represented by the dashed line in Figure 2.3 . The actual cut, represented by
the solid line parallel to the dashed line, is oversize. The amount oversize is a function of the
angle of the taper and the size of the tool nose radius.
Without automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation to make the control generate the proper
tool path, the programmer must perform the necessary calculations to offset the effect of the tool
nose radius.
As with tapers, any change in the tool nose radius will require program revisions for all con-
touring involving arcs.
With automatic Tool Nose Radius Compensation, the programmer can write a part program as
if a zero radius tool were being used. Programs are written using coordinates taken directly from
the workpiece. The operator stores the radius value of each tool in the Tool Offset files and the
control makes all necessary calculations and compensations as the program is executed. If a
tool is changed, the operator simply modifies the radius in the Tool Offset file and the control
recalculates the compensation as the program is executed again. Time consuming manual calcu-
lations are eliminated, as is the threat of large scale part program revisions due to tooling
changes.
TOOL ORIENTATION NUMBER

Before Tool Nose Radius Compensation can be activated in a program, the tool nose radius
value and the tool orientation number must be stored in the tool geometry offset file. The tool
orientation number describes the center of the tool nose radius relative to the X and Z touch-off
points. A diagram of the orientation codes appears in Figure 2.4 . A diagram showing the proper
signs for tool offsets appears in Figure 2.5 .
Refer to Chapter 4 for information on storing tool nose radius values and tool orientation
numbers in the tool offset file.
2-2 M-320A
8
4 3
SPINDLE
FACE TURRET TOP PLATE
+X
5 7
+Z
1 2 -X +Z
6 TOOL REFERENCE
SPINDLE TURRET FACE POSITION
+X +Z +X -Z
TI2376 TI2377
Figure 2.4 - Tool Nose Radius Orientation Figure 2.5 - Tool Dimension Signs
Codes
ACTIVATING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION
A tool nose radius value and tool orientation number must be activated before entering Tool
Nose Radius Compensation mode. Tool nose radius values and tool orientation codes are acti-
vated along with Tool Offsets by a programmed T word with the data word format T4: Txxyy
Where: xx = Turret Station
yy = Tool Offset Number
A programmed T0 command deactivates all active tool offset data.
A G41 or G42 Preparatory Command is programmed to activate Tool Nose Radius Compen-
sation. This block is called the entry block. The G41 or G42 entry block must be a non-cutting
move on both axes. At least one axis must move a distance equal to or greater than the radius
of the tool nose.
To determine which G code to use, imagine you are sitting on the tool nose facing the direc-
tion of tool motion. If the workpiece is on your right, G41 is the correct code. If the workpiece is
on your left, G42 is the correct code. (Refer to Figure 2.6)
The GE Fanuc 18T control has a two block look-ahead capability, which enables the control to
complete a compensated move with the tool in position to begin the next compensated move.
While the currently active block is being executed, the control searches ahead to read and
process the next two data blocks. Refer to Figure 2.7 for an comparison of programmed tool
paths with and without Tool Nose Radius Compensation based on similar workpiece contours.
M-320A 2-3
+X +X
+Z +Z
CL CL
CL CL
G41 G42 TI2378
Figure 2.6 - G41/G42 Diagram
Tool Compensation
Tool Compensation
CL CL
Tool Compensation Tool Compensation
Not Active Active
Tool Compensation
Tool Compensation
CL CL
TI2379
Figure 2.7 - Tool Path Comparisons
2-4 M-320A
ENTERING AND EXITING THE WORKPIECE WITH
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
When entering and exiting the workpiece, axis motion should be perpendicular to the surface
of the workpiece. Refer to Figure 2.8 for an illustration of correct axis motion.
If axis motion is not perpendicular with the surface of the workpiece, the tool may be “boxed
in”. When a tool is “boxed in”, it will not reach the programmed end point. Refer to Figure 2.9 for
an illustration of incorrect axis motion and “boxing the tool in”.
G42
EXIT
WORKPIECE
ENTRY
G42
TI2380
Figure 2.8 - Correct Axis Motion
G42
EXIT
G42
ENTRY
WORKPIECE
TI2381
Figure 2.9 - Incorrect Axis Motion
M-320A 2-5
TO SWITCH G41/G42 CODE WITH TOOL
NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
- CAUTION -
Due to the way in which Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, G41
or G42 should be programmed in a block with non-cutting linear motion. If
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is activated in a block in which cutting is
commanded, undesirable axis motion may occur.
To switch from G41 to G42 or vice versa while Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active, it is
not necessary to program a G40 to cancel the active code. Programming the desired G41 or
G42 will cancel the active code and activate the new G code. For example, if G41 is active and
G42 is programmed, G41 will be canceled and G42 will be activated.
Due to the way Tool Nose Radius Compensation is interpolated, this linear move should
usually be a non-cutting move. The notable exception is an axis reversal. Axis reversal is dis-
cussed below.
AXIS REVERSALS WITH TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE

Axis reversals are possible with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active. As mentioned in the
previous section, an axis reversal represents a case when a G41/G42 switch can occur in a
cutting move.
In the sample program shown in Figure 2.10,
A(X1.2 Z0.) r=.01
G41 is activated in the move to Point A (Block
N60).
B(X.8 Z0.)
Block N60 establishes the feedrate and moves
the tool nose reference position to point “A” for the
facing operation. B’(X.79 Z0.)
Block N70 commands the facing move from

point “A” to point “C”. The position of the center of A
the tool nose radius at the end of block N70 is on
the spindle centerline. Therefore, at the end of C(X0. Z0.)
block N70, the tool nose reference point is one CL
tool nose radius to the -X side of the spindle cen- C’(X-.01 Z0.)
terline.
N50 G00 G41 X1.2 Z.1 ;
Block N80 switches the code to G42. No Z axis N60 G01 G99 Z0. F.01 ;
N70 X-.02 ;
motion takes place as a result of the G41/G42 N80 G42 ;
switch. If Tool Compensation was not changed N90 X.8 ;
N100 Z-5. ;
from G41 to G42 in block N80, the control would
assume that the part is still on the right side of the D(X.8 Z0.)
tool and an overcutting alarm would occur.
Block N90 moves the tool back up the face of B
the part to point “D”.
C(X0. Z0.)
Block N100 commands the turning move from
CL
point “D” in the -Z direction.
C’(X-.01 Z0.)
TI2382
In summary, axis reversals are possible, but be
aware of the tool nose radius “overshoot” at the Figure 2.10 - Axis Reversal with
end of the move prior to the reversal. Tool Compensation Active
2-6 M-320A
MODES IN WHICH TOOL NOSE RADIUS
COMPENSATION IS NOT PERFORMED
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following automatic cycles:
G74 Auto Drilling Cycle
G75 Auto Grooving Cycle
G76 Auto Threading Cycle
G92 Canned Threading Cycle
- NOTE -
If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active before one of these auto cycles is
executed, Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the cycle and
then reactivated after the cycle is completed.
Tool Nose Radius Compensation also is not performed during the G32 Constant
Lead Threadcutting mode or the optional G34 Variable Lead Threadcutting mode.
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES WITH TOOL

NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION ACTIVE
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not active during G71, G72, or G73 roughing cycles, but
is active during the G70 finishing cycle. To use Tool Nose Radius Compensation in the multiple
repetitive finishing cycle, Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be activated in the move to the
start point. If the same tool is used to rough and finish the workpiece, the move to the start point
occurs prior to the roughing cycle. Compensation will be suppressed until the finishing cycle is
executed. If a different tool is used to finish turn the workpiece, compensation is activated in the
move to the start point prior to the G70 cycle.
CANNED TURNING AND FACING CYCLES WITH

Tool Nose Radius Compensation can be used with the G90 Canned Turning Cycle and the
G94 Canned Facing Cycle, but it must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90 or
G94 canned cycle. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used in either cycle, axis motion is as
follows:
G90 Canned Turning Cycle (Figure 2.11):
1. The tool moves from the start point to the
compensated position to begin the turn. Start Point
2. The tool ends the turn at the compensated

position to begin facing the shoulder.
3. At the end of the facing move, the tool
nose reference point is at the X coordinate Rapid Traverse
Feed
of the start point.
4. The tool then returns to the start point. At CL
the end of the move, the tool nose refer-
ence point is at the coordinates of the TI2383
start point.
Figure 2.11 - Axis Motion During a G90
Canned Turning Cycle
M-320A 2-7
G94 Canned Facing Cycle (Figure 2.12):
1. The tool moves from the start point to the
compensated position to begin the turn.
Start Point
2. The tool ends the face at the compen-
sated position to begin the turn.
3. At the end of the turn, the tool nose refer-
ence point is at the Z coordinate of the
start point. Rapid Traverse
Feed
4. The tool then returns to the start point. At
the end of the move, the tool nose refer- CL
ence point is at the coordinates of the
start point.
TI2384
Figure 2.12 - Axis Motion During a G94

Canned Facing Cycle
TOOL MOVED AWAY FROM THE WORKPIECE WITH

If a program is stopped during the execution of contouring with Tool Nose Radius Compensa-
tion active and the tool is moved away from the workpiece, either by a manual Jog operation or
an Manual Data Input command, do not resume the cycle from this new position. Reset the
program and perform a Program Restart operation.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION RELATED ALARMS

ALARM 033
A point of intersection cannot be determined for Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
ALARM 034
Entry or exit move is programmed in G02 or G03 mode. The control must be in G00 or
G01 mode to activate or deactivate Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
ALARM 035
Skip function (G31) has been programmed with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active.
ALARM 038
Arc start point or end point coincides with the arc center. The probable cause of the alarm
is a G02/G03 programming error. It is possible that a G01 move was not programmed after
cutting the arc.
ALARM 039
An Insert Chamfer or Insert Arc was commanded in an entry block, exit block, or in a
switch between G41 and G42. The program may cause overcutting to occur.
ALARM 040
Overcutting will occur with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active and a G90 or G94
canned cycle programmed.
2-8 M-320A
ALARM 041
Overcutting will occur because of one of the following conditions:
1. A programmed groove or inside corner is smaller than the tool nose radius.
2. The direction of the tool nose reference point is between 90 degrees and 270 degrees
different than the programmed path.
DEACTIVATING TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

Program a G40 along with a non-cutting linear move in both axes to deactivate Tool Nose
Radius Compensation. Alarm “034 PROGRAM” will appear if circular motion is programmed in
the exit block. Alarm “039 PROGRAM” will appear if an Insert Chamfer or Insert Radius is
programmed in the exit block.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION PROGRAMMING RULES

1. Store tool nose radius values and orientation codes along side the appropriate offset
numbers in the Tool Offset file. The offset must be activated prior to activation of Tool
Nose Radius Compensation.
2. To activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation, program a G41 or G42 along with non-cut-
ting linear motion in both axes. The motion on either axis must be equal to or greater
than the radius value of the tool nose. To determine which G code to use, image your-
self sitting on the tool tip facing in the direction of the tool motion. If the workpiece is on
your right, the correct code is G41. If the workpiece is on your left, the correct code is
G42.
3. Entry to and exit from the workpiece should be perpendicular to the surface of the work-
piece.
4. To switch from G41 to G42 and vice versa, program the appropriate G code in a block
by itself before motion in the other direction.
5. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is not performed in the following modes: G32, G34,
G71, G72, G73, G74, G75, G76, and G92.
6. When Tool Nose Radius Compensation is active, only one data block which does not
contain axis motion may be programmed between blocks which contain axis motion. If
two or more non-motion blocks are programmed consecutively, undesirable machine be-
havior in the form of under-cutting or over-cutting may occur.
7. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used with G90 or G94 canned cycles, Tool
Nose Radius Compensation must be activated prior to the block that specifies the G90
or G94 cycle.
8. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used with a G70 multiple repetitive finishing
cycle, Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be activated in the move to the start point
prior to the execution of the G70 cycle.
9. When clearing the workpiece, axis motion should move the tool nose a distance of at
least three times the tool nose diameter from the workpiece
M-320A 2-9
- NOTES -
2-10 M-320A
CHAPTER 3 - LINEAR AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
FEEDRATE
Feedrate is specified by the value after the word address F. This value can be expressed in
inches/millimeters per minute (G98 mode) or as inches/millimeters per revolution (G99 mode).
The maximum programmable feedrates are listed below. Programmed feedrates greater than the
maximum feedrate allowed will default to the maximum value upon program execution. The
maximum feedrates are shown as inches per minute [millimeters per minute].
X Axis: 472 [12000] CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Machine
X Axis: 755 [19200] CONQUEST T42-L Machines
Y Axis: 394 [10000] CONQUEST T42 and T42SP Machines
Z Axis: 630 [16000] CONQUEST T42 and T42SP Machines
Z Axis: 1004 [25500] CONQUEST T42-L Machines
To convert in/min [mm/min] to in/rev [mm/rev], divide the in/min [mm/min] feedrate by the
programmed spindle speed:
English: in/min ÷ rev/min = in/rev
Metric: mm/min ÷ rev/min = mm/rev
To convert in/rev [mm/rev] to in/min [mm/min], multiply the in/rev [mm/rev] feedrate by the
programmed spindle speed:
English: in/rev x rev/min = in/min
Metric: mm/rev x rev/min = mm/min
To override programmed feedrates, use the Feedrate Override switches. The Feedrate Over-
ride switches are disabled during threading cycles, except when set to 0%. To override rapid
traverse rate, use the Rapid override switch.
- CAUTION -
If the Feedrate 1 Override switch is set to 0% during a threading cycle, X and
Z axis motion will STOP.
M-320A 3-1
ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING
In absolute programming, the X, Y, and Z data words are used to specify the end point of a
move as a coordinate on the work coordinate system. For example, the following command calls
for a linear move to position the tool nose reference point at X.25 Z5. on the work coordinate
system:
G01 G98 X.25 Z5. F10. ;
In incremental programming, the U, V, and W words are used to specify the end point of a
move as an incremental distance from the current position on the work coordinate system.
U = Incremental distance on the X axis
U- = Toward the operator
U+ = Away from the operator
V = Incremental distance on the Y axis
V- = Toward the face of the main spindle
V+ = Away from the face of the main spindle
W = Incremental distance on the Z axis
W- = Toward the face of the main spindle
W+ = Away from the face of the main spindle
For example, the following command calls for a linear move in which the cross slide moves
.25 inches away from the operator and the upper carriage moves 2.5 inches toward the spindle
face:
G01 G98 U.5 W-2.5 F10. ;
Absolute and Incremental commands may be used together in a block. For example, the
following command causes the cross slide to move .375 inches toward the operator from the
current cross slide position and also positions the upper carriage at Z coordinate point 6.5 on the
work coordinate system:
G01 G98 U-.75 Z6.5 F10. ;
If both X and U, Y and V, or Z and W are programmed in the same block, the one specified
last is effective. For example, the following block causes the upper carriage to move .5 inches
away from the spindle face from the current carriage position. (The Z word is ignored).
G01 G98 Z.4 W.5 F10. ;
3-2 M-320A
INTERPOLATION
Interpolation describes the function of the control when it decodes a block of programmed
data commanding axis motion. Given the type of motion, the feedrate, and the end point, the
control defines the tool path by generating a series of intermediate points between the current
slide position and the programmed end point. In the case of tapers and arcs, it also calculates
the proper feedrate for each axis to produce the correct tool path.
There are two standard types of interpolation performed by the GE Fanuc 18T CNC control:
Linear Interpolation
Circular Interpolation
LINEAR INTERPOLATION
Linear Interpolation is commanded by the G01 command. G01 is a modal code, which means
that it will stay active until a G00 code (positioning) or a G02/G03 code (Circular Interpolation) is
programmed. Therefore, it is necessary to program a G01 to return to Linear Interpolation from a
currently active G00, G02, or G03 code because these codes are also modal.
With G01 active, program blocks command the tool to move in a straight line from its current
position to a programmed end point. This end point is specified as either a coordinate position
(X, Z) on the work coordinate system or as an incremental movement (U, W) from the current
slide position. For example:
G01 G99 X.25 Z2. F.008
Slides move from current position to work coordinate X.25 Z2.
G01 G99 U.4 W-1. F.008
X axis moves .2 inches in the positive direction as Z axis moves 1 inch in the negative
direction.
Insert Chamfer or Corner Radius
- NOTE -
Insert chamfer/insert corner radius cannot be programmed in a threadcutting block.
If two linear (G01) moves intersect, it is possible to insert a chamfer or an arc between them
without adding a third program block or switching from linear interpolation to circular interpolation
and back again. The following rules apply:
1. Both moves must be a G01 move.
2. The end point of the first block is the point where the linear moves would intersect if
there was no chamfer or corner radius inserted. It is not the start point of the chamfer or
corner radius.
INSERT CHAMFER
To insert a chamfer, program a “,C” word in the first of the two linear move (G01) blocks.
These two linear moves do not have to be perpendicular to each other. The value of “,C” is
unsigned. The (,) comma must precede the C word.
M-320A 3-3
INSERT CORNER RADIUS
To insert an arc between two linear (G01) moves, program an “,R” word in the first motion
block. The value of the “,R” word is the radius of the arc to be inserted. The value of “,R” is
unsigned. The (,) comma must precede the R word.
ALARM MESSAGES FOR INSERT CHAMFER/INSERT CORNER RADIUS
Alarm 050:
Chamfer or corner radius is commanded in a block which also includes a threadcutting
command.
Alarm 051:
The move direction or move amount in the block following a block specifying a chamfer
or corner radius was not adequate.
Alarm 052:
The block after a block specifying a chamfer or corner radius is not in G01 mode. (For
example, the second block is in G02 or G03 mode).
Alarm 053:
C or R has been programmed without a comma. The comma is required.
Alarm 054:
The next G01 block commands tapered motion (both X and Z data words are pro-
grammed) along with a command for inserting a chamfer or corner radius.
Alarm 055:
The axis motion in the second block is less than the chamfer or corner radius value
specified in the first block.
.010R
.010R
N15 G01 G99 X0. Z0. F.008 ;
N20 X.5 ,C.01 ;
.010R
.010 1.50 N25 Z-.5 ,C.01 ;
.010 N30 X1. ,R.01 ;
1.00
.010 N35 W-.5 ,R.01 ;
.010 .50
N40 X1.5 ,R.01 ;
N45 Z-1.5 ;
.50
1.00
TI2367
Figure 3.1 - Insert Chamfer/Radius Sample Program
3-4 M-320A
INSERT CHAMFER
X(U)____ ,C____
Z(W)____ +X
,C ,C
+Z
,C ,C
Z(W)____ ,C____
X(U)____ +X
,C ,C
+Z
,C ,C
INSERT ARC
X(U)____ ,R____
Z(W)____ +X
,R ,R
+Z
,R ,R
Z(W)____ ,R____
X(U)____ +X
,R ,R +Z
,R ,R
TI2368
Figure 3.2 - Insert Chamfer/Insert Arc Diagram
M-320A 3-5
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
In Circular Interpolation the control uses the information contained in a single data block to
generate an arc. There are two types of Circular Interpolation:
Clockwise Arc (G02)
Counterclockwise Arc (G03)
The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) defines clockwise and counter-clockwise arcs as
follows:
G02 Clockwise Arc

An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of
the tool with respect to the workpiece is clockwise when viewing the plane of motion in the
negative direction of the perpendicular axis. Stated another way, tool motion during a G02
arc will appear clockwise, as viewed by the machine operator.
G03 Counter-Clockwise Arc

An arc generated by the coordinated motion of two axes in which curvature of the path of
the tool with respect to the workpiece is counterclockwise when viewing the plane of motion
in the negative direction of the perpendicular axis. Stated another way, tool motion during a
G03 arc will appear counterclockwise, as viewed by the machine operator.
Besides containing the G code for the rotational direction of tool movement, the data block
specifying circular interpolation must contain information indicating the position of the arc end
point and the location of the arc center. Data words used to specify these parameters are sum-
marized in Figure 3.4 .
Note the differences in the definitions depending on whether Tool Nose Radius Compensation
is active or inactive. As indicated with Tool Nose Radius Compensation active, the location of the
arc end point and arc center is independent of the tool nose radius. These dimensions are taken
from the part and the control performs the necessary compensation to generate the proper arc.
Sample Part Program

Figure 3.3 illustrates a sample tool path and the basic program structure required for Circular
Interpolation. The tool tip is programmed to move to the start point of each arc using G01 (Linear
Interpolation). The program block commanding Circular Interpolation specifies the type of arc
(G02 or G03), the end point of the arc, and the radius. G01 is progammed to cancel Circular
Interpolation after each arc has been completed.
3-6 M-320A
+X
N7 N6
+Z N1 G1 G99 X0. Z0. F.01 ;
N5 N2 X1. ;
.25 Radius
N3 Z-1. ;
.10 Radius N4 G2 X1.2 Z-1.1 R.1 ;

N4 N5 G1 X2. ;
N2
N3 N6 G3 X2.5 Z-1.35 R.25 ;
N7 G1 Z-2. ;
CL
N1
(X0. Z0.) TI2702
Figure 3.3 - Circular Interpolation Sample Program
Programming Notes for Circular Interpolation

1. In circular interpolation, the feedrate along the arc (feedrate tangent to the arc) is held
within ±2% of the programmed feedrate.
2. If I and K are used to indicate the arc center, and either I or K is equal to zero, that word
may be omitted.
3. If I and K are used to indicate the arc center and both I and K are programmed as zero
with Tool Nose Radius Compensation inactive, the tool will move linearly from the arc
start point to the arc end point. However, if I and K are programmed as zero with Tool
Nose Radius Compensation active, alarm message “038 PROGRAM” will appear on the
control display screen. This alarm indicates that overcutting will occur because the arc
start point coincides with the arc center.
4. If I, K, and R are programmed in the same data block, the control will ignore the I and K
and generate the arc using R to locate the arc center.
5. If R is used to locate an arc center, a zero degree arc is assumed (no tool motion
occurs) if any of the following three conditions occurs:
a) If X and Z are the coordinates of the start point.
b) If X, U, Z, and W are omitted.
c) If U and W are programmed as zero (U0. W0.).
6. If R is used to indicate the arc center, but the R value is less than half the distance from
the arc start point to the arc end point, R is ignored and a half circle is produced which
connects the arc start point and arc end point.
7. Circular Interpolation may be switched without canceling with G01.
8. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be programmed to cancel Circular Interpolation.
M-320A 3-7
Parameter Command Definition
+X
G02
Rotational +Z
Direction
+X
G03
+Z
Definition Definition
(Tool Nose Radius (Tool Nose Radius
Compensation Inactive) Compensation Active)
Incremental distance from the center Incremental distance from the arc
of the tool nose radius at the start start point to the arc center as
point to the arc center. measured on the workpiece.
I,K
IMPORTANT: This value must be IMPORTANT: This value must be
signed. (Also note that this signed. (This incremental distance
incremental distance depends on the remains the same regardless of the
size of the tool nose radius.) size of the tool nose radius.)
Location of
Arc Center Refer to Figure 3.5 . Refer to Figure 3.7 .
Radius of the arc. The radius is Radius of the arc. The radius is
measured from the center of the tool measured from the arc start point to
nose radius to the arc center. This the arc center as measured on the
value is unsigned. (This distance workpiece. This value is unsigned.
depends on the size of the tool nose (This distance is independent of the
R radius.) size of the tool nose radius.)
NOTE: The R word can only be used NOTE: The R word can only be used
when the arc ≤ 180 degrees. when the arc ≤ 180 degrees.
Refer to Figure 3.5 . Refer to Figure 3.7 .
Coordinates of the tool nose Coordinates of the arc end point as

reference point at the arc end point. measured on the workpiece. (These
(These coordinates depend on the coordinates are independent of the
size of the tool nose radius and size of the tool nose radius and
X,Z
geometric configuration of the tool geometric configuration of the tool
nose.) nose.)
Refer to Figure 3.6 . Refer to Figure 3.8 .

Location of
Arc End Point Incremental distance from the Incremental distance from the arc
position of the tool nose reference start point to the arc end point as
point at the arc start point to the measured on the workpiece. (The
position of the tool nose reference incremental distance is independent
point at the arc end point. (These of the size of the tool nose radius
U,W
coordinates depend on the size of and geometric configuration of the
the tool nose radius and geometric tool nose.)
configuration of the tool nose.)
Refer to Figure 3.8 .
Figure 3.4 - Circular Interpolation Parameters
3-8 M-320A
+X TI2369
K
R ARC CENTER
+Z
K I Tool Nose Radius

Compensation Inactive R
ARC CENTER
CL CL
Figure 3.5 - Arc Center Parameters
+X TI2370
W
ARC CENTER (X,Z)
(X,Z) +Z
Tool Nose Radius U

U
Compensation Inactive
W
ARC CENTER
CL CL
Figure 3.6 - Arc End Point Parameters
+X TI2371
K
R ARC CENTER +Z
I
Tool Nose Radius
Compensation Active R
K
ARC CENTER
CL CL
Figure 3.7 - Arc Center Parameters
+X TI2372
W
ARC CENTER (X,Z)

(X,Z) +Z
Tool Nose Radius U

U Compensation Active
W
ARC CENTER
CL CL
Figure 3.8 - Arc End Point Parameters
M-320A 3-9
- NOTES -
3-10 M-320A
CHAPTER 4 - WORK SHIFT AND TOOL OFFSETS
WORK SHIFT (Zero Offset)
The work shift offset shifts the origin of the work coordinate system. Work Shift values (Z) are
stored in the Work Shift file. The value stored in this file is active at all times.
- CAUTION -
The Work Shift file contains an X and a Z shift register. The X axis register in
the Work Shift file should be set to zero at all times.
The value entered into the Z axis Work Shift file must be a negative number.
The values stored in the Work Shift file are added to the Absolute Position registers, thus
shifting the origin of the work coordinate system by the amount stored in the Work Shift file. For
example, if the Z axis is at 14 inches and the operator stores Z-2.5 in the Work Shift file, the
Absolute Position registers would then display Z11.5 [14 +(- 2.5)].
Immediately after a Work Shift value is stored, the control adds it to the Absolute Position
registers. The registers will remain modified until the Work Shift offset values are set to zero by
the operator or from the part program.
Typically, the part length is stored as the Z Work Shift offset and the X Work Shift offset IS
NOT USED (set to zero). Since the Work Shift value is added to the Absolute Position registers,
the part length is stored as a negative Z value. With the part length stored in the Work Shift file,
the origin of the Absolute coordinate system is the intersection of the part face and the spindle
centerline.
STORING A WORK SHIFT OFFSET FROM THE PART PROGRAM

The Work Shift offset may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.
- CAUTION -
The Work Shift file contains an X and a Z SHIFT VALUE register. It is strongly
recommended that the X SHIFT VALUE register in the Work Shift file be set to
zero at all times.
Programming Format:
G10 P0 X0 Z_____ ; or
G10 P0 X0 W____;
P0: Selects the Work Shift offset as the offset file to be modified.
X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)
Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)
W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)
In an absolute command, the value(s) specified in addresses X and/or Z are set as the Work
Shift Offset value.
In an incremental command, the value specified in address W is added to the current Z Work
Shift Offset.
Use of this command in a program allows the work shift Z to advance incrementally.
M-320A 4-1
TOOLING
(MAIN TURRET)
SQUARE SHANK TOOLS

For optimum performance, CONQUEST® T42 series lathes are designed to use qualified
square shank tool holders. Since these tools are length, width, and height qualified, both set-up
time and downtime due to tool replacement are greatly reduced.
Qualified Tool Holders
Qualified tool holder dimensions are held to ±.003 inch [.076 mm]. A left-hand square shank
qualified tool holder is illustrated in Figure 4.1 . Refer to Table 4.1 for qualified tool holder
dimensions.
A F
G
C
B H
TI2701
Figure 4.1 - Qualified Tool Holder
Dimension English (in.) Metric (mm)

A 0.750 20.000
B 0.750 20.000
C 4.500 125.000
F 1.000 25.000
G 0.250 5.000
H 0.750 20.000
Table 4.1 - Qualified Tooling Dimensions
4-2 M-320A
Revised: May 7, 1997
TOOL OFFSETS
The Tool Offset file is made up of two types of offsets: Tool Geometry Offsets and Tool Wear
Offsets. The control has the capacity to store 32 sets of each offset type (Offsets 01 through 32)
in separate files.
- CAUTION -
Information stored in the Geometry and Wear Offset files is NOT automat-
ically converted into the correct units when a programmed G20 or G21 com-
mand switches programming resolution from inch to metric or vice versa.
Offsets in the desired unit of measure should be entered after the control has
been set to the proper mode, inch (G20) vs metric (G21). If a G20 or G21 is
programmed after the tool offsets are entered, the decimal point will be
shifted one place to the left or right. If start-up mode is G20 (inch) and the
program switches to G21 (metric), the offset decimal point will shift one place
to the right. If start-up mode is G21 (metric) and the program switches to G20
(inch), the offset decimal point will shift one place to the left.
The following information is stored in the Tool Geometry Offset file:
X Tool Dimension (Main Turret)
Diameter distance from the X axis tool touch-off point to the main turret reference point.
Sign is determined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the turret reference
point.
Y Tool Dimension (End-Working Turret)
Distance from the Y axis tool touch-off point to the face of the tool bushings in the end-
working turret. Sign is determined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the
face of the tool bushings.
Z Tool Dimension (Main Turret)
Distance from the Z axis tool touch-off point to the main turret reference point. Sign is
determined by the direction from the tool nose reference point to the turret reference point.
- NOTE -
Refer to Chapter 2 for a description of the tool nose reference point.
Refer to Chapter 5 for a description of coordinate system reference positions.

Tool Orientation:
The orientation code describes the location of the center of the tool nose in relation to the
tool nose reference point.
Tool Nose Radius Value:
The distance from the cutting edge to the center of the tool nose radius.
The Tool Wear Offset file allows the operator to enter minor dimensional changes for each
tool to compensate for tool wear. The Tool Wear Offset files coincide with the Geometry Offset
files. When a tool offset is activated, the control looks at the corresponding Tool Wear offset and
performs the necessary corrections to compensate for tool wear.
M-320A 4-3
The Tool Offset files allow the operator to easily make corrections resulting from tool changes,
thus large-scale modifications to the part programs are eliminated.
Tool Offsets are activated by the last two digits in the T word. The first two digits specify the
turret station. The data word format for the T word is T4.
A suggested method for numbering the offsets that will assign a number related to the turret
station is as follows:
TURRET STATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
FIRST OFFSET 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12
SECOND OFFSET 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Offsets 13 through 20 are extra and can be used if needed.
ENTERING TOOL NOSE RADIUS VALUE AND ORIENTATION

- NOTE -
If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the tool nose radius value and the
tool quadrant must be entered for each tool which uses Tool Nose Radius Compen-
sation.
1. Press the Offset Setting key.
2. Press the Offset soft key to access the Tool Offset pages.
3. Press the Geometry soft key to display the tool geometry offsets.
4. Use the page and cursor keys to position the cursor at the R data field for the desired
offset.
5. Enter the tool nose radius value and press the Input soft key.
- NOTE-
The “T” value defines the orientation of the tool tip and has a range from 0 through
9. Refer to Figure 4.2 .
6. Use the cursor keys to position the cursor 8

at the T data field for the desired offset.
4 3
7. Enter the tool orientation code number
and press the Input soft key.
+X 0 or 9
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each tool, as 5 7
required.
+Z
1 2
6
SPINDLE TURRET FACE
TI2376
Figure 4.2 - Tool Nose Radius Orientation

Codes
4-4 M-320A
TO STORE TOOL OFFSETS FROM THE PART PROGRAM
Tool Offsets may be input directly from the part program by using the G10 code.
Programming Format:
G10 P_____ X_____ Y_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ; or
G10 P_____ U_____ V_____ W_____ C_____ Q_____;
P: Selects the Tool Offset file to be modified.
For Wear Offset: P = Wear Offset Number
For Geometry Offset: P = 100 + Geometry Offset Number (2 place Format)
Examples of P words used for Geometry Offsets:
For Geometry Offset #1: P10001
For Wear Offset #1: P1
For Geometry Offset #15: P10015
For Wear Offset #15: P15
X: Offset value on the X axis (absolute)
Y: Offset value on the Y axis (absolute)
Z: Offset value on the Z axis (absolute)
U: Offset value on the X axis (incremental)
V: Offset value on the Y axis (incremental)
W: Offset value on the Z axis (incremental)
R: Tool nose radius offset value (absolute) †
C: Tool nose radius offset value (incremental) †
Q: Tool nose orientation code †
† Used for X and Z axis only
Absolute and incremental values for different axes may be programmed in the same offset
command line.
Examples: G10 P_____ U_____ Z_____ R_____ Q_____ ;
G10 P_____ X_____ W_____ R_____ Q_____ ;
M-320A 4-5
Revised: November 13, 1997
ACTIVATING TOOL OFFSETS
Tool offsets are activated by a T word having the format T4. The first two numbers select the
turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position. The last two numbers specify which tool
offsets in the tool geometry and wear offset tables are to be used with the selected turret posi-
tion.
Example: N0120 T0616 ;
In data block N0120, turret station 6 will be indexed to the cutting position and the tool offsets
stored on line 16 in the tool geometry and wear offset tables will be activated.
The leading zero in the T word may be omitted:
T0101 = T101
- CAUTION -
If tool offsets are not to be called up with a turret index, the last two numbers
in the T word MUST be “00" (Example: T0100). If no numbers are pro-
grammed in the last two places, the control will use the numbers pro-
grammed in the first two places as the tool offset and the turret will not index
(Example: T01 will be interpreted by the control as T0001).
- NOTE -
When a T0 is commanded, the offset is cancelled.
Tool offset cancellation (T0) will occur in the next programmed axis movement for the X and Z
axes. The next programmed X axis movement will cancel the X axis offset and move the turret
reference point to the programmed X axis position. The next programmed Z axis movement will
cancel the Z axis offset and move the turret reference point to the programmed Z axis position.
When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block containing axis motion, the tool
offset motion is computed with the programmed axis position, causing the slide(s) to move di-
rectly to the corrected axis position at the programmed feedrate.
When a T word with a tool offset is programmed in a block without axis motion, the tool offset
move will occur in the next block containing axis motion. The tool offset motion is computed with
the programmed axis position, causing the turret reference point to move directly to the corrected
axis position at the programmed feedrate.
Tool offsets are deactivated when the machine is first powered up or when the Reset key is
pressed.
4-6 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 4-7
- NOTES -
4-8 M-320A
CHAPTER 5 - WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
HOW THE CONTROL POSITIONS THE SLIDES

To understand work coordinate programming, it is helpful to consider how the control positions
the slides. We will begin by examining how the slides are positioned on a manual lathe. At the
onset this may seem like an in-depth discussion of the obvious, but bear with us, the point of this
exercise is to show the similarities between the operation of a manual lathe and the operation of
a CONQUEST® T42 series lathe.
On a manual lathe, the carriage and cross slide are positioned by manually turning a handle
attached to a lead screw. The operator positions each slide by reading the dial attached to each
handle. Let’s assume that on the manual lathe each slide has 10 pitch lead screw. Therefore,
each revolution of the lead screw advances the slide .1 inch. If the dial has 100 graduations,
each graduation equals 1/100 of a revolution or .001 inch slide travel.
If the operator wants to move a slide .306 inch, he turns the handle in the desired direction
and counts three and 6/100 revolutions of the dial. How close to 6/100 of a revolution he gets
largely depends on his ability to manually position the dial at the proper graduation.
Like the slides on the manual lathe, the CNC lathe carriage and cross slide are positioned by
rotating a lead screw. However, there are no handles to rotate the lead screws on the CNC
lathe. Instead, each lead screw is rotated by a servo motor. The revolutions of each screw are
counted by an encoder. The encoder is an integral part of the axis drive motor and continuously
monitors the radial position of the lead screw. Information from the encoder is fed to the control
where it is converted into useful output information to produce the correct feedrate and slide
position.
- NOTE -
References to Y axis are valid only for lathes equipped with an optional end-work-
ing turret or optional ball screw driven sub-spindle.
The cross slide (X axis) on the CNC lathe has a 6 millimeter pitch lead screw. One revolution
of the cross slide lead screw equals 6 millimeter (.2362 inches) of slide travel. The upper car-
riage (Z axis) and lower carriage (Y axis) on the CNC lathe have an 8 millimeter pitch lead
screw. One revolution of a carriage lead screw equals 8 millimeter (.3150 inches) of slide travel.
As the lead screw rotates so does the encoder shaft, which causes the encoder to generate
positioning and velocity data. This data is fed to the control for positioning and velocity control
functions.
To move a slide .306 inch, we enter a coded instruction into the control specifying type of
motion (linear or circular), velocity (feedrate), and distance. (Distance can be indicated as an
incremental distance from the current position or as a coordinate which represents the endpoint
of the move.) Internally, the control decodes the instruction and converts the command into a
voltage which is sent to the servo motor of the slide. As the servo motor turns the lead screw,
the lead screw turns the encoder shaft and the encoder produces positioning and velocity data.
This data is feed back to the control where it is used to monitor slide motion.
The distance from the current slide position to the commanded end point is known as the
Distance To Go. Before any slide motion takes place in our example, the distance to go is .306
inch. This value is stored in a register in the control. As the lead screw rotates, the control
receives counts from the encoder and subtracts them from the Distance To Go register.
M-320A 5-1
When the Distance To Go registers count down to zero, the control knows that the slide has
moved .30600 (±.00001) inch on CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® lathes. When the Dis-
tance To Go registers count down to zero, the control knows that the slide has moved .3060
(±.0001) inch on CONQUEST T42 and T42-L lathes.
This feedback arrangement, in which the actual slide movement is compared with the com-
mand originating from the control, is known as a closed loop system. Besides the closed loop
system for slide position discussed above, there is also a closed loop system for feedrate, which
makes use of the electrical pulses produced by the encoder.
By making use of the feedback information it receives from the encoder, the control can
accurately move a slide a commanded distance at a commanded feedrate.
X AND Z AXES
We label the axis of motion parallel to the spindle centerline as the Z axis and the axis of
motion parallel to the spindle face as the X axis. Throughout this manual we will refer to the
upper carriage as the Z Axis and the cross slide as the X Axis. These letter designations for the
two axes are recommended by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) and the International
Standards Organization (ISO). In an effort to promote interchangeability and prevent misunder-
standings between NC manufacturers and purchasers, EIA has set forth recommended stand-
ards for such things as axis and motion nomenclature, character codes for perforated tape,
operational command and data format, and electrical interface between numerical controls and
machine tools.
This machine tool is available with a secondary Z axis to drive the optional end-working turret
or optional ball screw driven sub-spindle. For purposes of CNC control of this axis, the axis
designation “Y” has been assigned.
RECTANGULAR COORDINATES
To establish a system of relating the position of the tool to a position on the workpiece, we
must first set up a system where we can define the location of a given point relative to a known
reference point. Since we have mutually perpendicular axes (X and Z), we can use rectangular
coordinates (also known as Cartesian coordinates) to describe the location of any point at which
the tool can be positioned.
There is nothing out of the ordinary about rectangular coordinates. They are used on such
everyday objects as maps and tickets to sports events. For example, in order to easily identify
the location of a city, a map maker will set up two perpendicular axes. These two axes give
every city its unique set of coordinates.
Similarly, reserved seats at stadiums are identified as a certain seat in a given row. (Seats
and rows are mutually perpendicular axes.)
To apply the use of rectangular coordinates when programming CONQUEST® T42 series
lathes, it is necessary to define coordinate system reference positions.
5-2 M-320A
COORDINATE SYSTEM REFERENCE POSITIONS
Axis Reference Position
The axis reference position is the location to which the specified axes will move when a G28
command is executed. This position never changes. Refer to Chapter 1 for information on pro-
gramming the G28 command.
Refer to Appendix One for the axis reference position coordinates.
Machine Zero Position
The intersection of the spindle face and the spindle centerline. This position never changes.
Main Turret Reference Location
The intersection of the turret face toward the spindle centerline and the turret face toward the
spindle at the center of the tool slot. This location can be modified through the use of tool
offsets. Refer to Figure 5.1 .
End-Working Turret Reference Location
The intersection of the spindle centerline and the face of the tool bushing in the active posi-
tion. This location can be modified through the use of tool offsets. Refer to Figure 5.2 .
Sub-Spindle Reference Location
The intersection of the spindle centerline and the face of the sub-spindle. Refer to Figure 5.3 .
+X
+Z
Turret Reference Location

CL
TI3899
Figure 5.1 - Coordinate System Reference Positions:

Main Turret
M-320A 5-3
Machine Zero Axis Reference
Position Position
CL
Turret Reference
Location
+X
+Z
TI3901

End-Working Turret [Option]
Sub-Spindle Reference Location Axis Reference Position
CL

+X
+Z
TI3903

Sub-Spindle [Option]
5-4 M-320A
POSITION REGISTERS
Press the Position key; then, press the ALL soft key to view the following position registers on
the control display screen:
Absolute
Distance to Go
Machine
Relative
- NOTE -
The “Distance To Go” registers are only displayed in Automatic or Manual Data
Input mode.
MACHINE POSITION REGISTERS
The Machine Position registers always display the “true” axis position of the turret reference
location relative to the machine zero position. Active tool offsets and work shift values have no
affect on the Machine Position display.
Refer to Figures 5.4, 5.5, and 5.6 .
ABSOLUTE POSITION REGISTERS
The Absolute Position registers, which can be modified, are probably of greater interest to the
programmer and operator. To simplify programming, the work coordinate system can be modified
through the use of a work shift and tool offsets to relate the tool nose position to coordinates on
the workpiece.
The work shift offset can be used to move the origin of the work coordinate system as
needed. The work shift is typically used to set the origin (X0. Z0.) to the intersection of the
spindle centerline and the face of the workpiece.
The tool offsets can be used to move the turret reference location to the tool nose posi-
tion.
Refer to Figures 5.4, 5.5, and 5.6 .
- NOTE -
Hardinge recommends that part programs are written using the Safe-Start format,
which makes use of the Work Shift Offset and Tool Offsets. Refer to Chapter 9 for
information about programming using the Hardinge Safe Start/End programming
format.
For additional information, refer to “Feedrate”, “Absolute and Incremental Program-
ming”, and “Linear Interpolation”, in Chapter 3.
M-320A 5-5
+X
Z Axis Machine Position
+Z
Turret Reference Location
X Axis
Machine Position Tool Nose
X Axis Position
Absolute Position
CL
Z Axis Absolute Position
TI3900
Figure 5.4 - Position Display Comparison:

Main Spindle Operation with Tool Offsets and Work Shift Active
Y Axis Machine Position
Y Axis Absolute Position
CL
Tool Nose
Position
Machine Zero
+X Position Turret Reference
Location
+Z
TI3902

End-Working Turret with Tool Offset and Work Shift Active
5-6 M-320A
Z Axis
Machine
Position
Turret
+X Reference
Position
+Z
X Axis Tool Nose Position
Machine Position
X Axis
Absolute Position
CL
Z Axis Absolute Position
TI3904

Sub-Spindle Operation with Tool Offsets and Work Shift Active
M-320A 5-7
- NOTE -
5-8 M-320A
CHAPTER 6 - MACHINING CYCLES
CANNED TURNING CYCLE (G90)

The G90 Canned Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multi-
ple turning passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be
either a straight turn or a taper turn.
Figure 6.1 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part which is to have a 1
inch long, .5 inch diameter turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1 inch. The face of the
part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since the part face is set to Z0 by the
G10 command in block N20, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The X and Z axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.
Turret station #1 is selected and Tool Offset #1 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the program-
mer to program the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle
centerline and Z axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine
coordinate system. If a Z axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z axis position of the tool tip will be
positioned in relation to the shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.
Since all dimensions are in inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correct
format in case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).
EXAMPLE 1: G90 STRAIGHT TURNING (Figure 6.1)
N10 G20 ; N90 G99 G90 X.875 Z-1. F.02 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N100 X.75 ;
N1 (Operator Message) ; N110 X.625 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N120 X.532 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N130 X.5 ;
N50 T0101 ; N140 G1 ;
N60 X1.5 Z.1 ; N150 M98 P1 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N160 M1 ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N170 M30 ;
2.735
.735 .500 1.000 .100

START
POINT
1.100
1.000
.500
CL
SPINDLE CHUCK
FACE FACE TI1600
Figure 6.1 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle (Straight Turn)
M-320A 6-1
The cutting tool path is a box pattern; and, because the Start Point is also the point to which
the tool returns on the return path, the Start Point in the X direction was placed at a distance
greater than .5 inches from the spindle centerline. This assures that the tool will completely face
the workpiece shoulder on each pass.
The G90 Preparatory Command is specified in block N90 together with G99 (inch/rev feed),
the first pass tool tip position relative to the spindle centerline, the length of cut, and the feedrate.
In subsequent turning cycle blocks (N100 through N130) it is only necessary to specify the tool
tip position relative to the spindle centerline for each pass. Feedrate and spindle speed changes
can also be programmed in these blocks. The Feedrate 1 Override switch is active during the
turning passes. To deactivate G90 mode, program another Group 1 G-code. (Refer to the G
code chart located in Appendix Two.)
The approach and return paths are executed at rapid traverse rate. This rate can be varied
with the Rapid Override switch.
If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, the parameters
MUST be entered prior to the G90 block.
In cases where U and W commands are used in place of X and Z, make certain each com-
mand has the correct sign.
EXAMPLE 2: G90 TAPER TURNING (Figure 6.2)
N10 G20 ; N110 X1.5359 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N120 X1.4109 ;
N1 (Operator Message) ; N130 X1.2859 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N140 X1.1609 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N150 X1.0671 ;
N50 T0101 ; N160 X1.0359 ;
N60 X2. Z.2 ; N170 G1 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N180 M98 P1 ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N190 M1 ;
N90 G1 G42 X1.76 Z.1 F200. ; N200 M30 ;
N100 G99 G90 X1.6609 Z-1. R-.29474 F.004 ;
2.735
1.000 .100
.735 .500
START POINT
1.760
1.6609 15° 1.125
1.250 1.0359
.500
CL
SPINDLE CHUCK
FACE FACE
TI2670
Figure 6.2 - G90 Canned Turning Cycle (Tapered Turn)
6-2 M-320A
All rules applying to straight turning in the G90 Canned Turning mode also apply to taper
turning in this mode.
Figure 6.2 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part which is to have a 1
inch long, 15 degree taper turned on a workpiece having a diameter of 1.25 inches. The face of
the part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since the part face is set to Z0 by the
G10 command in block N20, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The only difference between taper turning and the preceding straight turning is that the
amount of taper in the X direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed in the G90
block. Program the “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the -X direction as it
moves in the -Z direction, as in I.D. work. Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if the tool
moves in the +X direction as it moves in the -Z direction, as in O.D. work.
For this example, “R” was determined as follows:
R = (Z + .1) x -(Tan 15 degrees)
= 1.1 x -.26794... (Unrounded Value)
= -.29474 (Rounded Value)
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGH

AND FINISH TURNING (G71/G70)
- NOTE -
This section is divided into two parts; standard turning and the optional pocket
turning feature. All general information on G71/G70 turning is outlined in the section
on standard turning. Specific information relating to the optional G71/G70 pocket
turning feature begins on page 6-8.
The G71 Multiple Repetitive Turning Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of
describing multiple rough turning passes with two blocks of information. The first G71 block
specifies the amount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from
the workpiece for the return pass. The second G71 block specifies the data blocks which define
the section of the workpiece to be rough turned and the amount of stock to be left for finish
machining. Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifies the section of the workpiece to be
finish machined by specifying the first and last blocks of the required program section.
G71/G70 STANDARD TURNING
Figure 6.3 and its accompanying program illustrates an elementary part that is to be rough
turned and finish contoured to the dimensions shown.
The face of the part extends 2.735 inches from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 sets
the part face to Z0, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The X and Z Axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.
mer to program the X Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle
centerline and the Z Axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the
machine coordinate system. If a Z Axis Work Shift (G10) is active, the Z Axis position of the tool
tip will be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0.
Since all dimensions are in the inch mode, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the
correct format in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21). The Start
Point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the area occupied by the blank stock.
M-320A 6-3
2.735
1.000
.830
.735 .500 .750
.4665
.250
.100
START
POINT
1.125 W U/2
.940 1.300
.550
.100
CL .800 1.100
.250 U
SPINDLE CHUCK
FACE FACE TI1602
Figure 6.3 - G71/G70 Rough and Finish Turning Cycle
Example 3: G71/G70 Standard Turning Cycle (Figure 6.3)

N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.25 S800 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 ,R.1 F.004 ;
N1 (Operator Message) ; N150 X.55 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N160 X.8 Z-.4665 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.75 ;
N50 T0101 ; N180 X.94 ;
N60 X1.31 Z.2 ; N190 X1.1 Z-.83 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N200 Z-1. ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 X1.3 ;
N90 G1 G42 X1.3 Z.1 F100. ; N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;
N100 G99 ; N230 M98 P1 ;
N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ; N240 M1 ;
N120 G71 P130 Q210 U.03 W.015 F.01 ; N250 M30 ;
6-4 M-320A
Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough turning cycle:
N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ;
Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.

U: Depth of cut of each pass (as a radius value) during the roughing cycle. In this example
the depth of each cutting pass is .100 inches.
R: Distance the tool will withdraw from the part for the return pass.
Block N120 will execute the roughing cycle:
N120 G71 P130 Q210 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
Where: G71 = Preparatory command for the repetitive roughing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the workpiece
area to be roughed out.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the workpiece
area to be roughed out.
U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.
This is a diameter value.
W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.
F: Feedrate in inches/revolution for the roughing cycle. The decimal point must be pro-
grammed.
- NOTE -
Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q data
words.
Block N130 establishes the Constant Surface Speed value for the G70 finishing cycle:
N130 G0 X.25 S800 ;
S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.
Block N140 establishes the inch per revolution feedrate for the G70 finishing cycle.
N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 ,R.1 F.004 ;
F: The feedrate for the finishing pass. The decimal point must be programmed.
M-320A 6-5
Block N220 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the
first (P) and last (Q) blocks of the required program section.
N220 G70 P130 Q210 ;
area to be finish machined.
- NOTE -
Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P and Q data
words.
When the control encounters the G71 preparatory command blocks, the amount of finish stock
as specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will move in the
direction and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) to ensure
that slide movements occur in the direction to leave stock for finishing. If the sign is omitted, the
control automatically assumes plus (+). In this example the cross slide will move .015 inches in
the +U direction and the carriage will move .015 inches in the +W direction. The control will then
cause the machine to execute multiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and a roughing contour
pass (as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.3) that follows the contour as designated by
blocks N130 through N210. After completion of the roughing contour pass, the finish pass will be
executed according to the program section specified in the G70 block.
The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word in
block N110 (R.025).
In this example the same tool is used for roughing and finishing; therefore, Tool Nose Radius
Compensation must be established in a block preceding the G71 roughing cycle block. Tool
Nose Radius Compensation is activated and interpolated in the move to the starting point com-
manded in block N90. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the G71 cycle and
reactivated after the G71 cycle is completed. After the workpiece has been finish machined, Tool
Nose Radius Compensation is canceled by the G40 command in sub-program “O1", which is
called in block N230. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation", Chapter 2.
Constant Surface Speed must be established in blocks preceding the G71 roughing cycle.
The feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the first G71 block or in the
second G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing pass must be established in
the part program after the second G71 block. The surface speed and feedrate for the finishing
pass can be changed at will between the starting and ending blocks as designated in the G70
block.
The spindle speed command that must precede entry into Constant Surface Speed mode is
programmed in block N30. A G99 Preparatory command, programmed in block N100, estab-
lishes Inch per Revolution feedrate. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word and
the G50 Preparatory Command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96
command in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle is set by the S word in the
same block. Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Feedrate for the
finishing pass is established in block N140. Constant Surface Speed is canceled by the G97
command in sub-program “O1" after the workpiece has been finish machined. Also see ”Con-
stant Surface Speed Programming", in Chapter 9.
6-6 M-320A
G71 Standard Turning Programming Rules
- NOTE -
Refer also to page 6-9 for rules when programming G71/G70 pocket turning.
1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain a Z move.

2. G00 or G01 should be programmed in the block specified by the P word.
3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern on both the X
and Z axes.
4. No subprogram can be called in the program between the start of the cycle designated
by P and the end of the cycle designated by Q.
5. It is not necessary to program a return to the start point at the end of the program. The
control automatically returns the slides to the start point after the block specified by Q is
executed.
6. If Tool Nose Radius Compensation is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the
first G71 block. Tool Nose Radius Compensation will be deactivated during the G71
cycle and reactivated after the G71 cycle is completed.
7. If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be programmed prior to the first G71
block.
8. Tooling changes for the roughing cycle must be made prior to the first G71 block. Tool
offset changes for the finishing cycle may be made within the blocks designated by the P
and Q words in the G70 block.
9. The spindle speed and feedrate for the roughing cycle can be specified prior to the first
G71 block or in the second G71 block. The spindle speed and feedrate for the finishing
cycle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70
block.
M-320A 6-7
G71/G70 POCKET TURNING [Option]
- NOTE -
This section contains specific information relating to G71/G70 pocket turning. Refer
to “G71/G70 Standard Turning”, beginning on page 6-3, for more complete informa-
tion on programming the G71/G70 turning cycle.
Figure 6.4 and its accompanying program illustrates a pocket contour that is to be rough
turned and finish turned to the dimensions shown. Figure 6.5 illustrates the paths followed by the
roughing and finishing tools.
The part face is set to Z0; therefore, all turning passes will be in the minus Z direction.
Example 4: G71/G70 Pocket Turning Cycle (Figure 6.4)

N10 G20 ; N130 G0 X.4 W0. S800 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.735 ; N140 G1 G99 X.75 Z-.125 F.004 ;
N1 (Operator Message) ; N150 Z-.25 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N160 X.5 Z-.375 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.625 ;
N50 T0101 ; N180 X.75 Z-.75 ;
N60 X1.1 Z.1 ; N190 Z-.875 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N200 X1.1 Z-1.05 ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 G70 P130 Q200 ;
N90 G1 G42 X1.05 Z.05 F100. ; N220 M98 P1 ;
N100 G99 ; N230 M1 ;
N110 G71 U.1 R.025 ; N240 M30 ;
N120 G71 P130 Q200 U.03 W0 F.01 ;
1.050
.875
.750
.625
.375
.250
.125
.050
START POINT
45°
CL
1.000 Z0 .500 .750 1.100
DIA. DIA. DIA. DIA. TI2697
Figure 6.4 - G71/G70 Pocket Cutting (Sample Part)
6-8 M-320A
START POINT
CL
Z0
TI2698
Figure 6.5 - Tool Path For G71/G70 Pocket Cutting

(Enlarged View)
- NOTE -
When programming G71 pocket turning, the following programming rules super-
sede the corresponding standard G71 programming rules, as outlined on page 6-7.
All other programming rules outlined under standard G71 turning still apply.
G71 Pocket Turning Programming Rules

1. The value of the W data word in the second G71 block MUST be zero (W0); otherwise,
the tool tip may cut into one of the side walls of the pocket.
2. When the block specified by the P word in the second G71 block does not contain Z axis
motion, a W0 (zero) MUST be programmed in the block specified by the P word.
3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern on the Z axis
only.
4. A maximum of ten pockets can be programmed in the G71 turning cycle.
M-320A 6-9
CANNED FACING CYCLE (G94)
The G94 Canned Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of defining multi-
ple facing passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass. The operation may be either
straight or taper facing.
Figure 6.6 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part having a diameter of
1.5 inches that is to be faced back .5 inches with a .5 inch diameter projection remaining.
Example 5: G94 STRAIGHT FACING (Figure 6.6)
N10 G20 ; N110 Z-.1875 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-1.9 ; N120 Z-.25 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N140 Z-.375 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N150 Z-.4375 ;
N50 T0101 ; N160 Z-.484 ;
N60 X1.6 Z.1 ; N170 Z-.5 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N180 G1 ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N190 M98 P1 ;
N90 G99 G94 X.5 Z-.0625 F.002 ; N200 M1 ;
N100 Z-.125 ; N210 M30 ;
1.900
.400 .500 .500 .100

START
POINT
1.600
1.500
CL .500
SPINDLE CHUCK
FACE FACE TI1603
Figure 6.6 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle (Straight Facing)
6-10 M-320A
The X and Z axis tool offsets are activated through the Tool Offset selection in block N50.
mer to program the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the spindle
centerline and Z axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the machine
coordinate system. If a Z axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z axis position of the tool tip will be
positioned in relation to the shifted Z0.
correct format in case the previously executed program was in metric mode (G21).
The cutting tool path is a box pattern. Since the Start Point is also the point to which the tool
returns on the return path, the starting point in the X direction was placed at a distance greater
than .75 inches from the spindle centerline. This assures that the cutting tool will completely face
the workpiece shoulder on each pass. In the Z direction, the start point was placed in front of the
workpiece face to ensure that the .5 inch diameter is completely turned on each pass.
The G94 Preparatory Command is specified in block N90 along with the depth of cut for the
first pass (Z) on relation to Z0 (zero) and the diameter to which the facing operation is to extend
(X). The feedrate is also specified. In subsequent blocks (N100 through N170) it is only neces-
sary to specify the depth of cut for each pass in relation to Z0 (zero). Feedrate and spindle
speed changes can also be programmed in these blocks. The Feedrate 1 Override switch is
active during the facing passes. To deactivate the G94 mode, program another group 1 G code.
Refer to the G Code chart in Appendix Two.
- CAUTION -
All facing passes MUST be toward the spindle centerline. If the facing opera-
tion is programmed to face away from the spindle centerline, the cutting tool
will advance into the workpiece at the rapid traverse rate.
The approach and return paths are executed at the rapid traverse rate. This rate may be
varied with the Rapid Override switch.
If Constant Surface Speed or Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used, the parameters MUST
be entered prior to the G94 block.
In cases where U and W commands are used in place of X and Z make certain each com-
mand has the correct sign.
M-320A 6-11
Example 6: G94 TAPER FACING (Figure 6.7)
N10 G20 ; N130 Z-.0875 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.025 ; N140 Z-.15 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N160 Z-.275 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N170 Z-.3375 ;
N50 T0101 ; N180 Z-.4 ;
N60 X1.75 Z.2 ; N190 Z-.4625 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N200 Z-.49 ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N210 Z-.5 ;
N90 G1 G41 X1.6 Z.1 F200. ; N220 G1 ;
N100 G99 G94 X.5 Z.1 R-.14737 F.002 ; N230 M98 P1 ;
N110 Z.0375 ; N240 M1 ;
N120 Z-.025; N250 M30 ;
2.025
.400 .500 15o .500 .100
.14737
START
POINT
.550
1.500 1.600
.500
CL
SPINDLE CHUCK
FACE FACE TIA1604
Figure 6.7 - G94 Canned Facing Cycle (Tapered Facing)
All rules applying to straight facing in the G94 Canned Facing cycle also apply to taper facing.
Figure 6.7 illustrates an elementary part with a 1.5 inch diameter. This part is faced back .5
inches and leaves a shoulder that tapers back 15 degrees. A .5 inch diameter projection re-
mains.
The only difference between taper facing and the preceding straight facing example is that the
amount of taper in the Z direction, expressed as an “R” value, must be programmed in the G94
block. Program the “R” word as a POSITIVE value if the tool moves in the +X direction as it
moves in the +Z direction, as in I.D. work. Program the “R” word as a NEGATIVE value if the
tool moves in the -X direction as it moves in the +Z direction, as in O.D. work.
For this example, R was determined as follows:
R = (1.05 - x) x (-Tan 15°)
= (1.05 - .5) x -.26794... (Unrounded Value)
= -.14737 (Rounded Value)
6-12 M-320A
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE ROUGH
AND FINISH FACING (G72/G70)
The G72 Multiple Repetitive Facing Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of
describing multiple rough facing passes with two blocks of information. The first G72 block speci-
fies the amount of stock to be removed per pass and the distance the tool will retract from the
workpiece for the return pass. The second G72 block specifies the data blocks which define the
section of the workpiece to be rough faced, the amount of stock to be left for finish machining,
and the feedrate for the G72 roughing cycle. Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifies
the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the first and last blocks of the
required program section.
Figure 6.8 and its accompanying program illustrate an elementary part that is to be rough and
finish contoured to the dimensions shown.
N10 G20 ; N120 G72 P130 Q180 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.650 ; N130 G0 Z-1.25 S800 ;
N2 (Operator Message) ; N140 G1 G99 X3. F.004 ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; N150 Z-.95235 ;
N40 M98 P1 ; N160 X1. Z-.375 ;
N50 T0202 ; N170 X.75 ;
N60 X4.11 Z0.2 ; N180 Z.1 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ; N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;
N80 G96 S1000 ; N200 M98 P1 ;
N90 G1 G41 X4.1 Z.1 F100. ; N210 M1 ;
N100 G99 ; N220 M30 ;
N110 G72 W.1 R.03 ;
2.650
.400 .500 1.250
.95235 .100
W START
(N120) .375 POINT
W (N110)
4.100
4.000
3.000
30o U
1.000
.750
CL
SPINDLE CHUCK
FACE FACE TI1605
Figure 6.8 - G72/G70 Rough and Finish Facing Cycle
M-320A 6-13
The face of the part extends 2.650 from the face of the spindle. Since block N20 sets the part
face to Z0, all facing passes will be in the minus Z direction.
The X and Z axis tool offsets are compensated for through the Tool Offset selection in block
N50. Turret Station #2 is selected and Tool Offset #2 is activated. The Tool Offset allows the
programmer to program the X axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to the
spindle centerline and Z axis position of the tool tip as the actual position relative to Z0 on the
machine coordinate system. If a Z axis Work Shift is active (G10), the Z axis position of the tool
tip will be positioned in relation to the shifted Z0, as established by the Work Shift offset.
correct format in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.
The start point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the area occupied by the
blank stock.
Block N110 will establish the parameters for the rough facing cycle:
N110 G72 W.1 R.03 ;
Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.
W: Specifies the depth of cut of each pass during the roughing cycle.
R: Specifies the distance the tool will retract from the workpiece for the return pass.
Block N120 will execute the rough facing cycle:

N120 G72 P130 Q180 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
Where: G72 = Preparatory command for the repetitive rough facing cycle.
area being roughed out.
U: Amount of stock on the X axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.
This is a diameter value
W: Amount of stock on the Z axis to be left for removal during the finish machining cycle.
F: Feedrate for the roughing passes. The decimal point must be programmed.
Block N130 establishes the Constant Surface Speed value for the G70 finishing cycle:
N130 G0 Z-1.25 S800 ;
S: The surface feet per minute for the finishing pass.
6-14 M-320A
N140 G1 G99 X3. F.004 ;
Block N190 designates the section of the workpiece to be finish machined by specifying the
first (P) and the last (Q) blocks of the required program section:
N190 G70 P130 Q180 ;
Where: G70 = Preparatory command for the finishing cycle.

P: Sequence number of the first block in the program section that controls the work-
piece area being finish machined.
Q: Sequence number of the last block in the program section that controls the work-
piece area being finish machined.
When the control encounters the G72 preparatory command blocks, the amount of finish stock
as specified by the U and W words is treated as a pair of offsets. The slides will move in the
direction and distance specified. The U and W words MUST be properly signed (+ or -) to ensure
that slide movements occur in the direction to leave stock for finishing. If the sign is omitted, the
control automatically assumes plus (+). In this example, the cross slide will move .015 in the +U
direction and the carriage will move .015 in the +W direction. The control will then cause the
machine to execute multiple roughing passes .1 inches deep and a roughing contour pass (as
shown by the dashed lines in Figure 6.6) that follows the contour as designated by blocks N130
through N180. After completion of the roughing contour pass, the finish pass will be executed
according to the program section specified by the G70 block.
The amount of tool withdrawal after completion of each pass is controlled by the R word in
block N110 (R0.03).
The spindle speed for the roughing passes is specified in block N80. It is recommended that
the spindle speed be established before the G72 blocks to ensure the spindle reaches full com-
manded speed before the roughing passes begin. Spindle speed and feedrate changes for the
finish cycle can be made at will between the starting and ending blocks as designated by P and
Q in the G70 block.
Tool changes (T function) for the roughing cycle MUST be made prior to the first G72 block.
Tool offset changes for the finishing cycle can be made within the blocks designated by the P
In this example the same tool is used for roughing and finishing; therefore, Tool Nose Radius
Compensation must be established in a block preceding the first G72 block. Tool Nose Radius
Compensation is activated and interpolated in the move to the starting point commanded in block
N90. Tool Nose Radius Compensation is deactivated during the G71 cycle and reactivated after
the G72 cycle is completed. Compensation is canceled by a G40 command in subroutine “O1",
which is called by line N200. Also see ”Tool Nose Radius Compensation" Chapter 2.
M-320A 6-15
If Constant Surface Speed is to be used, it must be established in blocks preceding the first
G72 block. Feedrate for the roughing passes may be established prior to the G72 blocks or in
the second G72 block. If a different surface speed and feedrate is required for the finishing pass,
it must be established in the part program after the second G72 block. Surface speed and
feedrate can be changed at will between the starting and ending block as designated by the P
The spindle speed command that must precede entry into Constant Surface Speed mode is
programmed in block N30. Maximum spindle speed is established by the S word and the G50
Preparatory command in block N70. Constant Surface Speed is established by the G96 com-
mand in block N80 and surface speed for the roughing cycle by the S word in the same block.
Surface speed for the finishing pass is established in block N130. Constant Surface Speed is
canceled by the G97 command in sub-program “O1" after the workpiece has been finish ma-
chined. Also see ”Constant Surface Speed Programming" in Chapter 9.
The feedrate for the finishing pass is established in block N140.
G72 Programming Notes
1. A block specified by a P word cannot contain an X move.
3. The contouring path must be a steadily increasing or decreasing pattern.
executed.
block.
and Q words.
cycle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words.
6-16 M-320A
AUTOMATIC G73/G70 ROUGH AND FINISH PATTERN REPEAT
The G73 Automatic Pattern Repeat Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of
repeatedly cutting a fixed pattern (contour) with two blocks of information. The first block speci-
fies the incremental distance between the first and last roughing pass and the number of rough-
ing passes to be executed. The second block specifies the section of the workpiece to be
roughed out, the amount of stock to be left for finish machining, and the roughing feedrate.
Finally, the G70 Preparatory Command specifies the section of the workpiece to be finish ma-
chined by specifying the first and last block of the required program section. This automatic cycle
is especially useful for rough and finish contouring a workpiece whose rough shape has already
been created by casting, forging or rough machining. If this cycle is to be used to contour a
workpiece from bar stock, make certain the first pass starts at a point that will not cause exces-
sive “hogging” on the first pass.
Figure 6.9 illustrates an elementary part that is to be finished to the dimensions shown with
three roughing passes and a finishing pass. It is assumed the configuration of the blank work-
piece approximates that of the finish piece.
Sample Program
N10 G20 ;
N20 G10 P0 Z-2.650 ;
N7 (Operator Message) ;
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ;
N40 M98 P1 ;
N50 T0707 ;
N60 X2.15 Z.2 ;
N70 G50 S3000 ; 2.650
N80 G96 S500 ;
N90 G1 G42 X2.05 Z.1 F100. ; 1.250
N100 G99 ; .970

N110 G73 U.135 W.05 R3 ;
.400 .500 .720
N120 G73 P130 Q200 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
N130 G0 X.5 ; .4665 .100
N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 F.002 ; .250
N150 X.75 ; START
N160 X1. Z-.4665 ; POINT
N170 Z-.72 ;
N180 X1.5 Z-.97 ; 30° 2.050
N190 Z-1.25 ; 2.000 45°
1.500
N200 X2.05 ;
1.000
N210 G70 P130 Q200 ; .750
N220 M98 P1 ; CL .500
N230 M1 ; SPINDLE CHUCK

FACE FACE
N240 M30 ;
W1 +W2
- NOTE -
U1 U2
The legends in lower half of Figure
6.9 are explained as follows: START
POINT U1 + U2
U1 = U (N110) W2
U2 = U (N120) W1
W1 = W (N110)
W2 = W (N120) TI1606
Figure 6.9 - G73/G70 Rough and Finish Pattern
M-320A 6-17
correct format in case the previously executed program was in metric (G21) mode.
The start point commanded in block N90 must be located outside the maximum diameter
occupied by the blank stock to be machined.
Block N110 will establish the parameters for the G73 rough facing cycle:
N110 G73 U.135 W.05 R3 ;
U: Distance and direction of relief in the X axis direction. (radius value) This value tells the
control the amount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the X direction. This
value will allow the control to calculate the correct distance and direction to pull away
from the workpiece before beginning the automatic cycle. This programmed value is
equal to the amount of stock to be removed from each side during the roughing cycle
minus the depth of the first cut and finish allowance on each side.
Example:
Total amount of stock to remove = .200 (radius value)
Depth of first cut = -.050 ”
X axis finish amount left = -.015 ”
Programmed U word (Block N110) = .135 ”
W: Distance and direction of relief in the Z axis direction. This value tells the control the
amount of material to be removed from the workpiece in the Z direction. This value will
allow the control to calculate the correct distance and direction to pull away from the
workpiece before beginning the automatic cycle. This programmed value is equal to the
amount of stock to be removed during the roughing cycle minus the depth of the first cut
and finish allowance.
R: The number of rough passes desired.
- NOTE -
The above entries are modal and are not changed until another value is pro-
grammed.
Block N120 will execute the G73 rough facing cycle:

N120 G73 P130 Q200 U.03 W.015 F.01 ;
P: Sequence number of the first block for the program section that controls the workpiece
Q: Sequence number of the last block for the program section that controls the workpiece
U: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in X direction (diameter value).
W: Distance and direction of finishing allowance in Z direction.
F: Feedrate to be active during the automatic roughing cycle. The decimal point must be
programmed.
N140 G1 G99 Z-.25 F.002 ;
6-18 M-320A
executed.
block.
cycle can be specified within the blocks designated by the P and Q words in the G70
block.
AUTOMATIC FINISHING CYCLE (G70)

After rough cutting by G71, G72, or G73, the following command permits finishing.
G70 P(starting block) Q(finishing block) ;
Refer to the sections on the G71, G72, and G73 automatic cycles for G70 programming
examples.
- CAUTION-
Never position the Start Point below the Q Line diameter. When the G70 fin-
ish turn is completed, the tool rapids back to the Start Point.
1. F, S and T words programmed between sequence numbers “P___” and “Q___”, as de-
fined by the G70 program block will be recognized by the G70 cycle.
2. When the G70 Automatic Finishing Cycle is completed, the tool is returned to the start
point and the next block is read.
3. In blocks between the starting block and finishing block programmed in G70 through
G73, subprograms cannot be called.
M-320A 6-19
AUTOMATIC DRILLING CYCLES
In any auto deep hole drilling cycle, the Z axis is reversed at prescribed intervals to provide
for proper chip removal. An automatic drilling cycle must be flexible enough to accommodate a
wide variety of materials and a full range of hole depths. It is the programmer’s responsibility to
make certain that the programmed parameters result in a cycle that satisfactorily removes chips
during the drilling operation. If the chip load builds up:
1. The drill bit could break.
2. The spindle could stall.
3. The Z axis servo motor could overload.
CONSTANT DEPTH INCREMENT AUTO DRILLING CYCLE (G74)
A G74 command activates an automatic drilling cycle that uses constant depth increments. All
information for the cycle is programmed in two data blocks. The data word formats are defined in
the section below and illustrated in Figure 6.10 .
Block Format
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch Programming
G74 R(e) ;
G74 Z(W)±2.4 Q6 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;
Metric Programming
G74 R(e) ;
G74 Z(W)±3.3 Q6 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;
Inch Programming
G74 R(e) ;
G74 Z(W)±2.5 Q7 F3.2 (in/min) or F1.6 (in/rev) ;
Metric Programming
G74 R(e) ;
G74 Z(W)±3.4 Q7 F5.0 (mm/min) or F3.4 (mm/rev) ;
- NOTE -
The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word formats, NOT actual
dimensions.
6-20 M-320A
Z-Axis Start Point
W
Z
+Z
R Q
+X TI2159
Figure 6.10 - G74 Auto Drilling Cycle Parameters
Q Word Programming
Decimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word. On CONQUEST® T42 and
T42-L lathes, the control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.4 for English units (inches)
and Q3.3 for Metric units (millimeters). On CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® lathes, the
control assumes decimal point placement as Q2.5 for English units (inches) and Q3.4 for Metric
units (millimeters). Leading zeros may be omitted, however trailing zeros MUST be programmed.
Refer to the following examples:
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathes
Inch: Q2500 = .25 inches Metric: Q2500 = 2.5 millimeters
Q25000 = 2.50 inches Q25000 = 25.0 millimeters
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathes
Where: G74 = G code for Auto Drilling Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)
R = Amount of retract between cutting moves.
Z = Z coordinate of Final Hole Depth (signed)
W = Z Increment from Start Point to Final Depth (signed)
Q = Size of Depth Increment (unsigned)
F = Feedrate.
Before the G74 block is encountered, the drill must be positioned at the start point. During
execution of the cycle, the series of Z axis moves (see Figure 6.10) is as follows:
a) From the start point, the drill feeds in “Q” amount.
b) The drill retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.
c) The drill feeds in “Q+R” amount.
d) The drill continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “Q+R” amount until the last
pass. On the last pass, the drill feeds in to the final hole depth, then rapid retracts to the
start point.
M-320A 6-21
G74 Auto Drilling Sample Program
In this sample program, Z0 (zero) is the face of the part and the final depth of the hole is 1.5
inches. Refer to Figure 6.11 .
Sample Program
N7 (Operator Message) ; N270 G74 R.05 ;
N230 G97 S1000 M13 ; N280 G74 G99 Z-1.5 Q25000 F.005 ;
N240 M98 P1 ; N290 M98 P2 ;
N250 T0707 ; N300 M1;
N260 X0. Z.1 ;
1.600
1.500 .100
Start Point
(X0. Z.1)
.050 .100
+X
TI2160
Figure 6.11 - G74 Auto Drilling Cycle

(Sample Workpiece)
R WORD (N270)
Specifies the amount of retract between each cutting move of the drill bit. Refer to “R”, in
Figure 6.10 . In this example, the amount of retract is .05 inches.
F WORD (N280)
Specifies the feedrate for the G74 Auto Drilling Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is
.005 inches per revolution.
Q WORD (N280)
Specifies the depth of cut in the Z direction. In this example, the depth of cut is .25
inches. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.
Z WORD (N280)
Specifies the final depth of the drilled hole, in reference to Z0 (zero). In this example, the
final depth of the drilled hole is 1.5 inches.
- NOTE -
Instead of programming Z-1.5 in block N280, we could have programmed W-1.6
(the incremental distance from the start point to the final hole depth) and the cycle
would have behaved exactly the same way.
6-22 M-320A
VARIABLE DEPTH INCREMENT AUTO DRILLING CYCLE
The G74 Auto Drilling Cycle has limited applications because of its constant infeed, constant
retract increments, and absence of a dwell. To create a more versatile automatic drilling cycle,
Hardinge Inc. has made use of the Macro B programming feature to develop an auto drilling
cycle with variable depth increments, a retract point clear of the part, and a programmable dwell
at the retract point.
All information required for this drilling cycle is programmed in one data block.
- NOTE -
The values shown in the following data blocks are data word format designations,
NOT actual dimensions.
Decimal point programming MUST be used in data blocks containing macro calls.
Block Format
Inch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.4 B2.4 F1.6 W2.4 C2.4 A5.1 ;
Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.3 B3.3 F3.4 W3.3 C3.3 A5.1 ;
Inch Format: G65 P9136 K±2.5 B2.5 F1.6 W2.5 H1.5 C2.5 A5.1 ;
Metric Format: G65 P9136 K±3.4 B3.4 F3.4 W3.4 H2.4 C3.4 A5.1 ;
Where: G65 = G Code for Macro Call

P9136 = Macro Program 9136 (Deep Drill)
K = Z Axis End Position (SIGNED absolute value)
B = Start Feed Increment Value (Incremental value, always positive)
F = Drill Feedrate per Revolution
W = Depth of First Drill In-Feed
C = Minimum Increment
A = Amount of Dwell (in seconds) at Retract Point
Refer to Figure 6.12 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.
M-320A 6-23
Z START POSITION
MIN. MIN. B
INC. INC. 3rd 2nd Pass 1st Pass (W)
K
Z END
POSITION RAPID TRAVERSE
FEED
TI2163
Figure 6.12 - Macro 9136: Deep Drill Cycle Parameters
Positioning the Drill

The data block preceding the block calling Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 will position the
drill tip at the start point for the drilling cycle. All retract motion during the drilling cycle will be to
this start point.
Calculating the Drill Pass Increments

1. 1st Pass Increment = Specified by the W word.
2. 2nd pass increment = .5 times the 1st pass increment.
3. 3rd pass increment = .5 times the 2nd pass increment.
4. 4th pass increment = .5 times the 3rd pass increment.
The control will not allow the pass increment to drop below the minimum pass increment, as
established by the C word.
- NOTE -
If desired, the value of “W” can be increased or decreased to lengthen or shorten
the first pass depth. This will have a direct affect on the rest of the passes.
6-24 M-320A
Example 1 (Refer to Figure 6.13)
Deep Drill Macro Program 9136
A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep, is to be drilled in a piece of 1-3/16 inch
diameter stock. The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell is
programmed at the retract position. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and the
minimum increment will be set to .0625 inches. We will assume that the face of the work-
piece has been set to Z0 (zero) and the part has already been center drilled. The part
program block for the deep drilling cycle will be as follows:
G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 ;
Sample Program Segment:

.
.
N150 M98 P1 ;
N160 M1 ;
N170 G97 S1400 M13 ;
N180 M98 P1 ;
N190 T0202 ;
N200 X0. Z.1 ;
N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 ;
N220 M98 P1 ;
N230 M1 ;
.
.
1.500
.750 .100
.730 .020
Start Point
(X0. Z.1)
C
L
Second Rapid-to-Feed First Rapid-to-Feed

Point (X0. Z.02) Point (X0. Z.02)
Z0
TI2166
Figure 6.13 - Macro Program 9136

(Without using the optional Z Word)
M-320A 6-25
Optional Z Word
- CAUTION -
The Z word is an optional command and is NOT TO BE PROGRAMMED UN-
LESS REQUIRED.
Assuming the part face has been set to Z0, a Z word with a negative (-) value may be
programmed if the drill is to start inside the workpiece; for example, inside a counterbore.
The depth of the counterbore will be programmed in the macro command line as a negative
value, assuming the face of the workpiece is set to Z0. The drill will rapid into the counterbore a
distance equal to the value of the Z word plus the value of the B word. The drill will feed in from
this position at the programmed feedrate.
Refer to “Example 2", below.
Example 2 (Refer to Figure 6.14)

Deep Drill Macro Program 9136 (With a Z Word)
A .25 inch diameter hole, 1.5 inches deep from the face of the workpiece, is to be drilled
in a piece of 1-3/16 inch diameter stock. The hole will begin at the base of a .25 inch
counterbore. The depth of the first pass is to be .75 inches. A one-half second dwell is
programmed at the retract position. The start feed increment will be set to .02 inches and the
minimum increment will be set to .0625 inches. We will assume that the face of the work-
piece has been set to Z0 (zero) and the bottom of the counterbore has already been center
drilled. The part program block for the deep drilling cycle will be as follows:
G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 Z-.25 ;
1.500
1.000
.980 .100
.750 .250
.020
Start Point
(X0. Z.1)
C
L
First Rapid-to-Feed
Second Rapid-to-Feed Point (X0. Z-.23)
Point (X0. Z-.98)
Z0 TI2174
Figure 6.14 - Macro Program 9136

(Using the optional Z Word)
6-26 M-320A
The only difference between this sample program segment and the sample program segment
in Example 1 is that in this sample the drill bit will rapid from the start point (X0. Z.1) to X0. Z-.23
before going to the programmed feedrate.
The coordinate location X0. Z-.23 was determined by adding the Feed Increment Value (B
word) to the value of the programmed Z word.
Sample Program Segment
.
.
N150 M98 P1 ;
N160 M1 ;
N170 G97 S1400 M13 ;
N180 M98 P1 ;
N190 T0202 ;
N200 X0. Z0.1 ;
N210 G65 P9136 K-1.5 B.02 F.008 W.75 C.0625 A.5 Z-.25 ;
N220 M98 P1 ;
N230 M1 ;
.
.
M-320A 6-27
G75 AUTO GROOVING CYCLE
All information for the G75 Auto Grooving Cycle is programmed in two data blocks, as follows:
BLOCK FORMAT

Inch Format
G75 R2.4 ;
G75 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 P6 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);
Metric Format
G75 R3.3 ;
G75 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 P6 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);

Inch Format
G75 R2.5 ;
G75 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 P6 Q6 F3.2 (ipm) or F1.6 (ipr);
Metric Format
G75 R3.4 ;
G75 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 P6 Q6 F5.0 (mmpm) or F3.4 (mmpr);
- NOTE -
The values shown in the preceding data blocks are data word format designations,
NOT actual dimensions.
Where: G75 = G code for Auto Grooving Cycle (Constant Depth Increments)
R= Amount of retract between cutting moves.
X= X coordinate at full depth of pass (signed)
U= Incremental distance from X axis start point
to X axis final position (signed)
Z= Z axis position for final pass (signed)
W= Incremental distance from first pass Z axis position
to last pass Z axis position (signed)
P= Size of depth increment (unsigned)
Q= Incremental amount of Z axis move between full
cutting passes (unsigned)
F= Feedrate.
Refer to Figure 6.15 to see how these data words relate to the workpiece.
6-28 M-320A
P AND Q WORD PROGRAMMING
Decimal Point programming is NOT allowed with the P or Q data words. The control assumes
decimal point placement as P2.5 and Q2.5 for English units (inches) and P3.4 and Q3.4 for
Metric units (millimeters). Leading zeros may be omitted; however trailing zeros MUST be pro-
grammed. Refer to the following examples:
Inch: P2500 = .25 inches Metric: P2500 = 2.5 millimeters
P25000 = 2.50 inches P25000 = 25.0 millimeters
Inch: P25000 = .25 inches Metric: P25000 = 2.5 millimeters
P250000 = 2.50 inches P250000 = 25.0 millimeters
TOOL MOVEMENT SEQUENCE

Before the G75 blocks are encountered, the grooving tool must be positioned at the X and Z
axis start point. During execution of the cycle, the series of X and Z axis moves (Refer to Figure
6.15) is as follows:
a) From the start point, the tool feeds in “P” amount.
b) The tool retracts at rapid traverse “R” amount.
c) The tool feeds in “P+R” amount.
d) The tool continues to rapid retract “R” amount, then feed in “P+R” amount until the last
pass. On the last pass, the tool feeds in a distance equal to or less than “P” until the
final depth is reached.
e) The tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position.
f) The tool moves toward the Z axis end point a distance specified by the Q word to arrive
at the start point for the next full cut.
g) Steps “a” through “f” are repeated until the entire groove is completed.
h) When the final cut is completed, the tool rapid retracts to the X axis start position; then
rapids to the X and Z axis start point specified by the program blocks immediately pre-
ceding the G75 blocks.
M-320A 6-29
1 4
Z0
W
START
POINT
U U
X,Z
CL CL
2 5
P
U
CL CL
3 6
Z AXIS
MOVEMENT
CL CL
TI2164
Figure 6.15 - G75 Auto Grooving Cycle Parameters
6-30 M-320A
G75 AUTO GROOVING SAMPLE PROGRAM
In this sample program segment, X0 (zero) is the spindle centerline, Z0 (zero) is the face of
the workpiece and the final depth of the groove is .25 inches. The width of the grooving tool is
.125 inches. Refer to Figure 6.16 .
- NOTE -
The P word in block N300 is an incremental value. Each cutting pass will be an
actual .075 inch cut.

N7 (Operator Message) ; N280 G96 S280
N230 G97 M13 ; N290 G75 R.02 ;
N240 M98 P1 ; N300 G75 G99 X.5 Z-.8 P07500 Q10000 F.005 ;
N250 T0707 ; N310 M98 P1 ;
N260 X1.1 Z-.625 ; N320 M1 ;
N270 G50 S5200 ;
R WORD (N290)
Specifies the incremental amount of retract between each cutting move of the grooving
tool. Refer to “R”, in Figure 6.15 . In this example, the amount of retract is .02 inches.
F WORD (N300)
Specifies the feedrate for the G75 Auto Grooving Cycle. In this example, the feedrate is
+X
.800
+Z .500
START POINT .250

(X1.1 Z-.625) .625
1.100 DIA.
1.000 DIA.
.500 DIA.
C
L
TI2165
Figure 6.16 - G75 Auto Grooving Cycle

(Sample Workpiece)
M-320A 6-31
P WORD (N300)
Specifies the incremental depth of each cutting move in the X direction. In this example,
the depth of each cutting move is .075 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT al-
lowed with the P word.
Q WORD (N300)
Specifies the incremental move in the Z direction between each full cutting pass. In this
example, the incremental move is .100 inches. Decimal point programming is NOT al-
lowed with the Q word.
X WORD (N300)
Specifies the X axis position of the tool at the end of each complete cutting pass, in
reference to X0 (zero). In this example, the X axis position is X.5 inches.
Z WORD (N300)
Specifies the Z axis position for the final full cutting pass, in reference to Z0 (zero). In
this example, the final Z axis position is Z-.8 inches.
- NOTE -
If the Z values in blocks N260 and N300 are swapped, the tool will begin at Z-.8
and finish at Z-.625 .
6-32 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 6-33
- NOTES -
6-34 M-320A
CHAPTER 7 - THREADING CYCLE
INTRODUCTION
The feedrate for precision threading should be lead limited to 120 inches [3048 mm] per
minute. Above this value, to the maximum machine feedrate, the lead error should be checked to
make certain it does not exceed specifications for the individual thread being produced. It is the
programmer’s responsibility to ensure that the combination of lead and spindle speed does not
exceed a feedrate which produces threads that are not within specifications.
The maximum spindle speed for a given thread lead is calculated through the use of the
following formulas:
English Threads: Maximum rpm = 120 inches/minute ÷ Thread Lead
Metric Threads: Maximum rpm = 3048 millimeters/minute ÷ Thread Lead
Refer to the following chart to determine the maximum spindle rpm rating, based on the type
of spindle drive that the machine is equipped with. Refer to Appendix One for power and torque
curves.
Spindle Drive Type* Maximum RPM

10 HP [7.5 Kw] Standard Drive 5000
10 HP [7.5 Kw] High Torque Drive 3000
15 HP [11 Kw] High Speed Drive 6000
15 HP [11 Kw] High Torque Drive 4400
* 30 minute power rating
SINGLE BLOCK THREADCUTTING

CONQUEST® T42 series lathes feature an encoder that is geared to the spindle through a
timing belt. The encoder monitors RPM during a threading pass and when feeding in Inches/mm
per Revolution (G99). The encoder sends data relating axis position and velocity to the servo
drives.
With the Single Block Threadcutting feature, the programmer can cut a thread in any desired
number of passes using either the G32 or G92 preparatory command. The principle differences
between the two commands are:
1. The G92 command causes the X axis movements of the threading tool to be controlled
automatically by the machine during the threading cycle. The G32 command is used to
program each threading pass individually.
2. The G92 command requires fewer blocks of information for a complete threading opera-
tion.
The feedrate of the carriage and/or cross slide is determined by programming the thread
“Lead” using the F word address. The format for F is:
Inch Programming: F1.6
Metric Programming: F3.4
M-320A 7-1
- NOTE -
Thread pitch is the axial distance from the center of one thread to the center of the
next. Lead is the distance the screw will advance when turned one revolution. On a
single thread screw, the pitch and lead are equal since a screw will advance an
amount equal to the pitch when turned one revolution. On a double thread the
screw will advance two threads or twice the pitch in one revolution. Therefore, the
programmed lead is twice the pitch.
Program the spindle speed for a threading operation in a block of data preceding the thread-
cutting calling block (G32 or G92). This will allow time for the spindle speed to stabilize before
entering the threadcutting mode.
The Feedrate 1 Override switch is not active during a G32 or G92 threadcutting pass unless it
is set to 0%. When the Feedrate 1 Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion WILL STOP.
The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons are active. Unless the control has the op-
tional Thread Cutting Cycle Retract feature, Feed Hold is not active during the threadcutting
pass, but is active on the return pass.
TO ESTABLISH A START POINT FOR THREADING
For accurate thread leads it is essential that the per revolution feedrate of the tool is held
constant during the threading pass. The location of the start point for each threading pass is
important in that sufficient distance must be provided to accelerate the tool from its Z axis veloc-
ity at the end of the infeed to the proper threading velocity.
Due to the nature of the servo-controlled axis drive system, provide a minimum of four leads
or .250 inch, whichever distance is greater, between the first thread to be cut and the start point
for the threading pass.
The X axis start point should be equal to the diameter of the workpiece plus two times the
single depth of thread.
- NOTE -
This minimum clearance must be provided for all threading passes. If a compound
infeed is used, (see “Compound Infeed Threading”, Page 7-8) work backwards to
calculate the start point for the cycle. Beginning with the last threading pass, calcu-
late the Z axis motion during infeed for the first pass. Add this distance to the Z
axis clearance (four leads or .250 inch, whichever is greater). This gives the Z axis
position of the start point for the cycle relative to the first thread to be cut.
7-2 M-320A
G32 PROGRAMMING
The G32 command, which must be programmed in each threadcutting data block, automat-
ically resynchronizes the threadcutting mode so that the same thread is cut in each pass. The
G32 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.
Only one axis need be programmed for a straight thread; both axes must be programmed for
a tapered thread. The thread length and lead must be programmed in each G32 block.
Example 1: G32 Straight Threads (Figure 7.1)
For this example it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and is
ready to have a .0625 lead, single start, 1.00 inch long thread cut on its O.D.
The face of the part is set to Z0. All threading passes will, therefore, be in the minus Z
direction. The spindle centerline is X0. G98 is activated by Safe Start Subprogram O1 in block
N360.
Sample Program
N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 X.951 ;
N350 G97 S500 M13 ; N460 G0 Z.25 ;
N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X.8176 F50. ;
N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;
N380 X.951 Z.25 S1920 ; N490 X.951 ;
N390 G1 X.8559 F50. ; N500 G0 Z.25 ;
N400 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N510 G1 X.7984 F50. ;
N410 X.951 ; N520 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;
N420 G0 Z.25 ; N530 G1 X.951 ;
N430 G1 X.8367 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;
N440 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N550 M1 ;
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383"
1
2
.250
LEAD
.875
.0625
.0383 .7984
CL
1.000
Z0 TI1607
Figure 7.1 - Sample G32 Straight Threading Program
M-320A 7-3
Example 2: G32 Tapered Threads (Figure 7.2)
When programming tapered threads, movements must be programmed in both the X and Z
axes. The lead is specified by the F word, whose lead orientation (X or Z axis) is determined by
the angle of the taper with the part centerline.
If the angle of taper “B”, Figure 7.2, is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F is
measured parallel to the Z axis. If angle of the taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured
parallel to the X axis.
For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree
47 minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start thread 1.25 inches long turned
on its O.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis because the angle of taper
is less than 45 degrees.
The face of the part is set to Z0. All threading passes will, therefore, be in the minus Z
direction. The spindle centerline is X0.
Sample Program
N7 (T0707 1.5 - 14 TAPER THREAD) ; N450 X1.614 ;
N350 G97 S1000 M13 ; N460 G0 Z.2857 ;
N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X1.3187 F50. ;
N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 X1.4143 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;
N380 X1.614 Z.2857 S1680 ; N490 X1.614 ;
N390 G1 X1.3758 F50. ; N500 G0 Z.2857 ;
N400 G32 X1.4714 Z-1.25 F.071429 ; N510 G1 X1.2901 F50. ;
N410 X1.614 ; N520 G32 X1.3857 Z-1.25 F.071429 ;
N420 G0 Z.2857 ; N530 X1.614 ;
N430 G1 X1.3472 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;
N440 G32 X1.4429 Z-1.25 F.071429 ; N550 M1 ;
Single Depth of Thread= .8 x Lead = .0571"

Angle B = 1° 47’ START
Taper (R) = .0478" POINT
LEAD
.071429
.2857
1.500
.0478 1.614
.0571
B
1.4044
CL
1.250
Z0
TI2583
Figure 7.2 - Sample G32 Taper Threading Program
7-4 M-320A
G92 PROGRAMMING
The G92 Threadcutting command provides the programmer with the capability to define multi-
ple threading passes by specifying only the depth of cut for each pass.
The G92 lead and thread length commands are programmed in the first threadcutting data
block only. Only positions in the X (U) axis (thread pass coordinate) need be programmed in
subsequent blocks. The G92 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another
Group 1 G code.
When cutting a tapered thread, an R word must be programmed in the G92 block.
The following sample programs have been shortened for easier reading.
The sample programs shown were written for a CONQUEST® T42 or T42-L lathe. Refer to
page 1-3 for the correct data word format when using a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision®
lathe.
Example 3: G92 Straight Threads (Figure 7.3)
(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)
For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and is
ready to have a .0625 lead, single start, 1.00 inch long thread cut on its O.D.
The face of the part extends 3.00 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored in
the Work Shift offset. This causes the face of the part to be set to Z0. All threading passes will
be in the minus Z direction.
The tool nose reference point is 1.25 inches from the turret face in the -X direction and .25
inches in the -Z direction. These dimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under
offset 07 as positive values. The offset is activated by the T0707 command in block N370.
Sample Program
N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N400 X.8367 ;
N350 G97 S500 M13 ; N410 X.8176 ;
N360 M98 P1 ; N420 X.7984 ;
N370 T0707 ; N430 G0 ;
N380 X.951 Z0.25 S1920 ; N440 M98 P1 ;
N390 G92 X.8559 Z-1. F.0625 ; N450 M1 ;
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383" START

POINT
RETURN PATH
.250
.875
LEAD .951
.0625 .7984
.0383
CL
1.000
Z0 TI2582
M-320A 7-5
Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point establishes
the return path after the completion of each threading pass.
Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X.8559),
thread length (Z-.75) and lead (F.0625). In subsequent blocks, N400 through N420, it is only
necessary to program the X coordinate for each pass until the final depth is reached in block
N420.
- NOTE -
A G00 code MUST be on the line after the last threading pass. If the G00 code is
not present, the tool will make two extra passes on the workpiece at the last pro-
grammed thread depth.
Example 4: G92 Tapered Threads (Figure 7.4)
(Constant lead on a part having a tapered diameter.)
O.D. tapered threads are programmed as a Negative R word in the G92 block to define the
amount of taper. I.D. tapered threads are programmed with Positive R words in the G92 block.
For the example shown, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1 degree
47 minute taper and is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start, 1.25 inch long thread turned
on its O.D. The value of the lead F is measured parallel to the Z axis and R is measured parallel
to the X axis because the angle of the taper is less than 45 degrees.
The face of the part extends 2.25 inches from the face of the spindle. This value is stored in
Work Shift offset as Z-2.2500. Storing the part length as a Work Shift offset causes the face of
the part to be set to Z0. All threadcutting passes will be in the minus Z direction.
Sample Program
N7 (T0707 1.5 - 14 TAPER THREAD) ; N410 X1.4314 ;
N350 G97 S1000 M13 ; N420 X1.4086 ;
N360 M98 P1 ; N430 X1.3857 ;
N370 T0707 ; N440 G0 ;
N380 X1.614 Z.2857 S1680 ; N450 M98 P1 ;
N390 G92 X1.4771 Z-1.25 F.071429 R-.0478 ; N460 M1 ;
N400 X1.4543 ;
Single Depth of Thread= .8 x Lead = .0571" START

Angle B = 1° 47’ POINT
Taper (R) = .0478"
LEAD
.071429
.2857
1.500
.0478 1.614
.0571
B
1.4044
CL
1.25
TI2583
Z0
Figure 7.4 - Sample G92 Taper Threading Program
7-6 M-320A
The tool tip is located on the turret centerline and extends 1.25 inches from the turret face.
The tool dimensions are stored in the Tool Offset (Geometry) file under offset number 07.
Note that the start point, block N380, must be outside the thread O.D. as this point establishes
the return path after completion of each threading pass.
Block N390 establishes the threading mode, the X coordinate for the first pass (X1.4771),
thread length (Z-1.25), lead (F.071429), and amount of taper (R-.0478). In subsequent blocks,
N400 through N440, it is only necessary to program the X coordinate for each pass until the final
thread depth is reached in block N440. Notice that the sign of R must be minus to cause the
threading tool to move in the plus X direction.
See “R Word” in Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle (G76), Page 7-11.
If the angle of taper “B” is less than or equal to 45 degrees, the value of F is measured
parallel to the Z axis. If the angle of taper is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel to
the X axis.
PLUNGE INFEED THREADING

A plunge infeed is used in the threading example shown in Figure 7.1 . During a plunge
infeed, Figure 7.5, the tool moves along the X axis from the start point for the threading cycle to
the start point for the current threading pass. Infeed is at 90 degrees relative to the spindle
centerline. The next block contains the threading G Code (G32) which synchronizes axis motion
with spindle rotation. When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins at the com-
manded per revolution feedrate. As illustrated in Figure 7.5, an equal amount of material is
removed by each edge of the tool.
START
POINT
1
2
3
4
TI1611
Figure 7.5 - Plunge Infeed
M-320A 7-7
COMPOUND INFEED THREADING
When machining a material that presents threading difficulties due to its toughness or when
cutting a coarse thread of extreme depth, it is often desirable to infeed the tool so that the
leading edge of the tool cuts the major portion of the material. This reduces deformation of the
tool nose due to pressure and heat, thus adding to the tool life. To accomplish this, the X and Z
axis position of the tool at the start point of each pass is altered to produce the desired infeed
angle, as shown in Figure 7.6 . This is known as Compound Infeed.
When using compound infeed, the Z axis start point is shifted by an amount determined by
the X axis shift (∆X) and the desired angle of the compound infeed. In Figure 7.7, the infeed
angle, designated θ, is at 25 degrees relative to the face of the part.
The incremental shift in the Z axis start point for each pass (∆Z) is calculated with the follow-
ing equation (Refer to Figure 7.7):
∆Z = ∆X x Tan θ
During a compound infeed thread, Figure 7.6, the tool moves on the X axis from threading
cycle start point to the start point for the current threading pass. After the threading pass, the tool
moves along the return path to the next Z axis start position, which is equal to the previous Z
axis start point minus ∆Z.
When the spindle is properly oriented, axis motion begins. With a compound infeed, the Z axis
position of the tool, at the start of each cut, is closer to the part face than it was on the previous
pass. The result of this is that the majority of all metal removal takes place along the leading
edge of the tool with the trailing edge making a slight clean-up cut.
Thread Cycle Start Point

Tool Return Path
First Pass
Second Pass
Third Pass
Fourth Pass
TIA1612
Figure 7.6 - Compound Infeed
7-8 M-320A
Figure 7.7 illustrates how the incremental shift in the Z start position for the compound infeed
is calculated for each threading pass.
Where:
X1 = X Axis Position for the 1st Pass.
X2 = X Axis Position for the 2nd Pass.
X3 = X Axis Position for the 3rd Pass.
X4 = X Axis Position for the 4th Pass.
θ = Infeed Angle
Z1 = Initial Z Axis Start Point
Z2 = Z1 - ∆Z
Z3 = X2 - ∆Z
Z4 = Z3 - ∆Z
Z1
Z2
Z3
∆X
Z4
X1
X2
X3
X4
∆Z
CL
TIA1613
Figure 7.7 - Z Start Position for Compound Infeed
M-320A 7-9
The following program segment has been taken from Example 1 and modified to incorporate
compound infeed (Refer to Figure 7.1):
N7 (T0707 7/8 - 16 THREAD) ; N450 X.951 ;
N350 G97 S1920 M13 ; N460 G0 Z.2411 ;
N360 M98 P1 ; N470 G1 X.8176 F50. ;
N370 T0707 ; N480 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;
N380 X.951 Z.25 ; N490 X.951 ;
N390 G1 X.8559 F50. ; N500 G0 Z.2366 ;
N400 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N510 G1 X.7984 F50. ;
N410 X.951 ; N520 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ;
N420 G0 Z.2455 ; N530 G1 X.951 ;
N430 G1 X.8367 F50. ; N540 M98 P1 ;
N440 G32 Z-1. F.0625 ; N550 M1 ;
CALCULATIONS
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0383 (Radius Value)
Number of Threading Passes = 4
θ (Infeed Angle)= 25°
Incremental Change in Depth per Pass (∆X) = .009575 (Radius Value)
.01915 (Diameter Value)
Incremental Change in Z (∆Z) = ∆X (Radius Value) x Tan 25°
= .009575 x .46631
= .004465
Coordinate Values for each Threading Pass
X1 = .875 - .01915 = .85585
X2 = .85585 - .01915 = .83670
X3 = .83670 - .01915 = .81755
X4 = .81755 - .01915 = .79840
Z1 = .25000
Z2 = Z1 - .004465 = .24554
Z3 = X2 - .004465 = .24107
Z4 = Z3 - .004465 = .23661
7-10 M-320A
AUTOMATIC MULTIPLE REPETITIVE THREADING CYCLE (G76)
The G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle provides the programmer with the capability of
defining a complete threading operation with two blocks of information. The control interprets the
data in these two blocks and generates the multiple passes required to cut an entire thread.
This automatic threading cycle can be used for cutting straight or tapered threads of constant
lead in either Absolute or Incremental mode. The thread may be either external or internal.
Plunge (X axis) or compound (X and Z axis) infeed can be performed.
Specification of the threading cycle parameters is achieved by using the G76 preparatory
command and its associated parameters as follows:
BLOCK FORMAT
Inch Programming:
G76 P6 Q4 R0.4 ;
G76 X(U)±2.4 Z(W)±2.4 R±1.4 P4 Q4 F1.6 ;
Metric Programming:
G76 P6 Q3 R1.3 ;
G76 X(U)±3.3 Z(W)±3.3 R±2.3 P3 Q3 F3.4 ;
Inch Programming:
G76 P6 Q5 R0.5 ;
G76 X(U)±2.5 Z(W)±2.5 R±1.5 P5 Q5 F1.6 ;
Metric Programming:
G76 P6 Q4 R1.4 ;
G76 X(U)±3.4 Z(W)±3.4 R±2.4 P4 Q4 F3.4 ;
- NOTE -
Decimal point programming cannot be used when programming the P or Q words
in a G76 Multiple Repetitive Threading Cycle.
With leading zero suppression, the decimal point is not programmed. Leading zeros can be
omitted, but all trailing zeros must be programmed.
Example:
The format for the P word in the execution line on a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision
lathe is P5 for Inch mode and P4 for metric mode.
The format for the Q word in the execution line on a CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision
lathe is Q5 for Inch mode and Q4 for metric mode.
The numbers indicate the number of places to the right of the assumed decimal point.
The control counts from right to left, inserts the decimal point the number of places from
the right as set by the format. Leading zeros will be automatically inserted when required.
M-320A 7-11
EXAMPLE 5: G76 STRAIGHT THREADS (Figure 7.8)
(Constant lead on a part having a uniform diameter.)
For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required diameter and is
ready to have a .125 lead, single start thread, 1.75 inches long cut on its O.D. The thread is to
be cut in ten passes on a CONQUEST® T42 Lathe.
Sample Program for Figure 7.8
N4 (T0404 1.5 - 8 THREAD) ;
N200 G97 S500 M13 ;
N210 M98 P1 ;
N220 T0404 ;
N230 X1.6534 Z.5 S960 ;
N240 G76 P011055 Q0015 R.0004 ;
N250 G76 X1.3466 Z-1.75 P0767 Q0242 F.125 ;
N260 M98 P1 ;
N270 M1 ;
Single Depth of Thread= .61343 x Lead = .0767 START

POINT
X1.6534 Z.500
P Word
.0767
F.125
Z-1.75 Q Word
.0242 X1.3466
1.50
CL
Z0 TI2580
7-12 M-320A
EXAMPLE 6: G76 TAPERED THREADS (Figure 7.9)
(Constant lead on a tapered part)
For this example, it is assumed that the part has been turned to the required 1° 47′ taper and
is ready to have a .071429 lead, single start thread, 1.25 inch long thread cut on its O.D.
N9 (T0909 1.5 - 14 Taper Thread) ;
N100 G97 S1000 M13 ;
N110 M98 P1 ;
N120 T0909 ;
N130 X1.614 Z.2857 S1100 ;
N140 G76 P011055 Q0015 R.0004 ;
N150 G76 X1.3857 Z-1.25 P0571 Q0120 R-.0478 F.071429 ;
N160 M98 P1 ;
N170 M1 ;
START POINT
F
TOOL TIP
ANGLE
Q
P
ANGLE “B”
R
Z
Z
START
CL
O.D. = 1.750
Angle “B” = 1° 47’ Length of Thread = 1.25
Thread Lead “F” = .071429 Start Point Coordinates = X = 1.614
Single Depth of Tapered Thread “P” = .8 x Lead = .0571 Z = .2857
First Pass Depth = .012 Note: All Dimensions are in Inches.
TI2581
Figure 7.9 - Sample G76 Tapered Thread Program
M-320A 7-13
G76 PARAMETERS (Figures 7.8 and 7.9)
P Word (First G76 Block)

The number of finishing passes is specified by parameter 723 and has a valid range from
1 to 99. This parameter is set by the first two digits in the P word located in the first line of
the G76 programming blocks.
The thread chamfer (anticipated pullout) amount is specified by parameter 109 and has a
valid range from 00 to 99. This range allows the programmer to specify a chamfer amount
from 0.0 times the thread lead to 9.9 times the thread lead. This parameter is set by the
second two digits in the P word located in the first line of the G76 programming blocks. A
setting of 00 will pull straight out of the part. A setting of 10 will have an anticipated pullout
of one lead.
The tool nose angle is specified by parameter 724 and can be set to 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, or
80 degrees. This parameter is set by the last two digits in the P word located in the first
line of the G76 programming blocks. A 0 setting will give a plunge feed.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P word.
The P word in the first G76 block has a data word format of P6 .
Q Word (First G76 Block)

Parameter 725 specifies the minimum depth of cut for a threading pass and is set by this
data word.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q word.
The Q word in the first G76 block has the following data word format:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe Q4 Q3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Q5 Q4
R Word (First G76 Block)

Parameter 726 specifies the finish pass allowance per side and is set by this data word.
For the examples shown in Figures 7.8 and 7.9, R.0004 will leave .0004 inches per side
for the clean-up pass.
7-14 M-320A
G76 EXECUTION LINE
P Word (Second G76 Block)

Specifies the single depth of the thread and is always positive. It is measured parallel to
the X axis. The P Word value for an American National Thread is calculated as follows:
Single Depth of Thread = .61343 ÷ Number of Threads per Inch
See Figure 7.8 for its definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9 when cutting
a tapered thread.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P data word.
The P word in the second G76 block has the following data word format:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe P4 P3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe P5 P4
Q Word (Second G76 Block)

Specifies the cutting depth of the first pass and is always positive. It is measured parallel
to the X axis.
See Figure 7.8, for its definition when cutting a straight thread and Figure 7.9, when cutting
a tapered thread. This value is calculated by dividing the Single Depth of Thread by the
square root of the number of threading passes to be taken.
Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the Q data word.
The Q word in the second G76 block has the following data word format:
Data Word Formats

Lathe
Model Metric Mode
Inch Mode (G20)
(G21)
CONQUEST T42 and T42-L Lathe Q4 Q3
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathe Q5 Q4
F Word (Second G76 Block)

Specifies the thread lead and is always positive. It is measured parallel to the Z axis for
straight threads. It is measured parallel to the Z axis for tapered threads when the angle of
the workpiece centerline is equal to or less than, 45 degrees. If the angle of taper with the
workpiece centerline is greater than 45 degrees, it is measured parallel to the X axis.
M-320A 7-15
X Word (Second G76 Block)
For a straight external thread the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter of the thread.
For a straight internal thread the X word specifies the O.D. (Major Diameter) of the thread.
When cutting tapered threads, the X word specifies the root (Minor) diameter at the large
end of the external thread or O.D. (Major) diameter at the small end for an internal thread.
The sign will be positive for cutting on the back side of the spindle centerline (+X).
Z Word (Second G76 Block)

In Absolute programming mode the Z word specifies the Absolute Z coordinate at the end
of the thread. Unless the face of the part has been set to Z Zero by a Work Shift offset, Z
will be relative to the spindle face. When a Work Shift is used, Z will be relative to the face
of the part. The sign of Z will be positive when measured from the spindle face and
negative when measured from the face of the part.
R Word (Second G76 Block)

The R word is only programmed when tapered threads are to be produced. When it is
programmed, the R word must be in the second G76 block.
The R word specifies the amount of taper in a tapered thread and is measured parallel to
the X axis. It is calculated as follows:
R = W * TAN B
(* = Multiplication)
(B = Angle of taper with workpiece centerline)
The R word may be programmed as R0 (zero) or omitted when cutting a straight thread.
When cutting a tapered thread, length W must include the additional travel required for the
start point on the Z axis. When cutting a tapered thread in the +X direction, as shown in
the example, R must have a NEGATIVE (-) value. If the minus sign is not used, R is
assumed to be positive and the taper will be cut in the -X direction or opposite the direc-
tion shown. The same rule applies to internal threads cut on the +X side of the spindle
centerline. A conventional pipe thread would require a NEGATIVE “R” for O.D. threading
and a POSITIVE “R” value for I.D. threading.
G76 PROGRAMMING NOTES
1. After the initial pass, the control automatically calculates the depth of cut based on a
constant volume removal of material. The minimum cutting depth is controlled by pa-
rameter 725. This parameter is controlled by the Q word in the first G76 block.
2. During the return path the control defaults to rapid traverse. If a slower rate is desired
use the Rapid Override switch.
3. For precision threadcutting, the feedrate should be lead limited to 120 inches per minute.
4. The number of clean-up passes is set by parameter 723. This parameter is controlled by
the first two digits in the P word in the first G76 block. As shipped from Hardinge Broth-
ers, Inc., this parameter is set at 1. It may be set from 1 to 99 passes.
5. The Reset button is active during the threading pass. The Feedrate 1 Override switch is
disabled during a G76 Automatic Threading Cycle unless it is set to 0%. When the
Feedrate 1 Override switch is set to 0%, axis motion will stop.
7-16 M-320A
VARIABLE LEAD THREADCUTTING [Option]
The Variable Lead Threadcutting feature enables the programmer to cut straight or tapered
threads having linear increasing or decreasing leads. The G34 code is used to prepare the
control for cutting leads of either type.
The length of thread is determined by the distance command for X and/or Z. Only one axis
need be programmed for a linear thread; both axes must be programmed for a tapered thread.
The initial thread lead is determined by programming an F word. For tapered threads, F is
measured parallel to the Z axis when the angle of taper with the workpiece centerline is equal to
or less than 45 degrees. When the angle is greater than 45 degrees, F is measured parallel to
the X axis.
The rate at which the thread lead increases or decreases is programmed as a K word. This is
the linear increase or decrease per revolution - not the change in lead per inch. It is calculated
from the formula:
K = [Final Lead2 - Initial Lead2] ÷ [2 x Thread Length]
- NOTE -
When solving the preceding formula for threads with decreasing lead, the value of
K will be negative. The minus sign must be programmed for a thread with decreas-
ing lead or the control will assume plus and cut a thread with increasing lead.
The maximum spindle speed that can be programmed when cutting variable lead threads is
determined by the maximum lead from the formula:
Maximum rpm = 120 ipm ÷ Maximum Lead
When cutting a thread with decreasing lead, if the K word is large enough to decrease the
thread lead to zero before the end of the thread is reached, the control will go into a Cycle Stop
and alarm message #14 will be displayed on the control display screen.
The Feedrate 1 Override switch is not active during a threadcutting pass.
The G34 command is modal and remains active until canceled by another Group 1 G code.
The data words have the following format:
Inch Programming: X(U)±2.4, Z(W)±2.4, F1.6, K±1.6
Metric Programming: X(U)±3.3, Z(W)±3.3, F3.4, K±3.4
Inch Programming: X(U)±2.5, Z(W)±2.5, F1.6, K±1.6
Metric Programming: X(U)±3.4, Z(W)±3.4, F3.4, K±3.4
- NOTE -
The optional Threadcutting Cycle Retract feature is NOT active during G34 Variable
Lead Threadcutting.
M-320A 7-17
TAPPING
Use a self-releasing style tap holder with sufficient longitudinal float to allow the spindle to
reverse direction. The Hardinge Model TT-5/8 and TT-3/4 tap holders have a pullout to release
increment of 3/32 inch, which is sufficient.
1. Program a dwell to allow the spindle to reach the programmed speed before the tool
engages the workpiece.
Minimum Dwell = (Previous Spindle Speed - Tapping Spindle Speed) ÷ 1000
2. Use the G32 Preparatory Command.
3. Program the lead command F.001 inch (.0254 mm) per revolution less than the thread
lead where practical.
4. Minimum dwell for holder release is determined as follows:
Minimum Dwell = (Tap Pullout) (60)
(Lead) (rpm)
5. Reverse spindle and feed out at lead (F), a distance Z that is sufficient to clear the
workpiece.
EXAMPLE
Tap a 1/4-20 thread, 1/2 inch deep using a Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder.
Previous spindle speed was 1500 rpm.
Spindle speed is 250 RPM.
Minimum dwell (step 1) for spindle speed change is determined as follows:
Dwell = (1500 - 250) ÷ 1000 = 1.25 seconds
Minimum dwell (step 4) for Hardinge TT-5/8 tap holder is determined as follows:
Dwell = (.094) (60)= .45 sec.
(.05) (250)
(Rounded to nearest tenth of a second equals .5).
7-18 M-320A
SAMPLE PROGRAM SEGMENT
- CAUTION -
During set up, the operator must activate AUTO mode before line 190 is read
by the control. SINGLE mode (block-by-block) execution should not be used
for spindle reversal (M04). Tap breakage or thread damage will occur. It is
suggested that the operator activate AUTO mode after completion of line 150.
Assume that the part length has been stored as a Work Zero Offset and that tool offset
dimensions have been stored in Tool Offset (Geometry) file.
- NOTE -
Hole was drilled to a depth greater than the depth of the tapped thread.
Operator Message ⇒ N5 (T0505 1/4-20 Tap) ;

Spindle Forward 250 RPM, Coolant ON ⇒ N120 G97 S250 M13 ;
Call Safe Start/End Program O1 ⇒ N130 M98 P1 ;
Select Tool and Tool Offset ⇒ N140 T0505 ;
Approach ⇒ N150 X0. Z0.5 ;
Dwell for 1.25 Sec. for Spindle Speed Change N160 G4 X1.25 ;
Tap ⇒ N170 G32 Z-0.5 F0.049 ;
Dwell .5 Sec. ⇒ N180 G4 X0.5 ;
Spindle Reverse, Coolant ON ⇒ N190 M14 ;
Clear Workpiece by .50 Inch ⇒ N200 G32 Z0.5 F0.05;
Call Safe Start/End Program O1 ⇒ N210 M98 P1 ;
Optional Stop ⇒ N220 M1 ;
LEFT-HAND THREADS
If left-hand threads are to be cut from right to left (-Z direction, tool path toward the spindle
face), the spindle must be run in the reverse (M04) direction. This will require the tool to be
mounted cut side up on the turret top plate.
If left-hand threads are to be cut from left to right (+Z direction, tool path toward the part face),
the spindle must be running in the forward (M03) direction. This will require the threading tool tip
to be mounted upside down on the turret top plate. When this method is used, a relief of .25
inches [6.35 mm] or four times the thread lead, whichever is greater, is required to ensure that
lead error does not occur. This clearance is necessary to allow the CNC control to synchronize
spindle and axis motion and also to prevent ringing of the first thread.
M-320A 7-19
- NOTES -
7-20 M-320A
CHAPTER 8 - BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION

The Blueprint Programming feature allows the programmer to define the part contour by speci-
fying the end point values along with the desired angle. The intersection points of the straight
lines are input as coordinate values or a coordinate value and an angle.
Straight lines can be directly connected to form sharp, chamfered, or rounded corners. It is
only necessary to specify the size of the chamfer or corner radius and the CNC control performs
the required calculations. The respective end point coordinates can be programmed using abso-
lute or incremental positioning data.
Linear Interpolation (G01) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are executed.
ANGLE DEFINITION
- NOTE -
A comma must precede an A (angle) command.
Angles are defined by referencing the part contour to a zero reference angle. Refer to Figure
8.1 . The data word format for angle definition (A Words) is 3.4 . The decimal point MUST be
programmed.
Minimum Input Value: .0001 degrees
Maximum Input Value: 359.9999 degrees
+90°
30° A30.
0° 180°
Workpiece
Positive
Z Axis
0° 180°
Negative
Workpiece A-30.
0° 180°
-90° 30°
TI1692
Figure 8.1 - Angle Definition
M-320A 8-1
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
Eight basic examples of blueprint programming are illustrated in Figures 8.2 through 8.17 .
The lines of programming which accompany each of these examples illustrate the programming
format used for blueprint programming.
These basic examples may be combined to form a wide variety of programming variations.
- NOTE -
The numerical values shown in the following examples are not coordinate values.
They serve only as part of the coordinate designation to help distinguish between
the various “X”, “Z”, “,A”, “,C”, and “,R” values.
Example 1: TWO POINTS

(Refer to Figures 8.2 and 8.3)
N____ X2 ,A____ ;
or
N____ Z2 ,A____ ;
This basic two point definition allows the programmer to specify a linear move by either pro-
gramming an X and an A word or programming a Z and an A word.
The CNC control moves the tool nose reference point from the start point at the prescribed
angle until the appropriate position register is equal to the programmed coordinate value.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.687 ;
X2. ,A28. ;
+X +X
X2.
(End Point)
Z?
X2, Z2
A 28°
X.4 Z0.
X1, Z1 Z-.687
(Start Point)
+Z +Z
TI1836 TI1836
Figure 8.2 - Linear Move Between Two Figure 8.3 - Sample Program Segment
Points
8-2 M-320A
Example 2: THREE POINTS
N____ ,A1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;
This basic three point definition allows the programmer to specify two consecutive linear
moves.
The first linear move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the angle of
the first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle.
The second linear move is programmed with an X, Z, and an A word (A2). The X and Z values
specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the angle of the second
linear move in relation to the zero reference angle.
Based on the data programmed in the blueprint programming blocks, the CNC control calcu-
lates the intersection point of the two linear moves. The tool nose reference point is moved from
the start point at the prescribed angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the calculated
intersection point. The control then moves the tool nose reference point from the calculated
intersection point to the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.6 ;
,A20. ;
X2. Z-1.8 ,A43. ;
+X +X
(End Point)
X3, Z3 X2. Z-1.8
43°
A2
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 20° X.4 Z0.
X1 , Z 1 Z-.6
(Start Point)
+Z +Z
TI1837 TI1837
Figure 8.4 - Linear Moves Between Three Figure 8.5 - Sample Program Segment
Points
M-320A 8-3
Example 3: THREE POINTS WITH A RADIUS
This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a radius
automatically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming are
illustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves.
The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed end
points for the second linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with the X2 and Z2 data words. These data words
specify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is pro-
grammed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3 and Z3 data words. The X and Z coordi-
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move.
lates the insertion of the programmed radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the
start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool
nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the tool
nose reference point through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and performs a
linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3 coordinates.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.5 ;
,A25. ,R.1 ;
X2.4 Z-1.8 ,A60. ;
+X X3, Z3 +X
(End Point) X2.4 Z-1.8
60°
A2
R .1R
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 25° X.4 Z0.
X1, Z1 Z-.5
(Start Point)
+Z +Z
TI1838 TI1838
Figure 8.6 - Radius Inserted Between Two Figure 8.7 - Sample Program Segment
Linear Moves (Using Method #2)
8-4 M-320A
METHOD #2:
N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;
The first straight line move is programmed with an A word (A1). This A word specifies the
angle of the first straight line move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is
programmed in the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z
coordinate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the
angle.
lates the intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed
radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until
the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves
the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the programmed radius and per-
forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3, and A2.
Example 4: THREE POINTS WITH A CHAMFER
(Refer to Figure 8.8 and 8.9)
This three point definition allows the programmer to specify two linear moves with a chamfer
automatically inserted at the intersection of the two moves. Two methods of programming are
illustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for both linear moves.
The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move and programmed end
points along with an angle definition for the second linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ;
specify the intersection point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is pro-
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move.
lates the insertion of the programmed chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the
nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves the
tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the programmed chamfer and then
performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3 and Z3
coordinates.
M-320A 8-5
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.5 ;
,A18. ,C.125 ;
X2.3 Z-1.9 ,A65. ;
+X (End Point) +X
X3, Z3 X2.3 Z-1.9
A2 65°
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 18° X.4 Z0.

C X1, Z1 .125 Z-.5
(Start Point) +Z +Z
TI1839 TI1839
Figure 8.8 - Chamfer Inserted Between Figure 8.9 - Sample Program Segment
Two Linear Moves (Using Method #2)
METHOD #2:
N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ;
the first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in
the same data block as the first linear move.
The second linear move is programmed with the X3, Z3, and A2 data words. The X and Z
coordinate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The A word specifies the
angle.
lates the intersection point of the two linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed
chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until
the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the programmed chamfer
and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X3, Z3,
and A2.
8-6 M-320A
Example 5: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO RADII
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radius
automatically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming are
illustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linear
moves. The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and end
point data for the second linear move, and programmed end points for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,R2 ;
N____ Z4 ;
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (,R2) is programmed in
the same data block as the second linear move.
The third linear move is programmed with the Z4 data word. The Z coordinate value specifies
the end point of the third linear move.
lates the insertion of the programmed radii. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start
point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated X2 Z2, until the tool nose
reference point reaches the point where the first radius is to begin. The control moves the tool
nose reference point through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and then
performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the second programmed
radius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the
Z4 coordinate.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.5 ;
,A20. ,R.2 ;
X2.25 Z-1.8 ,A60. ,R.4 ;
Z-2.3 ;
+X X3, Z3 +X Z-2.3 X2.25 Z-1.8
Z4
(End Point)
R2 A2 .4R 60°
.2R
R1
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 20° X.4 Z0.
X1, Z1 (Start Point) Z-.5
+Z +Z
TI1840 TI1840
Figure 8.10 - Two Radii Inserted Between Figure 8.11 - Sample Program Segment
M-320A 8-7
METHOD #2:
N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R2 ;
N____ Z4 ;
the first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed in
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The angle definition for the second
linear move (A2) supplies the CNC control with the information required to calculate the intersec-
tion point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R2) is programmed in the same data
block as the second linear move.
lates the intersection points of the three linear moves as well as the insertion of the programmed
radii. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle until the
tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The control moves the
tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the first programmed radius and then
performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the second radius is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the second programmed
radius and then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the
Z4 coordinate.
8-8 M-320A
Example 6: FOUR POINTS WITH TWO CHAMFERS
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamfer
automatically inserted at each of the two intersection points. Two methods of programming are
illustrated in this example. The first method uses programmed end points for all three linear
moves. The second method uses an angle definition for the first linear move, angle and end
point data for the second linear move, and programmed end points for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,C1;
N____ X3 Z3 ,C2;
N____ X4 Z4;
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (,C2) is programmed in
The third linear move is programmed with the X4 and Z4 data words. The X and Z coordinate
values specify the end point of the third linear move.
lates the insertion of the programmed chamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved from the
nose reference point reaches the point where the first chamfer is to begin. The control moves
the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and then performs
a linear move to arrive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The control moves the
tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the second chamfer and then performs
a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4 coordinates.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.5 ;
,A20. ,C.07 ;
+X +X X2.3 Z-1.75 ,A63. ,C.156 ;
.156 X2.4 Z-2.2 ;
C2
X4, Z4 X3, Z3 X2.4 X2.3 Z-1.75
(End Z-2.2
Point) 63°
A2
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 20° X.4 Z0.

C1 X1, Z1 (Start Point) .07 Z-.5
+Z +Z
TI1841 TI1841
Figure 8.12 - Chamfers Inserted Between Figure 8.13 - Sample Program Segment
M-320A 8-9
METHOD #2:
N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C2 ;
N____ X4 Z4 ;
tion point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C2) is programmed in the same
data block as the second linear move.
chamfers. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed angle
until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the first chamfer and then
performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the second chamfer is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the second chamfer and
then performs a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the X4 and Z4
coordinates.
8-10 M-320A
Example 7: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE RADIUS AND CHAMFER
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a radius
automatically inserted at the first intersection point and a chamfer automatically inserted at the
second intersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The first
method uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses an
angle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move,
and a programmed end point for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,R1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,C1 ;
N____ Z4 ;
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in
lates the insertion of the programmed radius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point is
moved from the start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated
X2Z2, until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The
control moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then
performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves
the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs a
linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.5 ;
,A22. ,R.25 ;
+X +X X2.5 Z-2.03 ,A60. ,C.2 ;
Z-2.5 ;
C .2
X3, Z3 X2.5 Z-2.03
Z4 Z-2.5
(End
Point) 60°
A2
R .25R
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 22° X.4 Z0.
X1, Z1 (Start Point) Z-.5
+Z +Z
TI1842 TI1842
Figure 8.14 - Radius and Chamfer Figure 8.15 - Sample Program Segment
Inserted Between Moves (Using Method #2)
M-320A 8-11
METHOD #2:
N____ ,A1 ,R1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,C1 ;
N____ Z4 ;
the first linear move in relation to the zero reference angle. The radius (,R1) is programmed in
tion point of the first and second linear moves. The chamfer (,C1) is programmed in the same
data block as the second linear move.
radius and chamfer. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed
angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the radius is to begin. The
control moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then
performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the chamfer is to begin. The control moves
the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and then performs a
linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
8-12 M-320A
Example 8: FOUR POINTS WITH ONE CHAMFER AND RADIUS
This four point definition allows the programmer to specify three linear moves with a chamfer
automatically inserted at the first intersection point and a radius automatically inserted at the
second intersection point. Two methods of programming are illustrated in this example. The first
method uses programmed end points for all three linear moves. The second method uses an
angle definition for the first linear move, angle and end point data for the second linear move,
and a programmed end point for the third linear move.
METHOD #1:
N____ X2 Z2 ,C1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,R1 ;
N____ Z4 ;
nate values specify the end point of the second linear move. The radius (,R1) is programmed in
lates the insertion of the programmed chamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point is
moved from the start point, designated X1 Z1, toward the programmed end point, designated
X2Z2, until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The
control moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and
then performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then per-
forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
X.4 Z0. ;
Z-.5 ;
+X +X ,A17. ,C.09 ;
X2. Z-1.5 ,A56. ,R.25 ;
Z4 X3, Z3 Z-2.1 X2. Z-1.5 Z-2.1 ;
(End Point)
R A2 .25R 56°
X2, Z2 X? Z?
A1 17° X.4 Z0.

C X1, Z1 (Start Point) .09 Z-.5
+Z +Z
TI1843 TI1843
Figure 8.16 - Chamfer and Radius Figure 8.17 - Sample Program Segment
Inserted Between Moves (Using Method #2)
M-320A 8-13
METHOD #2:
N____ ,A1 ,C1 ;
N____ X3 Z3 ,A2 ,R1 ;
N____ Z4 ;
tion point of the first and second linear moves. The radius (,R1) is programmed in the same data
block as the second linear move.
chamfer and radius. The tool nose reference point is moved from the start point at the prescribed
angle until the tool nose reference point reaches the point where the chamfer is to begin. The
control moves the tool nose reference point in the proper direction to create the chamfer and
then performs a linear move to arrive at the point where the radius is to begin. The control
moves the tool nose reference point through the proper arc to create the radius and then per-
forms a linear move to arrive at the programmed endpoint, as defined by the Z4 coordinate.
8-14 M-320A
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING SAMPLE PROGRAM
This sample program is written using the original method for defining angles. Refer to “Defin-
ing Angles”, Page 8-1.
.0625 Chamfer .0625 Chamfer
.06 Radius
.125 Radius .125 Radius
1.000 1.000
.500
50° 50°
.250 .250
1.625
TI1774
Figure 8.18 - Finished Workpiece for Sample Program
N1 (Finish Face and Turn R.015 Q3) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G97 S1000 M13 ; Main Spindle Forward 1000 RPM/Coolant ON
M98 P1 ; Call Safe Start Program O1
T0101 ; Index to Station 1 and Select Tool Offset 1
X-0.031 Z0.2 ; Move Tool to Activate Tool Offset
G50 S4000 ; Constant Surface Speed 4000 RPM Limit
G96 S370 ; Establish Constant Surface Speed, 370 Surface Feet per Minute
G1 G42 X-0.03 Z.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G99 Z0. F.004 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece
X1. ,R0.06 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Insert a .06 Radius
Z-0.25 ,C0.0625 ; Cut to Z-.25, Insert a .0625 Chamfer
X0.5 ,A230. ,R0.125 ; Cut to a .5 inch diameter at an angle of 230 degrees,
Insert a .125 Radius
,A180. ,R.125 ; Cut at 180 degree angle, Insert a .125 radius
X1. Z-1.375 ,A130. ,C0.0625 ; Cut to a 1 inch Diameter, Cut to Z-1.375, Cut at an angle
of 130 degrees, Insert a .0625 Chamfer
Z-1.625 ; Cut to Z-1.625
X1.09 ; Clear workpiece by three times the tool nose diameter.
M98 P1 ; Call O.D. Safe End Program O1
M01 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 8-15
BLUEPRINT PROGRAMMING NOTES
1. A comma must precede an A (angle), C (chamfer) or R (radius) command.
2. When a chamfer in inserted, the chamfer will be equal on both sides of the lines inter-
sected.
3. When a radius in inserted, the radius must be tangentially blended between the two
moves. If a non-tangential radius is required, program the radius using a G02/G03 code.
4. When programming either an insert chamfer or radius, the intersection point must be
programmed.
5. The value of the chamfer or radius is always positive and it is to be programmed at the
end of the first linear move.
6. When defining angles, the decimal point MUST be programmed.
7. G01 (Linear Interpolation) must be active while blueprint programming blocks are exe-
cuted.
8-16 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 8-17
- NOTES -
8-18 M-320A
CHAPTER 9 - MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED

Constant Surface Speed programming provides the capability of programming the speed of
the workpiece with respect to the tool tip directly in surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20)
or surface meters per minute in metric mode (G21).
Constant Surface Speed programming is a function of the spindle speed range and the pro-
grammed constant surface speed (S word). Constant Surface Speed mode is selected by the
G96 command and is canceled by G97. The G97 command is the start-up mode and selects the
direct RPM mode, which allows direct RPM programming of the spindle speed.
Before programming a G96 command, a block containing a G50 command and an S word to
establish the maximum RPM limit for the following Constant Surface Speed operation MUST be
programmed. The format for the S word is S4 . As the distance between the tool tip and the
spindle centerline varies during a Constant Surface Speed operation, the variable spindle speed
is compared to this maximum RPM limit. If the limit is reached, the control will continue execution
of the part program at the spindle speed limit.
- CAUTION -
When establishing the Constant Surface Speed spindle RPM limit, do not pro-
gram any other data words in the same block with the G50 command and the
S word.
In Constant Surface Speed mode, the constant surface speed command to the spindle is also
programmed as an S word. The format is S4 in inch mode (G20) and S3 in metric mode (G21).
The units are surface feet per minute in inch mode (G20) and surface meters per minute in
metric mode (G21).
A feedrate must also be programmed. The control will then automatically adjust the spindle
speed within its range to maintain a constant surface speed as the cutting radius of the work-
piece varies. Since the feedrate is held constant while the spindle speed varies, it is recom-
mended that the feedrate be programmed in Inches per Revolution (G99). This will prevent
overloading the tool in case a fast feedrate is active when the spindle speed is decreasing (as
when facing from the center outward).
Figure 9.1 illustrates an elementary part that uses Constant Surface Speed programming. For
this example, it is assumed that the part has already been roughed out and is ready to be finish
contoured.
Since all dimensions are in inches, G20 is entered in block N10. This assures the correct
format in case the previously executed program was in metric data input mode (G21).
The face of the part extends 2.93 inches from the face of the spindle. The part face is set to Z
Zero by the G10 command in block N20. All turning passes will, therefore, be in the NEGATIVE
Z direction. X Zero is at the spindle centerline.
The tool tip extends 1.25 inches from the turret reference point in the X direction and 2.25
inches from the turret reference point in the Z direction. These dimensions will be compensated
for by the tool offsets activated in block N50.
M-320A 9-1
A maximum spindle speed of 4000 RPM for the operation is established in block N70.
Block N80 establishes Constant Surface Speed mode and a surface speed of 500 surface
feet per minute.
The Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) is established in block N90 along with a feedrate of
Sample Program: 2.90
N10 G20 ; 1.50

N20 G10 P0 Z-2.90 ; .40 .50
1.25
N30 G97 S1000 M13 ; .75
N40 M98 P1 ;
.50 .030 (FACE OFF)
N50 T0707 ;
N60 X1.14 Z.1 ;
N70 G50 S4000 ;
N80 G96 S500 ;
N90 G1 G99 Z0. F.007 ; 4.00
N100 X0. ;
3.00
N110 X1. ;
N120 X2. Z-.5 ;
2.00
N130 Z-.7 ;
N140 X3. Z-1.2 ; 1.00
N150 Z-1.5 ; C
L
N160 X4.1 ; SPINDLE CHUCK
N170 M98 P1 ; FACE FACE
TI2444
N180 M1 ;
N190 M30 ; Figure 9.1 - Constant Surface Speed Example
A spindle speed MUST be active when entering Constant Surface Speed mode or a Cycle
Stop condition will be created when the first block following the Constant Surface Speed com-
mand is encountered.
The Spindle Increase and Decrease push buttons, Feedrate Override switch, and Rapid Over-
ride switch are active in Constant Surface Speed mode.
9-2 M-320A
SUBPROGRAMS
The subprogram feature provides the main part program with the capability of calling fre-
quently repeated patterns from memory, and executing them a specified number of times. The
subprogram is called from a special block in the main part program. The subprogram must be in
memory, when called.
Subprogram Format:
O____; Subprogram Name
N____; Program Block
N____; .
N____; .
N____; .
M99; Return to calling program
Subprograms stored in memory must be identified by the letter “O” followed by program
number in the first data block. See “Program Number”, Page 1-6.
The last data block of the subprogram MUST contain an M99 command. This command
should be in a block by itself.
Subprograms may be stored from the Manual Data Input keyboard, from a separate tape or
floppy disk, or from the tape or floppy disk containing the main part program.
MANUAL DATA INPUT KEYBOARD ENTRY
The method for entering subprograms from the Manual Data Input keyboard is the same as
for main part programs. Be sure that the first data block contains the subprogram number in the
correct format and that the subprogram ends with an M99 command.
1. Press the Edit push button.
2. Turn the Program Protect key OFF.
3. Press the Program key.
4. Key in the letter “O” and the subprogram number and press the Insert key.
5. Press the EOB (;) key and press the Insert key.
- NOTE -
Up to 34 characters can be entered into the data input buffer before the Insert key
must be pressed.
6. Enter each data block, followed by an End of Block (;) character. Press the Insert key to
input the data.
7. After the entire subprogram has been entered, press the Reset key.
8. Turn the Program Protect key ON.
TAPE OR FLOPPY DISK ENTRY
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 Operator’s Manual (M-321) for information on entering subpro-
grams into memory from a tape or diskette.
M-320A 9-3
SUBPROGRAM CALL
Subprograms are activated by a special “call” block in the main part program which must have
the following format:
M98 Paaabbbb ;
Where: M98 is the miscellaneous command to activate the subprogram call function.
P is the letter address used to specify the number of times the subprogram is to be
performed and the subprogram number.
“aaa” specifies the number of times the subprogram is to be performed. The subpro-
gram may be performed up to 999 times. IF NO VALUE IS ENTERED, THE SUB-
PROGRAM IS PERFORMED ONCE.
“bbbb” specifies number of the subprogram to be executed.
Sample Program Line #1:
M98 P50100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed five times.)
M98 P100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed one time.)
M98 P9990100 ; (Subprogram O0100 will be executed 999 times.)
- NOTE -
When the subprogram is to be executed just once, use the format shown in sample
program line #2. As shown, leading zeros may be omitted from the subprogram
number when this format is used.
9-4 M-320A
SAFE START SUBPROGRAMS
At the heart of the Hardinge structured programming format are the safe start subprograms.
These subprograms are used to reactivate start-up modes, for example; positioning mode, deac-
tivate Tool Nose Radius Compensation, establish in/min [mm/min] feed, and move the turret to
the safe index position.
The subprograms are as follows:
INCH MODE
O1 ; SAFE START & O.D. END SUBPROGRAM
N1 G00 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation and
RPM Limit, IPM Feed.
N2 M98 P999 ; Call Subprogram: Safe Index
N3 M99 ; Return to Calling Program
O2 ; SAFE I.D. END SUBPROGRAM

N1 G00 G97 G98 Z.4 ; Positioning Mode, RPM Limit, Z Pullback, IPM Feed.
N2 G40 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation
O999 ; SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM

N1 T0 ; Clear Active Tool Offset and Turret Station
N2 X_____ Z_____ ; X and Z Safe Index Position
- CAUTION -
If the machine is to be run in metric mode, the Z entry (pullback) in subpro-
gram O2 MUST be converted to a metric value.
Safe start subprograms 1 and 2 are to be loaded permanently into the control memory. They
are designed for machine safety and to help simplify programming. Subprogram 999 is used to
deactivate the tool offset and command the safe index coordinates desired for the job.
The X safe index value should be equal to the X axis Machine Home position. Refer to
Appendix One for information on the X axis Machine Home position.
The Z safe index value should be equal to the LONGEST TOOL on the turret PLUS 1 INCH.
O1 Safe Start & O.D. End Subprogram
The command “M98 P1" is used at the start of every operation and at the end of every
O.D. operation. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and that the turret is in a
safe position before indexing.
O2 Safe I.D. End Subprogram
The command “M98 P2" is used at the end of every I.D. operation. This sets the proper G
codes and returns the turret to a safe position before indexing.
O999
The X and Z safe index coordinates to be used by subprograms O1 and O2.
M-320A 9-5
HARDINGE PERMANENT MACRO PROGRAMS
Hardinge permanent macro programs are assigned 9000 series program numbers. These per-
manent macro programs cannot be edited. As with other macro programs, the permanent mac-
ros are called as follows:
G65 Pxxxx y ;
Where:
G65 = Macro call command
P = Required format letter
xxxx = Macro program number
y = Macro variable(s), if required
; = End of Block character
MACRO 9112: SAFE TOOL OFFSET
- CAUTION -
This macro program resets ALL tool offset registers. Any tool offsets already
entered will be lost.
- NOTE -
Macro 9112 is designed to work on machines set for DIAMETER operation ONLY.
This macro must be executed from a program. Otherwise, an indefinite loop is produced and
the control will hang itself up executing the cycle indefinitely. It is recommended that the follow-
ing program be loaded into the control memory, to be executed as needed:
Sample Program: O8999 :
G65 P9112 ;
M30 ;
G65 P9112 is interpreted as follows:
G65 = Macro call command
P = Required format letter
9112 = Macro program number
; = End of Block character
To ensure safe machine operation, this macro program has been developed to reset the
machine coordinate system offsets in the following manner:
1. All Tool Wear Offset registers are set to zero.
2. All R (Radius) and T (Quadrant) Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to zero.
3. All X Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 8.5000 (English mode) or 215.900 (Metric
mode).
4. All Z Tool Geometry Offset registers are set to 9.0000 (English mode) or 228.600 (Metric
mode).
MACRO 9136: DEEP HOLE DRILLING
An explanation of Macro 9136 is presented in Chapter 6, “Machining Cycles”.
9-6 M-320A
TAILSTOCK PROGRAMMING
TAILSTOCK TRAVERSE RATES
There are two rates of tailstock motion:
1. The rapid traverse rate, which is approximately 300 in/min [7620 mm/min].
2. The adjustable feedrate, which is set by the machine operator.
TAILSTOCK POSITIONING
M84 - Tailstock Forward

M84 commands the tailstock to move in the -Z direction to the forward position. The machine
operator establishes the forward position by locating the rapid-to-feed limit switch dog as
needed. The tailstock will move toward the forward position at rapid traverse rate until the rapid-
to-feed limit switch is contacted. At that point, the tailstock will feed against the workpiece at a
feedrate set by the machine operator.
M85 - Tailstock Retract
M85 commands the tailstock to move in the +Z direction at the rapid traverse rate to the first
home position encountered.
M86 - Tailstock Home
M86 commands the tailstock to move in the +Z direction to the home position at the rapid
traverse rate. The tailstock home position is referenced from the spindle face and is NOT adjust-
able. Refer to Appendix One for illustrations showing the tailstock travel limits.
On CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Super-Precision® machines the tailstock home position
is approximately 17.50 inches [444.5 mm] from the spindle face.
On CONQUEST T42-L machines the tailstock home position is approximately 27.50
inches [698.5 mm] from the spindle face.
TAILSTOCK PROGRAMMING RECOMMENDATIONS
Hardinge makes the following recommendations in regard to programming tailstock motion
and positioning:
1. DO NOT program tailstock M codes in part programs that do not require tailstock sup-
port. For maximum safety, the operator’s manual for CONQUEST® T42 series machines
(M-321A) instructs the machine operator to deactivate the tailstock feature when running
part programs that do not require the tailstock.
2. Program an M85 (Tailstock Retract) or M86 (Tailstock Home) at the beginning of every
part program that requires the use of the tailstock to be sure that the tailstock is in a safe
and known position. The M85 or M86 command should be programmed in a block by
itself immediately before the first block containing an operator message.
3. Program an M84 (Tailstock Forward) at the beginning of each tool operation that re-
quires the tailstock to ensure that the tailstock is positioned against the workpiece. Pro-
grammed tailstock motion may be stopped by the machine operator for a variety of
reasons. Therefore, the tailstock may not always be positioned where the programmer
assumes it will be at the beginning of an operation.
M-320A 9-7
ENGLISH/METRIC MODE
One of the Setting pages is used to establish whether the GE Fanuc 18T control is to power-
up and operate in English mode or Metric mode. This section outlines the procedure for selecting
the desired operating mode.
Through the use of the G20 (Inch Mode) and G21 (Metric Mode) commands, it is possible to
operate in either mode regardless of which mode has been selected on the Setting page. How-
ever, the use of these two G codes will not automatically adjust the position registers to display
the position values in the proper units (inches vs millimeters).
- CAUTION -
Part programs should usually be written in the same format as selected on
the Setting page. Programs not written in the same format as established on
the Setting page MUST contain the appropriate English/Metric G code,
G20/G21 respectively. When required, this G code must be programmed by
itself in the first data block.
- NOTE -
When the operating mode is changed through the Setting page, the work shift and
tool offsets are automatically changed to the appropriate units.
ESTABLISHING ENGLISH/METRIC MODE
2. Press the Setting soft key.
3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page that contains the Input Unit
field.
4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Input Unit field.
5. Press Manual Data Input push button.
6. Key in the appropriate number (0:MM 1:INCH).
7. Press the Input key.
8. Press the Control OFF push button.
9. Wait a few seconds; then, press the Control ON push button. The machine will power up
in the desired operating mode.
9-8 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 9-9
- NOTES -
9-10 M-320A
CHAPTER 10 - TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT [Option]
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION
The basic concept of Tool Life Management is that after a specific number of parts or a
specific amount of machining time, the control will automatically begin using another tool in place
of the current tool being used for a particular operation.
Tools are assigned to specific groups, as designated by the programmer. The control will
monitor the measurement value assigned to each tool group and automatically switch to the next
tool in the group when the counter for that tool group reaches the measurement value specified
by the programmer.
TOOL LIFE MEASUREMENT UNITS

Tool life can be measured using one of the two following methods:
1. Number of parts (machined by the tool)
2. Amount of machining time (on the tool)
Only one of these methods may be used at a time. “Number of parts” will be the active
measurement unit when the machine is shipped from the factory. Refer to “Determining the
Measurement Unit”, page 10-5, for information on verifying or switching the active measurement
unit.
An alarm message will be displayed when any tool group has reached its programmed tool life
and an “M30" (End of Program) is read by the control. At that point, the machine operator will
replace the tooling and reset the counter relating to the affected tool group. Refer to ”Resetting a
Tool Group Counter", page 10-6.
Number of Parts
When this type of measurement is used, the control will increment the tool group counter for
the active tool each time the tool group is called by the part program.
Amount of Machining Time
When this type of measurement is used, the control will run the tool group counter for the
current tool whenever G01, G02, or G03 is active.
M-320A 10 - 1
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
When using Tool Life Management, tools and offsets are assigned to specific groups. These
groups are established by the programmer through the use of a Tool Life Management program,
which is independent of the part program. The Tool Life Management program will define the
parameters required for Tool Life Management.
The Tool Life Management program defines the following parameters:
1. Group numbers.
2. Tool life value for each group.
3. Tool stations and offsets for each group.
- CAUTION -
When the Tool Life Management program is executed, all Tool Life Manage-
ment counters will be reset to 0 (zero).
When using Tool Life Management, the machine operator MUST load and execute the Tool
Life Management program BEFORE executing the part program for the first time.
Refer to “Programming”, beginning on page 10-7, for information on the Tool Life Manage-
ment program and how to incorporate Tool Life Management information in the part program.
BAR FEED OPERATION

There are no special considerations for running bar jobs. When running a bar job and using
Tool Life Management, the programmer will program an M30 at the end of the part program and
the machine operator will activate Repeat mode to cause the part program to loop.
Repeat mode.
10 - 2 M-320A
OPERATION
- NOTE -
Refer also to “General Information”, beginning on page 10-1.
DETERMINING MAXIMUM GROUPS AND GROUP SIZES

The maximum number of tool groups and maximum number of tools per group are established
by parameter 6800, bits 0 and 1. Be sure that bits 0 and 1 are set to appropriate values to allow
for the necessary number of tool groups and tools per group to be programmed in the Tool Life
Management Program. Refer to “Tool Life Management Program”, beginning on page 10-7, for
more information on the Tool Life Management Program.
The bits in parameter 6800 are numbered as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Set bits 0 and 1 according to the following chart:
Bit 1 Bit 0 Max No. of Groups Max Tools per Group

0 0 16 16
0 1 32 8
1 0 64 4
When the machine is shipped from the factory, the maximum number of groups and maximum
tools per group will be set to 16.
To Verify Maximum Groups and Group Sizes
1. Press the System key.
2. Press the Parameter soft key.
3. Use the Page keys to display the page that contains parameter 6800.
4. Compare bits 0 and 1 to chart above to determine the maximum groups and group
sizes.
To Set Maximum Groups and Group Sizes
3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page that contains the Parameter
Write field.
4. If necessary, use the cursor keys to position the cursor at the Parameter Write field.
5. Press the Manual Data Input push button.
6. Key in the number 1 (one).
M-320A 10 - 3
7. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be enabled.
8. Press the System function key.
10. Use the Page and Cursor keys to position the cursor at parameter 6800.
11. Record the current number in parameter 6800.
12. Key in the entire parameter value with bits 0 and 1 set to the appropriate values.
17. Key in the number 0 (zero).
18. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be disabled.
10 - 4 M-320A
DETERMINING THE MEASUREMENT UNIT
The two types of measurement units available are “Number of Parts” and “Amount of Machin-
ing Time”. To verify which measurement unit is active, it is necessary to view parameter 6800, bit
2. To switch the type of measurement unit to be used with Tool Life Management, it is necessary
to modify parameter 6800, bit 2.
The bits in parameter 6800 are numbered as follows:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
To Verify the Measurement Unit

1. Press the System function key.
3. Use the Page keys to display the page that contains parameter 6800.
If parameter 6800, bit 2 is set to 0, “Number of Parts” is active.
If parameter 6800, bit 2 is set to 1, “Amount of Machining Time” is active.
To Switch the Measurement Unit
1. Press the Offset Setting function key.
3. If necessary, use the Page keys to display the Setting page that contains the Parameter
Write field.
5. Press the Manual Data Input push button.
6. Key in the number 1 (one).
7. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be enabled.
8. Press the System key.
10. Use the Page and Cursor keys to position the cursor at parameter 6800.
11. Record the current number in parameter 6800.
12. Key in the entire parameter value with bit 2 set to the appropriate value.
17. Key in the number 0 (zero).
18. Press the Input key. Parameter editing will be disabled.
M-320A 10 - 5
RESETTING A TOOL GROUP COUNTER
Resetting the control or turning the control OFF will have NO AFFECT on the tool group
counters. When all of the tools in a tool group have reached the tool life specified in the Tool Life
Management program and an M30 “End of Program” is read, the following alarm message will
be displayed:
1503 TOOL GROUP LIFE END
The expired tool groups will be listed near the bottom of the Tool Life Management screen on
the control display screen. The control can display more than one tool group number at a time,
when applicable. Resetting the counter for the expired tool group(s) will clear the alarm and allow
machine operation.
- NOTE -
It is not necessary to change machine modes to reset tool group counters.
Use the following procedure to reset the tool group counter(s):
1. Press the Offset Setting function key.
2. Press the right-hand soft key.
3. Press the Tool Life soft key.
- NOTE -
Each time a cursor control key is pressed, the cursor will move to the next tool
group in the corresponding direction.
4. Use the cursor control keys to move the cursor to the desired tool group.
5. Using the data input keys, enter -9999 and press the Input key. The tool group counter
at the cursor position will be reset to 0 (zero).
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to reset additional tool group counters, as needed.
10 - 6 M-320A
PROGRAMMING
- NOTE -
M30 must be programmed for “End of Program” when using Tool Life Management.
Do not program M02 for “End of Program”.
Refer also to “General Information”, beginning on page 10-1.
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT PROGRAM
Program Format
O____;
N _ _ G10 L3 ;
Define Tool Group 1 N _ _ P1 L _ _ ;
N__T____;
N__T____;
N__T____;
N__T____;
N__T____;
N__T____;
.
.
N _ _ G11 ;
N _ _ M30 ;
Data Word Definitions

O____ = Program Number
N__ = Block Number
G10 = Begin Tool Data Input
L3 = Memory Location for Tool Life Management Data (DO NOT ALTER)
P__ = Tool Group Number
L____ = Tool Life Value Data Word
T____ = Turret Station and Offset Number
G11 = End Tool Data Input
M30 = End of Program
M-320A 10 - 7
P Word - Tool Group Number
The P word is used to specify the group number to be assigned to each group of tooling. The
numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal point programming is not
allowed.
Examples: P1 (Tool Group 1)
P12 (Tool Group 12)
Refer to “Determining Maximum Groups and Group Sizes”, beginning on page 10-3, for infor-
mation on verifying or setting the maximum number of tool groups allowed.
L Word - Tool Life Value Data Word
The L word is used to specify tool life for each tool group in the Tool Life Management
program. The numerical value for the data word must be a whole number. Decimal point pro-
gramming is not allowed.
Examples: L25 (Tool life equals 25)
L200 (Tool Life equals 200)
The following chart shows the minimum and maximum values that may be used with the L
word when programming Tool Life Management.
Measurement Unit Minimum Value Maximum Value

Number of Parts 1 9999
Machining Time (minutes) 1 4300
Refer to “Determining the Measurement Unit”, beginning on page 10-5, for information on
verifying or setting the measurement unit to be used.
T Word - Turret Station and Offset Number
The standard T word format is used when defining turret stations and tool offsets in the Tool
Life Management program.
Refer to Chapter 4 for information on defining turret stations and tool offsets.
10 - 8 M-320A
Sample Tool Life Management Program
In this sample program we will assume that the measurement unit is set to “Number of Parts”.
Refer to “Determining the Measurement Unit”, beginning on page 10-5, for information on verify-
ing or switching the active measurement unit.
O7500 ;
N10 G10 L3 ;
Define Tool Group 1 N20 P1 L10 ;
N30 T0101 ;
N40 T0212 ;
N50 T0313 ;
N70 T0303 ;
N80 T0131 ;
N100 T0919 ;
N110 G11 ;
N120 M30 ;
DATA BLOCK DEFINITIONS

Block N1 contains an operator message.
Block N10 contains the “Begin Tool Data Input” command (G10) and the memory loca-
tion (L3) where the data will be stored.
Block N20 contains the number of the first tool group (Group 1) and the measurement
value for each group 1 tool (value = 10).
Blocks N30 through N50 contain the turret station and tool offset data for the tools as-
signed to group 1.
Block N60 contains the number of the second tool group (Group 2) and the measure-
ment value for each group 2 tool (value = 3).
Blocks N70 and N80 contain the turret station and tool offset data for the tools assigned
to group 2.
Block N90 contains the number of the third tool group (Group 3) and the measurement
value for each group 3 tool (value = 30).
Block N100 contains the turret station and tool offset data for the tool assigned to group
3.
Block N110 contains the “End Tool Data Input” command (G11).
Block N120 contains the “End of Program” command (M30).
M-320A 10 - 9
PART PROGRAM
Tool Commands
Tool stations and offsets were assigned to tool groups in the Tool Life Management program.
Refer to “Tool Life Management Program”, beginning on page 10-7. The tool groups are called
from the part program using the T word. The data word format for the T word is T4 . Decimal
point programming is not allowed.
ACTIVATE A TOOL GROUP
T_ _99 T Word Format (99 activates the specified tool group)
T0199 Activate Tool Group 1
T1299 Activate Tool Group 12
DEACTIVATE A TOOL GROUP
T_ _88 T Word Format (88 deactivates the specified tool group)
T0188 Deactivate Tool Group 1
T1288 Deactivate Tool Group 12
Sample Part Program Structure using Tool Life Management

O1278 ;
G20 or G21 ; Establish English or Metric mode
N _ _ (___________) ; Sequence Search Number and Operator Message
N _ _ G97 S1000 M13 ; 1000 RPM and Direction, Coolant ON
N _ _ M98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start Subprogram
N _ _ T0199 ; Activate Tool Group 1
N__X_Z_; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
N _ _ T0188 ; Deactivate Tool Group 1
N _ _ M98 P1 or P2 ; Call: Safe O.D or I.D. End Subprogram
N _ _ M01 ; Option Stop
N _ _ X_Z_; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
.
.
N _ _ M30 ; End of Program
10 - 10 M-320A
Combining Tool Commands
Some tools may be expected to last the full life of a particular job. In this case it would be
desirable to program the individual tool in the part program, rather than go to the trouble of
assigning the tool to a tool group and defining the tool group life high enough to run for the full
life of the job.
It is possible to combine standard tool commands and Tool Life Management commands in
the same part program. Standard tool commands may be programmed in operations that pre-
cede or follow operations using Tool Life Management commands. The only restriction is that the
active tool or tool group must be canceled before another tool or tool group can be called.
Sample Part Program Structure using Combined Tool Commands
O1278 ;
G20 or G21 ; Establish English or Metric mode
N _ _ T0101 ; Index to Turret Station 1 and Call Offset 1
N__X_Z_; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
N _ _ X_Z_; Move to Activate Tool Offsets
- MACHINE PART -
.
.
N _ _ M30 ; End of Program
PROGRAMMING NOTES
1. Decimal point programming is NOT allowed with the P or L data words.
2. The same turret station and/or tool offset may be assigned to more than one tool group.
3. Turret stations may NOT be assigned to the same tool group more than once, regard-
less of the tool offset to be used.
M-320A 10 - 11
- NOTES -
10 - 12 M-320A
CHAPTER 11 - LIVE TOOLING [Option]
- NOTE -
This chapter is intended for programming live tooling on machines NOT equipped
with the C Axis option. Refer to Chapter 12 for information on programming live
tooling with the C Axis option.
Programming the live tooling is accomplished by means of five special M codes and a B word
in addition to the M codes used for standard machining.
Live tooling is designed to perform machining such as milling, drilling, and tapping on work-
piece locations not parallel or not in line with the spindle centerline.
Live tooling attachments are to be mounted ONLY on odd numbered turret stations. Valid
turret station assignments during live tooling operations on machines equipped with a twelve
station turret top plate are 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11. Valid turret station assignments during live
tooling operations on machines equipped with a ten station turret top plate are 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9.
LIVE TOOLING M CODES

The live tooling M codes command rotational direction and control whether coolant is ON or
OFF. An S word must be programmed with the M word to indicate the live tooling spindle speed.
This S word has a data word format of S4, with a maximum spindle speed of 4000 rpm. Axis
motion may also be programmed in this data block.
M51 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF

M51 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the forward direction
with the coolant turned OFF.
M51 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse direction
M51 cancels M52, M53, M54 and M55.
M52 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant OFF

M52 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse direction
M52 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the forward direction
M52 cancels M51, M53, M54, and M55.
M53 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON

M53 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the forward direction
with the coolant turned ON.
M53 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse direction
M-320A 11-1
M54 Rotational Direction Command/Coolant ON
M54 causes the live tooling in cross-working tool holders to rotate in the reverse direction
M54 causes the live tooling in face-working tool holders to rotate in the forward direction
M55 Stop RPM/Coolant OFF

M55 causes the live tooling to stop rotating and turns the coolant OFF.
DETERMINING ROTATIONAL DIRECTION
Live Tooling spindle direction can be best described in terms of a drill bit or tap. Right-hand
drill bits and taps require a spindle forward command to machine the workpiece. Left-hand drill
bits and taps require a spindle reverse command to machine the workpiece.
B WORD - SPINDLE ORIENT COMMAND

One degree and 2½ degree spindle orient are included as standard features on machines
equipped with the live tooling option. With this feature, the spindle can be oriented in one degree
or 2½ degree increments from 0 degrees to 359 degrees. The one degree spindle orient feature
commands the spindle brake to hold the spindle in position. The significance of the 2½ degree
spindle orient feature is that the spindle will be mechanically locked in position when oriented to
any angle that is a multiple of 2½ degrees.
- CAUTION -
Be sure no tooling is touching the workpiece when spindle orient (B word),
M51, M52, M53, or M54 is executed.
The B word commands the control to orient the spindle in relation to the spindle 0 degree
mark and should be programmed immediately before the live tooling commands. When needed,
the B word may be programmed without a live tooling command following it. The data word
format is B3.1 with a valid range of 0 to 359 in increments of one degree or 2½ degrees.
Examples: B20 orients the spindle at 20 degrees
B39 orients the spindle at 39 degrees
B219 orients the spindle at 219 degrees
- NOTE -
The control interprets 0 degrees and 360 degrees to be the same location.
DETERMINING SPINDLE ORIENTATION

The spindle is oriented to 0 degrees when the spindle drive button is located 45 degrees from
the machine bed and the spindle key is located 90 degrees from the machine bed, as shown in
Figure 11.1 .
11-2 M-320A
DIRECTION OF ORIENTATION
When spindle orient is commanded when the spindle is NOT in motion, the control rotates the
spindle to the programmed angle.
When spindle orient is commanded while the spindle is in motion, the spindle will decelerate
and orient to the programmed angle. Unless spindle motion (M03, M04, M13, or M14) is com-
manded or the Reset key is pressed, subsequent orient commands will cause the spindle to go
“shortest path” to arrive at the commanded angle.
After an M03, M04, M13, or M14 has been commanded or the Reset key has been pressed,
the next spindle orient command read by the control will not go “shortest path” to arrive at the
commanded angle.
PROGRAMMING SPINDLE ORIENT
The B word can be programmed with or without a decimal point. The decimal point is not
required unless a digit is to be programmed to the right of the decimal point. The only values that
may be programmed to the right of the decimal point are “0" or ”5". When a “5" is programmed
to the right of the decimal point, the angle being defined MUST be a multiple of 2½ degrees.
Legal Command: B35 (Spindle will be oriented to 35 degrees)
Legal Command: B17.5 (Spindle will be oriented to 17.5 degrees)
Illegal Command: B17.2 (“2" is an invalid value)
Illegal Command: B18.5 (Not a multiple of 2½ degrees)
The control always indexes the spindle to the absolute angle programmed. That is, it is not
possible to incrementally orient the spindle from any angle other than 0 degrees.
Spindle Orient Sample Program Blocks:
N____ B20 ; Spindle oriented to 20° Turret Top Plate
N____ ; Machining Block Spindle Drive Button
45°
N____ B40 ; Spindle oriented to 40°
Spindle Key
N____ ; Machining Block
Main Spindle
N____ B60 ; Spindle oriented to 60° 90°
Machine Bed
Activating the live tooling with a M51, M52,
M53, or M54 command automatically stops the Rotation
spindle, even if spindle orient (B word) is not pro- M03
grammed. In this case, the spindle will stop at a
random angle.
45°
Floor
TI1777
Figure 11.1 - Spindle Orient Zero

Reference Position
M-320A 11-3
LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMMING FORMAT
Beginning Of Operation:
N___ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
M98 P1 ; Call the Safe Start Subprogram
T____ ; Index to Station and Activate Tool Offset
X____ Z____ B____ ; Move to Activate Tool Offset and Orient Spindle
G97 S____ M53 (or) M54 ; Cutter rpm, Rotational Direction, and Coolant ON
G1 X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Position Tool at Start Point
Machining The Part:

Machine the Part (Inches per Minute Feedrate)
Reorient Spindle, if Required:

X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Move the Tool to a Clear Area
B____ ; Orient the Spindle
End of Operation:
X____ (or) Z____ F____ ; Move the Tool to a Clear Area
M98 P1 ; Call the Safe End Program
M01 ; Optional Stop
DEACTIVATING LIVE TOOLING

- CAUTION -
Be sure the live tooling is not touching the workpiece when the spindle is
reactivated.
There are two methods for deactivating the live tooling:

1. Programming an M55 will deactivate live tooling and coolant. If coolant is required, be
sure to reactivate coolant with an M08, M13, or M14 when standard machining is re-
sumed.
2. Programming a spindle command with a spindle speed will reactivate the spindle and
automatically deactivate live tooling if M51, M52, M53, or M54 is not programmed in the
same data block. In this case it is not necessary to program an M55 command.
LIVE TOOLING PROGRAMMING NOTES

1. Move to enter the tool offset in G00 (rapid) mode. A G01 MUST be programmed on the
next move for inch per minute feedrate.
2. Spindle orient is programmed in absolute degrees from the spindle 0 degree mark.
3. Programming spindle rotation will cancel live tooling commands.
4. Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Hardinge Safe Start subprograms.
11-4 M-320A
2.50
1.60 Typ.
.80
1.25 Typ.
Typ.
90°
7/16 Radius Typ.

1.50 Dia.
#4 Center Drill, .25 Deep

#7 Drill, 9/16 Deep 3 Places, 120° Apart
1/4-20 UNC Tap, 7/16 Deep
3 Places 120° Apart
TI2026
Figure 11.2 - Sample Live Tooling Workpiece
SAMPLE LIVE TOOLING PROGRAM

Turret Tooling Operation Sequence
Station 1 7/8 End Mill . . . . . . 3 Flats (1/8" Depth)
Station 3 #4 Center Drill . . . . 3 Holes (1/4" Depth)
Station 5 #7 Drill . . . . . . . . 3 Holes (9/16" Depth)
Station 7 1/4-20 Tap . . . . . . 3 Holes (7/16" Depth)
Sample Program:
% Stop Code
O1135 ; Letter “O” and Program No.
G20 ; Inch Mode
N1 (T0101 7/8 END MILL) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message
(PROGRAMMED TO TOOL CENTER LINE) ; Operator Message
M98 P1 ; Call: Safe Start Program One
T0101 ; Index to Turret Station #1, Delay Offset
X1.25 Z1. B0 ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 0 Deg.
G97 S2500 M53 ; 2500 rpm, Forward/Coolant ON
G1 Z.5 F50. ; Tool Center to .5 from Part Face
Z-1.1625 F3. ; Mill IN at 3 ipm
X1.6 F50. ; X Axis Clear Move
Z.5 ; Z Axis to Start Point
X1.25 B120 ; X Axis To Start Point, Orient Spindle to 120 Deg.
Z.5 ; Z Axis to Start Point
X1.25 B240 ; X Axis to Start Point, Orient Spindle to 240 Deg.
Z.5 ; Z Axis Clear Move
M98 P1 ; Call: Safe End Program One
M01 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 11-5
N3 (T0303 #4 CENTER DRILL) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message
X1.6 Z.25 B240 ; Move to Enter Offset, Orient Spindle to 240 Deg.
G1 Z-.8 F50. ; Tool to Z Start Point
X.75 F4. ; Cut at 4 ipm
B0 ; Orient Spindle to 0 Deg.
M01 ; Optional Stop
N5 (T0505 #7 DRILL) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message

M01 ; Optional Stop
N7 (T0707 1/4-20 TAP) ; “N” Sequence No. and Message

X.375 F24.9 ; Tap IN rpm
M54 X1.7 F25. ; Reverse, Tap OUT
M53 ; Forward rpm
X.375 F24.9 ; Tap IN
M54 X1.7 F25. ; Reverse rpm, Tap OUT
M53 ; Forward rpm
X.375 F24.9 ; Tap IN
M54 X1.7 F25. ; Reverse rpm, Tap OUT
M01 ; Optional Stop
M30 ; End Program/Rewind
11-6 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 11-7
- NOTES -
11-8 M-320A
CHAPTER 12 - C AXIS PROGRAMMING [Option]
INTRODUCTION
In addition to standard lathe turning operations,
the C axis option provides the programmer with
three distinct machining capabilities: Live Tooling
with Spindle Orient Figure 12.1, Polar Coordinate
Interpolation (face milling operations) Figure 12.2,
and Cylindrical Interpolation (contoured milling on
the outside diameter of the workpiece) Figure C
12.3 . This feature makes it possible to perform
turning and milling operations on one machine.
DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS TI1980
In addition to the data words described in Chap- Figure 12.1 - C Axis Spindle Orient
ter 1, the following data words, G codes, and M
code are used for programming the C axis:
C Word - Absolute position command for C axis.
With polar coordinate interpolation, C C and X Axis Moves
values are linear (inch or millimeter)
units. With spindle orient or cylindrical
interpolation, C values are in degrees.
A decimal point is required with the C
word. X
C
H Word - Incremental position command for C
axis. With Polar Coordinate Interpola-
tion, H values are linear (inch or milli-
meter) units. When using Spindle Ori-
ent or Cylindrical Interpolation, H val- TI1982
ues are in degrees.
Figure 12.2 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation
G17 - Used to specify the X,C plane.
G18 - Used to specify the X,Z plane.
G19 - Used to specify the Z,C plane. C and Z Axis Moves
G107 - Specifies Cylindrical Interpolation. Once
cylindrical interpolation has been acti-
vated, it is only necessary for the pro-
grammer to specify the end point of a
move by a linear Z value in inches or
millimeters, an angular C value in de-
grees and a feedrate. Moves requiring C Z
circular interpolation must be pro-
grammed with the appropriate G02 or
G03 command and an R value for the
TI1981
arc radius.
G112 - Specifies Polar Coordinate Interpola- Figure 12.3 - Cylindrical Interpolation
tion. (Viewed from the back of the machine)
M-320A 12-1
G113 - Cancel Polar Coordinate Interpolation.
M23 - Activate Contouring mode. This command must be programmed in a block preceding
the block calling for C axis.
M24 - Cancel Contouring mode.
C AXIS SPINDLE ORIENT

- NOTE -
The following description applies to CONQUEST® T42 series lathes equipped with the
optional programmable C axis. For lathes equipped with the standard spindle orient
feature, refer to Chapter 11.
Figure 12.4 shows the Zero Reference point for the spindle. The spindle key is located at a 90
degree angle from the machine bed when the spindle is at C0. On machines equipped with the
C axis, spindle orient is commanded using the C word and the desired degree value. Referring
to Figure 12.4, when the spindle is at C0, a command of C20. will cause the spindle to rotate 20
degrees in the reverse (M04) direction and a command of C-20. will cause the spindle to rotate
20 degrees in the forward (M03) direction. Refer to the program format which follows and to the
sample program section beginning on page 12-3.
LIVE TOOLING PROGRAM FORMAT WITH C AXIS
- NOTE -
This format should be used in conjunction with the general program format provided in
Chapter 1.
N _ _ _ _ (____________); Sequence Number and Message
M98 P1; Safe Start Subprogram
T _ _ _ _; Index and Call Offset
X _ _ _ _ Z _ _ _ _ M23; Enter Offset and Activate Contour Mode
G97 S _ _ _ _ M53 (M54); Cutter RPM and Direction
C _ _ _ _; Orient Spindle
MACHINE PART
CLEAR PART
G1 X _ _ _ _ OR Z _ _ _ _ F _ _ _ _; Move Tool to Clear Part
G00 C _ _ _ _; Re-Orient if Needed
G1 X _ _ _ _ OR Z _ _ _ _ F _ _ _ _; Machine Part
END OF OPERATION
X _ _ _ _ OR Z _ _ _ _ F_ _ _ _; Move Tool to Clear Part
M98 P1; O.D. End Subprogram
M01; Operation Stop
12-2 M-320A
Spindle
Key
C0 20°
Spindle Drive Turret Top Plate
Button
C0 45°
Spindle
Key
M04
Rotation
90°
Machine Bed
M03
Spindle C0 -20° Rotation
Key
45°
M03
Rotation
Floor Ti2085
Figure 12.4 - Spindle Orient Zero Reference Angle

(As viewed from the tailstock end of the machine)
- NOTES -
1. C Positive Command will rotate (M04) Reverse Direction.
2. Orient Command (C _ _ _ _) has a 5.3 program format.
3. M23 must be active for C axis commands.
4. H Command is incremental for C axis.
SAMPLE LIVE TOOLING PROGRAM WITH C AXIS
The sample part, shown in Figure 12.5, is to be milled, center drilled, drilled, and tapped on
the outside diameter. In this example, the C axis is used for spindle orientation only. All tools are
touched off at center point.
TURRET TOOLING OPERATION SEQUENCE
Station 2 7/8 End Mill . . . . . . . 3 Flats (1/8" Depth)
Station 4 #4 Center Drill . . . . . . 3 Holes (1/4" Depth)
Station 6 #7 Drill . . . . . . . . . . 3 Holes (9/16" Depth)
Station 8 1/4-20 Tap . . . . . . . . 3 Holes (7/16" Depth)
LIVE TOOLING CODES

M23 C Axis Mode
M51 Forward RPM
M52 Reverse RPM
M53 Forward RPM / Coolant ON
M54 Reverse RPM / Coolant ON
M55 Stop RPM
* Face working tools will rotate in Opposite Direction *
M-320A 12-3
2.50
1.60
Typ.
.80 .125 Typ.
Typ. 90°
7/16 Rad.
Typ. 1.50 Dia.
#4 Center Drill, .25 Deep 3 Flats 120° Apart

#7 Drill, 9/16 Deep
1/4-20 UNC Tap, 7/16 Deep
Note: All dimensions are in inches. 3 Places 120° Apart
TI2026
Figure 12.5 - Sample Live Tooling Workpiece
PROGRAM
% STOP CODE
O1004; PROGRAM NUMBER
G20; INCH MODE
N2 (7/8 END MILL); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGE
M98 P1; SAFE START SUBPROGRAM
T0202; INDEX, CALL OFFSET
X 1.25 Z.537 M23; RAPID TO START, CONTOUR MODE
G97 S2500 M53; 2500 FORWARD CUTTER RPM
C0.; ORIENT TO 0 DEGREES
G1 Z-1.1625 F3.; MILL IN AT 3 IPM
X1.6 F20.; X AXIS CLEAR
G00 Z.537 C120.; RAPID TO START, ORIENT 120 DEG.
X1.25; X AXIS TO START
G00 Z.537 C240.; RAPID TO START, ORIENT 120 DEG.
X1.25; X AXIS TO START
M98 P1; OD END SUBPROGRAM
M01; OPERATION STOP
N4 (#4 CENTER DRILL); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGE

X1.6 Z-.8 M23; RAPID TO START, CONTOUR MODE
G97 S3500 M53; 3500 FORWARD DRILL RPM
C240.; ORIENT TO 240 DEG.
G1 X.75 F4.; DRILL IN AT 4 IPM
G00 X1.6; RAPID X AXIS CLEAR
12-4 M-320A
M01; OPERATION STOP
N6 (#7 DRILL, 9/16 DP); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGE

G97 S1500 M53; 1500 FORWARD DRILL RPM
M01; OPERATION STOP
N8 (1/4-20 TAP); SEQUENCE NO. & MESSAGE

G97 S500 M53; 500 FORWARD RPM
M49; DISABLE FEED OVERRIDE
G1 X.375 F24.9; TAP IN
X1.7 M54 F25.; REVERSE, TAP OUT
M53; FORWARD RPM
G00 C120.; ORIENT TO 120 DEG.
G1 X.375 F24.9; TAP IN
M53; FORWARD RPM
G00 C240.; ORIENT TO 240 DEG.
G1 X.375 F24.9; TAP IN
M48; ENABLE FEED OVERRIDE
M01; OPERATION STOP
M30; END PROGRAM, REWIND
% STOP CODE
- NOTE -
G00 Mode is used for C axis orientation to ensure the orient is done at a rapid rate. If
G1 mode is active, spindle feed rate is interpreted as degrees.
- CAUTION -
Be sure G1 mode is activated for cutting moves.
M-320A 12-5
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
Polar Coordinate Interpolation is used when it is desired to perform milling operations on the
face of the workpiece that require synchronous movement of the spindle and the live tooling
mounted on the turret. When Polar Coordinate Interpolation is commanded by the G112 com-
mand, the control interprets several pieces of data to determine the direction and speed that the
axes must be moved to reach the commanded end point.
Sample programs 2 through 6 show examples of how polar coordinate interpolation is used.
Refer also to the guidelines on page 12-7 and to the program format on page 12-8.
COORDINATE SYSTEM
Figure 12.6 shows the coordinate system used with polar coordinate interpolation. The pro-
grammed end points are laid out as coordinates on this plane. Note the signs for X and C. The
program examples illustrate the use of this system.
- NOTE -
A C- command will cause the spindle to turn in the forward (M03) direction and a C+
command will cause the spindle to rotate in the reverse (M04) direction.
X+
C-
C0
C+
Z+
X- TI1987
Figure 12.6 - Polar Coordinate System

(Viewed from the front of the machine)
12-6 M-320A
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION GUIDELINES
1. The following G codes may be used when G112 is active: G01, G02, G03, G40, G41,
G42, G65, and G98. Refer to Chapter 1 for descriptions of these G codes.
2. G00 positioning is not allowed when G112 is active.
3. When using circular interpolation, G02 or G03, the arc radius is specified using the R
word.
4. M23 Contouring mode must be activated before commanding the C axis. Refer to the
Polar Coordinate Format on page 12-8.
5. The spindle should be oriented to 0° (zero degrees) before commanding polar coordinate
interpolation. Refer to the Polar Coordinate Format on page 12-8.
6. If machining in the X axis only (Normal Live Tooling Command), do not activate polar
coordinate interpolation G112 Command for X and C axis.
7. With G112 active, the tool cannot be programmed to pass over the center of the work-
piece.
8. The H word is used to program incremental C axis moves.
9. Z axis moves are made independently of polar coordinate interpolation.
10. The unit of command for the C axis, when polar coordinate interpolation is used, is
inches or millimeters, not degrees.
11. When using cutter compensation during polar coordinate Interpolation, the same basic
Tool Nose Radius Compensation rules apply as with normal lathe programming. How-
ever, the following rules must also be observed:
a) The tool radius and the quadrant must be loaded into the tool geometry offset file.
For polar coordinate interpolation, the X tool offset represents the center of the cutter
and the tool tip location (Quadrant) will be 9.
b) The Tool Nose Radius Compensation start up block (G41 or G42 line) must be pro-
grammed after the polar interpolation command (G112 line) has been activated. This
Tool Nose Radius Compensation block should contain an X and Z axis air move. For
polar coordinate interpolation, the X axis move must be equal to at least two times
the tool radius entered in the offset file.
c) Program the G40 (Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cancel) command before the
block containing the G113 (Cancel Polar Coordinate interpolation).
12. Program restart and block restart are not allowed when G112 polar coordinate interpola-
tion is active.
13. Specify the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.
14. X values are diameters and C values are radii.
M-320A 12-7
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
- NOTE -
Chapter 1.
N _ _ _ _ ( ); Sequence Number and Message
T_ _ _ _; Index and Call Offset
X_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ M23; Enter Offset and Activate Contour Mode
G97 S_ _ _ _ M53 (M54); Cutter RPM and Direction
C0.; Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees
G1 G112; Activate Polar Coordinate Interpolation
C _ _ _ _ F50.; Reorient Before Tool Nose Radius
Compensation (if desired)
ACTIVATE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G41 (G42) X_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ F50.; Enter Tool Nose Radius Compensation Non-Cutting
Air Move
MACHINE PART
CLEAR PART
X_ _ _ _ or Z_ _ _ _ F_ _; Move to Clear Part
G40 U1.; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G113; Cancel Polar Coordinate Interpolation
END OF OPERATION
M01; Operation Stop
12-8 M-320A
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
USED WITH G112 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION
Figure 12.7 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes used
with polar coordinate interpolation. The shaded area of each drawing represents the finished part
contour.
C0 C0
4 1 1 4
X0
3 2 2 3
G41 Part Right (Cutter Left) G42 Part Left (Cutter Right)
G02 Clockwise Arc G03 Counterclockwise Arc
M03 Forward Rotation M04 Reverse Rotation
C0 C0
4 1 1 4
X0
3 2 2 3
G42 Part Left (Cutter Right) G41 Part Right (Cutter Left)
M03 Forward Rotation M04 Reverse Rotation
TI2086
Figure 12.7 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation

and Circular Interpolation Codes
(Used with G112 Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
M-320A 12-9
PROGRAM EXAMPLES
- NOTE -
Before the programs can be written, it must be determined where the end point coordi-
nates are on the system. Figure 12.8 shows the end point positions required to write the
program for Example 2.
Although the tool cannot actually move around the part, for programming purposes, it is
easier to imagine that this is what is taking place.
Tool Nose Radius Compensation is used in all of the polar coordinate examples shown
in this chapter. When entering the tool orientation code for milling tools, use 0 or 9.
C0
X.750
C0
X.750 X.750
C.375 C-.375
X0
X-.750 X-.750
C.375 C-.375
TI2024
Figure 12.8 - End Point Cutter Positions

(Tool Nose Radius Compensation Active)
12-10 M-320A
1.375 .200
START START
POINT 1 POINT 2
.750
NOTE: Dimensions are in inches.

TI2018
Figure 12.9 - Programming Example 2 - Square

(Polar Coordinate Interpolation)
Example 2 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Square:
Figure 12.9 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which a .750 inch by .200 inch
deep square is to be milled. In this example, the diameter of the milling tool is .50 inches
Program:
(START POINT 1) (START POINT 2)
(START CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT C-.375)
N2 (MILL 3/4 SQ R.25 Q9); N2 (MILL 3/4 SQ R.25 Q9);

M98 P1; M98 P1;
T0202; T0202;
X1.4 Z.2 M23; X1.4 Z.2 M23;
G97 S900 M54; G97 S900 M54;
C0.; C0.;
G1 G112; G1 G112;
G41 X.75 Z.1 F50.; C-.375 F100.;
Z-.2 F3.; G41 X.75 Z.1 F50.;
C-.375; Z-.2 F3.;
X-.75; X-.75;
C.375; C.375;
X.75; X.75;
C0.; C-.375;
Z.2 F20.; Z.2 F20.;
G40 U1.; G40 U1.;
G113; G113;
M98 P1; M98 P1;
M01; M01;
M-320A 12-11
1.375 .250
1.1908
NOTE: All dimensions are inches.

.6875
TI2020
Figure 12.10 - Programming Example 3 - Hexagon

Example 3 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Hexagon:
Figure 12.10 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which a hexagon is to be ma-
chined. The hexagon measures 1.1908 inches across the flats and the width of the flats is .6875
inches. The diameter of the cutter is .25 inches.
Program:
(REVERSE SPINDLE DIRECTION) (FORWARD SPINDLE DIRECTION)
N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9); N4 (MILL HEX R.125 Q9);

M98 P1; M98 P1;
T0404; T0404;
X1.5 Z.2 M23; X1.5 Z.2 M23;
G97 S750 M54; G97 S750 M54;
C0.; C0.;
G1 G112; G1 G112;
G42 X1.1908 Z.1 F50.; G41 X1.1908 Z.1 F50.;
Z-.25 F3.5; Z-.25 F3.5;
C.3437; C-.3437;
X0 C.6875; X0 C-.6875;
X-1.1908 C.3437; X-1.1908 C-.3437;
C-.3437; C.3437;
X0 C-.6875; X0 C.6875;
X1.1908 C-.3437; X1.1908 C.3437;
C0.; C0.;
Z.2 F20.; Z.2 F20.;
G40 U1.; G40 U1.;
G113; G113;
M98 P1; M98 P1;
M01; M01;
12-12 M-320A
1.375 .125
.4871
.2435
.8438
TI2019
Figure 12.11 - Programming Example 4 - Triangle

Example 4 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Triangle:
Figure 12.11 shows a 1.375 inch piece of stock that is to have an equilateral triangle with
.8438 inch sides machined on it. The diameter of the cutter is .50 inches.
Program:
(FEED INTO PART FACE) (FEED ONTO PART O.D.)
N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9); N6 (MILL TRIANGLE R.25 Q9);

M98 P1; M98 P1;
T0606; T0606;
X1.5 Z.2 M23; X1.75 Z0 M23;
G97 S650 M54; G97 S650 M54;
C0.; C0.;
G1 G112; G1 G112;
G41 X.9742 Z.1 F50.; G41 X1.2 Z-.125 F50.;
Z-.125 F2.5; X.9742 F2.5;
X-.487 C-.4219; X-.487 C-.4219;
C.4219; C.4219;
X.9742 C0.; X.9742 C0.;
Z.2 F20.; Z.2 F20.;
G40 U1.; G40 U1.;
G113; G113;
M98 P1; M98 P1;
M01; M01;
M-320A 12-13
1.125 .156
START START
POINT 1 POINT 2
.625

TI2017
Figure 12.12 - Programming Example 5 - Tongue

Example 5 - Polar Coordinate Interpolation - Tongue
Figure 12.12 shows a 1.125 inch piece of stock on which a tongue .625 inch is to be ma-
chined. The cutter diameter is .75 inches.
Program:
(START POINT 1) (START POINT 2)
(Start CUT AT C0) (START CUT AT C-.5825)
N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9); N2 (5/8 TONGUE R.375 Q9);

M98 P1; M98 P1;
T0202; T0202;
X2. Z.2 M23; X2. Z.2 M23;
G97 S700 M54; G97 S700 M54;
C0.; C0.;
G1 G112; G1 G112;
G41 X.625 Z-.1 F50.; C-.5825 F100.;
Z-.156 F3.; G41 X-.625 Z-.156 F50.;
C-.5825; Z-.156 F.3;
X-.625 F20. (AIR MOVE); C.5825;
C.5825 F3.; X.625 F20.;
X.625 F20., (AIR MOVE); C-.5825;
C0. F3.; Z.1 F20.;
Z.1 F20.; G40 U1.;
G40 U1.; G113;
G113; M98 P1;
M98 P1; M01;
M01;
12-14 M-320A
1.375 .200
1.00 Rad.

TI2021
Figure 12.13 - Programming Example 6 - Radius Diamond

Example 6 - Polar Interpolation - Radius Diamond:
Figure 12.13 shows a 1.375 inch diameter piece of stock on which four 1.00 inch radii are to
be cut to form a diamond shaped pattern. Cutter diameter is .50 inches.
Program:
(FORWARD SPINDLE) (REVERSE SPINDLE)
N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9); N6 (MILL DIAMOND R.25 Q9);
M98 P1; M98 P1;
T0606; T0606;
X2. Z.2 M23; X2. Z.2 M23;
G97 S800 M54; G97 S800 M54;
C0.; C0.;
G1 G112; G1 G112;
G41 X1.375 Z.1 F50.; G42 X1.375 Z.1 F50.;
Z-.2 F3.5; Z-.2 F3.5;
G3 X0 C-.6875 R1.; G2 X0 C.6875 R1.;
G3 X-1.375 C0. R1.; G2 X-1.375 C0. R1.;
G3 X0 C.6875 R1.; G2 X0 C-.6875 R1.;
G3 X1.375 C0. R1.; G2 X1.375 C0. R1.;
G1 Z.2 F20.; G1 Z.2 F20.;
G40 U1.; G40 U1.;
G113; G113;
M98 P1; M98 P1;
M01; M01;
M-320A 12-15
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
Cylindrical Interpolation (G107) is used to perform contoured milling operations on the outside
diameter (O.D.) of the workpiece. The Z and C words are used to specify the end points of the
moves. When using cylindrical interpolation, the C word is programmed in degrees. The C word
is also used to specify the radius of the part in the G107 block which activates cylindrical interpo-
lation. The X word is used to program the depth of cut. Refer to Figure 12.14 for the coordinate
system used with cylindrical interpolation.
LIVE TOOLING CODES USED FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
M51 Forward RPM
M52 Reverse RPM
M53 Forward RPM/Coolant ON
M54 Reverse RPM/Coolant ON
M55 Stop RPM
* Face working tools will rotate in Opposite Direction *
- NOTE -
G19 remains active after cylindrical interpolation is canceled. G18 must be programmed
to specify the X,Z plane for machining. Add G18 to the first line of safe start/end subpro-
gram O1, as shown below:
O1 ; Safe Start & O.D. End Subprogram
N1 G00 G18 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Activate X,Z Plane, Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation,
Direct RPM, IPM Feed
+X
C-
C0
C+
+Z
-X
TI1987
Figure 12.14 - Coordinate System for

Cylindrical Interpolation
12-16 M-320A
PROGRAM FORMAT FOR CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
- NOTE -
Chapter 1.
N _ _ _ _( ); Sequence Number and Message
T_ _ _ _; Index and Call Offset
X_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ M23; Enter Offset and Activate Contour Mode
G97 S _ _ _ _ M53 (M54); Cutter RPM and Direction
G19 C0.; Orient Spindle to 0 Degrees
G1 G107 C (Part Radius); Activate Cylindrical Interpolation and Part Radius
C _ _ _ _ F50.; Reorient Before Tool Nose Radius
Compensation (if desired)
ACTIVATE TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION

G41 (G42) X_ _ _ _ Z_ _ _ _ F50.; Enter Tool Nose Radius Compensation,
Non-Cutting Air Move
MACHINE PART
CLEAR PART
X_ _ _ _ or Z_ _ _ _ F50; Move to Clear Part
G40 U1.; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G107 C0.; Cancel Cylindrical Mode
END OPERATION
M01; Operation Stop
M-320A 12-17
CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION GUIDELINES
1. The following G codes may be used when G107 is active: G01, G02, G03, G40, G41,
G42, G65, and G98. Refer to Chapter 1 for descriptions of these G codes.
2. G00 positioning is not allowed when G107 is active.
3. When using circular interpolation, G02 or G03, the arc radius is specified using the R
word.
4. M23 Contouring mode must be activated before commanding the C axis. Refer to “Pro-
gram Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-17.
5. The spindle should be oriented to 0° (zero degrees) before commanding cylindrical inter-
polation. Refer to “Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-17. The
formula for calculating the value of the C word is shown in Figures 12.16, 12.17, and
12.18 .
6. If machining in the X axis only (Normal Live Tooling Command), do not activate polar
coordinate interpolation G112 Command for X and C axis.
7. The H word is used to program incremental C axis moves.
8. The unit of command for the C axis, when cylindrical interpolation is used, is degrees,
not inches or millimeters.
9. When using cutter compensation with cylindrical Interpolation, the same basic Tool Nose
Radius Compensation rules apply as with normal lathe programming. However, the fol-
lowing rules must also be observed:
a) The tool radius and the quadrant must be loaded into the tool geometry offset file.
For cylindrical interpolation, the Z tool offset represents the center of the cutter and
the tool tip location (Quadrant) will be 9.
b) The Tool Nose Radius Compensation start up block (G41 or G42 line) must be pro-
grammed after the cylindrical interpolation command (G107 line) has been activated.
Refer to “Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation”, on page 12-17. This Tool
Nose Radius Compensation block should contain an X and Z axis air move. For
cylindrical interpolation, the Z axis move must be equal to at least the tool radius
amount entered in the offset file.
c) Program the G40 (Tool Nose Radius Compensation Cancel) command before the
block containing the G107 C0 command (Cancel Cylindrical Interpolation). Refer to
“Program Format for Cylindrical Interpolation” on page 12-17.
10. Program restart and block restart are not allowed when G107 cylindrical interpolation is
active.
11. Specify the feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute.
12. Add G18 to the first line of safe start/end subprogram O1 to ensure that the X,Z plane is
active for standard machining.
12-18 M-320A
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION AND CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION
USED WITH G107 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION
Figure 12.15 shows the combinations of tool nose radius and circular interpolation codes used
with cylindrical interpolation. The part circumference is viewed laying flat with the part face (Z0)
at the base.
Z0 Z0
C AXIS C AXIS
Z0 PART FACE Z0 PART FACE
G41 Part Right (Cutter Left) G42 Part Left (Cutter Right)
Z0 Z0
C AXIS C AXIS
Z0 PART FACE Z0 PART FACE
G42 Part Left (Cutter Right) G41 Part Right (Cutter Left)
TI2087
Figure 12.15 - Tool Nose Radius Compensation

and Circular Interpolation
(Used with G107 Cylindrical Interpolation)
M-320A 12-19
Note: All dimensions are in inches. Circumference = 1.4 * π = 4.3982 inches
Degree = INCH * 360
CIRCUMFERENCE
= .1875 * 360
4.3982
= 15.34
Z0 1.094 π = 3.1416
.500
.375
.100
Z-.994
.094R .194
Z-.750
.200
Z-.500
1.400
C0 C-15.34 C-30.69
(-.1875 inch) (-.375 inch)
TI1985
Figure 12.16 - Example 7 - Lettering On Part O.D.

(Cylindrical Interpolation)
Program:
N2 (Sharp Tool .025 Depth); C0. F3.;
M98 P1; Z-.85;
T0202; G2 Z-.85 C-15.34 R.094;
X1.6 Z-.5 M23; G1 Z-.750;
G97 S850 M53; Z-.85 F5.;
G19 C0.; G2 Z-.85 C-30.69 R.094 F3.;
G1 G107 C.7; G1 Z-.75;
X1.35 F4.5; X1.5 F20.;
C-15.34 F3.; Z-.994;
Z-.7; X1.35 F4.5;
C-30.69; Z-1.094 F3.;
X1.5 F20.; X1.5 F20.;
C0.; C0.;
X1.35 F4.5; X1.35 F4.5;
C-15.34 F3.; Z-.994 F3.;
Z-.5; Z-1.044 F5.;
C-30.69; C-30.69 F3.;
X1.5 F20.; X1.5 F20.;
Z-.750 G107 C0.;
X1.35 F4.5; M98 P1;
M01;
12-20 M-320A
Note: All dimensions are in inches.
Z0 1.300
.700
.375
1.500
C0° C -28.64° (- .375 inch)
Circumference = 1.5 * π = 4.7124 inches Z-1.300

Degree = INCH * 360
CIRCUMFERENCE
= .375 * 360
4.7124
= 28.64
π = 3.1416 Z-.700 TI1988
Figure 12.17 - Example 8 - Rectangle Etched on Part O.D.

Program:
N4 (Sharp Tool .020 Depth);
M98 P1;
T0404;
X1.7 Z-.7 M23;
G97 S1500 M53
G19 C0.;
G1 G107 C.750;
X1.46 F3.5;
Z-1.3;
C-28.64
Z-.7;
C0.;
X1.6 F20.;
G107 C0.;
M98 P1;
M01;
M-320A 12-21
Z0 1.625
.750
.500
(4) 1/8" Radius
1.437 C0 C-.5
Circumference = 1.437 * π = 4.5145 inches Z-1.625

Degree = INCH * 360 Tool
CIRCUMFERENCE Path
= .5 * 360 Start .125
Point
4.5145
= 39.87 Z-.750
π = 3.1416 .125 Typical Corner
(9.96°) TI1989
Figure 12.18 - Example 9 - Rectangle with Corner Radii

Program:
N6 (Sharp Tool .02 Depth);
M98 P1;
T0606;
X1.6 Z-.875 M23;
G97 S1200 M53;
G19 C0.;
G1 G107 C.7185;
X1.397 F4.;
Z-1.5 F3.;
G2 Z-1.625 C-9.96 R.125;
G1 C-29.90;
G2 Z-1.5 C-39.87 R.125;
G1 Z-.875;
G2 Z-.750 C-29.90 R.125;
G1 C-9.96;
G2 Z-.875 C0. R.125;
G1 X1.5 F20.;
G107 C0.;
M98 P1;
M01;
12-22 M-320A
2.050
1.750
.750
.3125 .125
Pitch
TI2124
Figure 12.19 - Example 10 - Worm Gear

To calculate the total amount of C in degrees:

(Z travel / pitch) * 360
N2 (1/8" END MILL, 5/16" PITCH);
M98 P1;
T0202;
X.95 Z-.3 M23;
G97 S1200 M53;
G19 C0.;
G1 G107 C.375;
X.5 F4.;
Z-2.05 C-2016. F2.;
X.85 F20.;
G107 C0.;
M98 P1;
M01;
NOTES:
1. C minus command (forward spindle) for right-hand thread.
2. X, Z, and C axis may be programmed together in the same block if the root diameter is
to increase or decrease (tapered thread).
M-320A 12-23
C AXIS ALARMS
- NOTE -
For a complete listing of control error codes, refer to the GE Fanuc 18T Operation
Manual.
Alarm Description
021 An axis not included in selection plane was commanded in circular
interpolation. Cylindrical Interpolation requires G19.
028 In the plane selected, two o more axes in the same direction are
commanded (Format G19 C0;).
041 Overcutting will occur in Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
145 Polar commands G112 and G113 require that Tool Nose Radius
Compensation be inactive (G40 condition).
146 Illegal G code commanded while in Polar Interpolation (G00 is not
allowed).
175 Cylindrical G107 must have C (part radius) at start and C0 at end.
Tool Nose Radius Compensation must be inactive when above com-
mands are read (G40 condition).
176 Illegal G code has been commanded while in Cylindrical Interpolation
(G00 is not allowed).
197 M23 mode must be active for C commands.
212 Blueprint assist (A commands) are allowed only while X,Z plane is
active. Illegal command while in polar or cylindrical.
12-24 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 12-25
- NOTES -
12-26 M-320A
CHAPTER 13 - END-WORKING TURRET [Option]
INTRODUCTION
CONQUEST® T42 series lathes equipped with the end-working turret are capable of perform-
ing more sophisticated turning applications due to the greater number and variety of tooling that
can be employed.
Be sure that the end-working turret is in the home position when running applications that do
not require the end-working turret.
The travel specifications for the end-working turret are shown in Figure 13.1 .
4.75 18.03 [457.96]

[120.7] Solid Stop
17.560 [446.02]
Software Limit
17.500 [444.50]
3.91 [99.3]
.125 [3.18]
Main
Spindle
CL
Travel Specification Notes:

2.250 [57.15] 1. Dimensions are shown as inches [millimeters].
Software Limit
2. All measurements for Y are from the face of the main spindle.
1.780 [45.21]
3. Full programmable travel on the Y axis is 15.310 [388.87].
Solid Stop
TIA2695
Figure 13.1 - End-Working Turret Travel Specifications
M-320A 13-1
TOOLING
TOOLING TYPES
The end-working turret is designed to be used for center-working tools only. The following
types of tooling can be mounted on the end-working turret:
Adjustable Boring Bars
Drills
Reamers
Stock Stops
Tapping Attachments
Tailstock Centers
TOOLING RANGE
The end-working turret is set up from the factory with either English or Metric bushings perma-
nently mounted on the top plate. The permanently mounted English bushings have an internal
diameter of 1-1/4 inches. The permanently mounted Metric bushings have an internal diameter of
32 millimeters. Be sure to use the appropriate tool holders or bushings (English or Metric) for the
type of top plate on your machine.
Round shank tools 1-1/4 inches or 32 millimeters in diameter can be mounted directly onto the
English or Metric top plates, respectively. Round shank tools in specific sizes ranging from 1/32
inch [1 millimeter] up to 3/4 inch [20 millimeters] can be mounted on the end-working top plate
using the Hardinge Double-Angle Toolholder Collet and Toolholder System. Round shank tools
in specific sizes ranging from 1/2 inch [12 millimeters] up to 1 inch [25 millimeters] can be
mounted on the end-working top plate using Hardinge HDC-10 bushings.
13-2 M-320A
PROGRAMMING
- CAUTION -
When programming main turret motion, be aware of the position of the end-
working turret and the minimum recommended clearance of 1.25 inches
[31.8mm] from the centerline of the active tool station on the end-working
turret. Refer to Figure 13.2 .
Programmed motion of the end-working turret is controlled through the use of sub-routines
embedded directly in the main part program or with a G110 “one-shot” command. The subrou-
tines define end-working turret motion, they do not initiate end-working turret motion. Refer to
“Executing a Sub-Routine”, on page 13-8, for information on executing multiple end-working tur-
ret commands. Refer to “G110 One-Shot Command”, on page 13-8, for information on executing
individual end-working turret commands.
A maximum of three sub-routines can defined at a time. These sub-routines are typically
embedded at the beginning of the main part program before actual machine motion is initiated.
End-working turret sub-routines can be executed simultaneously with main turret operations.
These simultaneous operations can also be synchronized through the use of the M60 synchroni-
zation code. Refer to “Synchronization Code”, on page 13-8.
The following G codes are used to mark the beginning and end of these sub-routines:
G100: End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine
G101: Beginning of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1
Location of Turret Station #7
1.25
[31.8]
Inches
[Millimeters] TI2727
Figure 13.2 - End-Working Turret Stations
M-320A 13-3
PROGRAM STRUCTURE
Sample Part Program:
O1234 ; Part Program Name
N____ G101 ; Beginning of Sub-Routine #1 Definition
. .
. .
N____ G100 ; End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine
. .
. .
. .
. .
N_ (Operator Message) Sequence Number and Operator Message
. Standard Part Program Execution
. ”
. ”
VALID PROGRAMMING DATA WORDS

The data words described in this section are the only data words that can be included in the
end-working turret sub-routines. Refer to Chapter 1 for a complete listing of data words used to
program the GE Fanuc 18T control.
- CAUTION -
When programming an end-working turret sub-routine, program only the G,
M, and T codes listed in this section.
DO NOT program S codes in an end-working turret sub-routine.
- NOTE -
Program all other data words needed for end-working turret operation in the main
part program just before the command that executes the end-working turret sub-
routine.
When programming end-working turret sub-routines, program each M code and T
code in a block by itself.
13-4 M-320A
F Word
The F word is used to establish feedrate. When used with the G98 command, it expresses the
feedrate in inches or millimeters per minute. When used with the G99 command, it expresses
the feedrate in inches or millimeters per revolution.
When G98 is active, the maximum programmable feedrate for the end-working turret is 394
in/min [10000 mm/min]. When G99 is active, the maximum programmable feedrate is:
Maximum Feedrate (in/min) = inches per minute ÷ rev/min
Maximum Feedrate (mm/min) = millimeter per minute ÷ rev/min
G Word (Preparatory Codes)

G00 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)
G01 Linear Interpolation (Cutting Feed)
G04 Dwell
G80 Cancel Canned Cycle
G81 Drilling Cycle - Spot Drilling
G83 Peck Drilling Cycle
G84 Tapping Cycle
G98 Per Minute Feed
G99 Per Revolution Feed
G100 End of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine
G101 Start of End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1
M Word (Miscellaneous Codes)

M03 Spindle Forward command.
M04 Spindle Reverse command.
M05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF command.
M21 Open Collet command.
M22 Close Collet command.
M25 Part Catcher Retract
M26 Part Catcher Extend
M60 Synchronization code for simultaneous main and end-working turret operation.
Refer to page 13-8 for more information on the synchronization code.
M-320A 13-5
T Word
- CAUTION -
Read the information in the section entitled “Index On The Fly”, below, BE-
FORE programming index commands for the end-working turret.
DO NOT attempt to use the end-working turret to machine the workpiece
when station 7 is in the active position. This turret station is for clearance
purposes ONLY.
The T code selects the turret station that is to be indexed to the cutting position and activates
the corresponding tool offset data.
When programming end-working turret sub-routines, the data word format is T3. Decimal point
programming is NOT allowed. The geometry and wear offset number always match the turret
station number.
INDEX ON THE FLY
The end-working turret is designed for “index on the fly” operation. When a index com-
mand is read by the CNC control, the control acts on the index command, but also continues
reading and acting on the rest of the part program. If a lower axis move is read by the
control before the turret index is completed, the end-working turret will move while it is
indexing.
If necessary, program a dwell command (G04) and a time factor (P, U, or X data word) in
the data block immediately following the data block containing the index command. Some
experimentation may be required to determine the optimum time factor, but it should never
be necessary to program a time factor greater than 1.24 seconds. Refer to Chapter 1 for
more information on the dwell command.
T Code Definitions:
T100 No turret index, Y axis tool offset is canceled.
T101 End-working turret indexes to station #1, Y axis tool offset #1 is activated.
Y Word
- NOTE -
Absolute programming MUST be used. Incremental programming is not allowed.
The Y word is an absolute distance command for the end-working turret. It is measured rela-
tive to the face of the main spindle and is written with a Y followed by a plus (+) or minus (-)
sign. The plus sign may be omitted because the control assumes plus (+) if no sign is pro-
grammed.
Refer to Chapter 1 for more information on the Y data word.
13-6 M-320A
PROGRAMMABLE WORK COORDINATE SYSTEMS
- CAUTION -
All values to be entered into the work coordinate systems MUST be pro-
grammed as positive (+) values.
Be sure that the Y axis value in the standard work shift offset register is set
to “0" (zero) when using one of the programmable work coordinate systems
(G54 through G59) to set the Y axis work shift value.
The GE Fanuc series 18T control provides six work coordinate system registers that can be
activated through the use of G codes. The Y axis work shift can be input directly into these
registers from the Manual Data Input keyboard or from the main part program by using the G10
command. When changing the work shift for Y axis operations, it is necessary to load the re-
quired values into one of the following work coordinate offset registers from the main part pro-
gram, NOT from an end-working turret sub-routine.
When included in the part program, the work shift commands are typically programmed at the
beginning of the main part program before actual machine motion is initiated. Once the values
have been loaded into the desired coordinate system registers, the desired work shift register
can be activated from the main part program, NOT from an end-working turret sub-routine.
The work coordinate system G codes are:
G54 : Work coordinate system 1 (Power-up Default)
G55 : Work coordinate system 2
Programming Format
G10 L2 P_ Y____ ;
G10 : Offset Value command
L2 : Required command
P_ : Selects G54 through G59
P1 = G54 P4 = G57
P2 = G55 P5 = G58
P1 = G56 P6 = G59
Y____ Value to be loaded into Y axis register
Example:
G10 L2 P2 Y3.75 ;
The value “3.75" is loaded into the G55 Y axis work coordinate system register.
Activating a Work Coordinate System

To activate a work coordinate system, program the required command (G54, G55, G56, G57,
G58, or G59), in a block by itself, in the main part program.
M-320A 13-7
SUB-ROUTINES
- NOTE -
The end-working turret subroutines defined through the use of the G101, G102,
and G103 commands are NOT retained when the control is turned OFF.
Executing a Sub-Routine
As stated earlier, G codes G100 through G103 are only used to define end-working turret
operation, they do not initiate end-working turret operation. Once the end-working turret sub-rou-
tines have been defined, they can be executed from the main part program through the use of
the following M codes:
M81 Executes end-working sub-routine #1
No other data words may be programmed in a block containing an M81, M82, or M83.
G110 ONE-SHOT COMMAND
The G110 command allows the programmer to execute single end-working turret commands
from a data block in the main part program, instead of defining the action in a sub-routine. The
G110 block can only command one action; for example:
N____ G110 T105 ; Index to station #5, activate Y axis tool offset #5
As many G110 blocks as needed may be programmed, but only one action may be com-
manded in each G110 block. For example:
N40 G110 G0 Y8.5 ; Rapid end-working turret to Y8.5
N45 G110 T104 ; Index to station #4, activate Y axis tool offset #4
N50 G110 G0 Y.1 ; Rapid end-working turret to Y.1
G110 commands are non-modal. Modes active before the G110 command line are reactivated
upon completion of the G110 command line.
SYNCHRONIZATION CODE
The M60 synchronization code, when used, MUST be programmed in both the end-working
turret sub-routine and the main part program. If the control stops either process (main program
execution or sub-routine execution) and does not read an M60 from the other process, the
process that was stopped WILL NOT RESUME EXECUTION.
When the control reads an M60 command from the main part program, main program execu-
tion stops until an M60 command is read by the control from the end-working turret sub-routine.
At that time, the end-working turret sub-routine continues executing and the main part program
resumes execution.
When the control reads an M60 command from the end-working turret sub-routine, main pro-
gram execution stops until an M60 command is read by the control from the main part program.
At that time, the main part program continues executing and the end-working turret sub-routine
resumes execution.
13-8 M-320A
END-WORKING TURRET PART CATCHER
The optional end-working turret part catcher is mounted on end-working turret tool station #2.
The data words used to control the parts catcher are M25 (Part Catcher Retract) and M26 (Part
Catcher Extend).
M25 (Part Catcher Retract)
- NOTE -
End-working turret tool station #2 must be indexed to the active position before the
workpiece can be retrieved from the spindle.
M25 commands the control to retract the part catcher plunger, positioning the part catcher
cone parallel with the spindle centerline. The part catcher must be in this position to retrieve the
workpiece from the spindle. The part catcher cone must be parallel to and in line with the spindle
centerline during workpiece pickup.
M26 (Part Catcher Extend)
- NOTE -
Be sure that the end-working turret is moved to the home position and turret station
#4 is indexed to the active position before commanding M26.
M26 commands the control to extend the part catcher plunger, moving the parts catcher into
position to release the workpiece.
SINGLE BLOCK MODE

When Single Block mode is active, the main part program and end-working turret sub-routines
are both executed one block at a time. If a synchronization code (M60) is encountered, the
process that contained the synchronization code (the main part program or end-working turret
sub-routine) will stop until a synchronization code is read from the other process. The process
that has not stopped will continue to execute in Single Block mode.
Once a synchronization code is read from the second process, both processes will continue
executing in Single Block mode. Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe operator’s manual
(M-321) for more information on Single Block mode.
M-320A 13-9
MACHINING CYCLES
The following commands control the machining cycles that can be used with the end-working
turret, through the use of the end-working turret sub-routines:
G80 Cycle Cancel
G81 Single Pass Drilling Cycle
G83 Peck Drilling Cycle
G84 Tapping Cycle
G80 CYCLE CANCEL

The G80 command is used to cancel the G81, G83, and G84 machining cycles. G80 pro-
gramming is illustrated in the sample program segments under G81, G83, and G84. G80 MUST
be programmed immediately after all G81, G83, and G84 machining cycles
G81 SINGLE PASS DRILLING CYCLE
The G81 drilling cycle is used for either single pass drill or center drill operations.
Command Line Format

G81 Y-___ R___ P___ F___ ;
Y: Absolute coordinate value for final depth of drilled hole
R: Incremental distance from start point to cycle retract point
P: Amount of dwell at bottom of drilled hole (in 1/1000 of seconds) [Optional command]
Example: P500 = ½ second dwell
F: Feedrate
- NOTE -
It is recommended that the tool be positioned at the cycle retract point (defined by
“R”) before the G81 cycle is executed.
Y Axis Start Point and

Cycle Retract Point
Y R
CL
TI2804
Figure 13.3 - G81 Drilling Cycle: Data Word Definitions
13-10 M-320A
Machining Sequence
1. If not already positioned at “R”, the drill rapids to “R”; then begins moving at the pro-
grammed feedrate.
2. The drill continuously cuts at the programmed feedrate until full depth is achieved.
3. When full depth is achieved, the drill rapids back to the cycle start point, as defined by
“R”.
4. The G81 cycle is canceled by the G80 command.
Rapid Traverse
Programmed Feedrate
Cycle Retract Point
CL
TI2808
Figure 13.4 - G81 Drilling Cycle: Tool Motion

G00 G98 Y.1 ;
G81 Y-1.5 R.1 F8. :
G80 ;
.
.
1.500 .100
CL
Start Point
TI2805
Figure 13.5 - G81 Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece
M-320A 13-11
G83 PECK DRILLING CYCLE
The G83 peck drilling cycle is a constant depth drilling cycle.
Command Line Format

G83 Y-___ Q___ R___ P___ F___ ;
Y: Absolute coordinate value for final depth of drilled hole
Q: Size of depth increment
R: Incremental distance from part face to cycle retract point
P: Amount of dwell at end of each pass (in 1/1000 of seconds) [Optional command]
F: Feedrate (in/min or mm/min)
- NOTE -
* Rapid-to-Feed Distance,
Factory set to .05, Y Axis Start Point and
Defined by parameter 8258 Cycle Retract Point
Y R
CL +Y
Q
* TI2806
Figure 13.6 - G83 Drilling Cycle: Data Word Definitions
13-12 M-320A
Machining Sequence
grammed feedrate.
2. The drill moves an incremental distance from the start point at the programmed feedrate,
as defined by “Q”.
3. When distance “Q” is achieved, the drill rapids back to the cycle start point, as defined
by “R”.
4. The drill rapids in to predetermined distance from the beginning of the next cut. This
distance is factory set at .050 through parameter 8258.
5. The drill moves an incremental distance from the end of the last pass at the pro-
grammed feedrate, as defined by “Q”.
6. Steps 3 through 5 are repeated until the final pass remains. The final pass will typically
be less than the value defined by “Q”.
7. After the final pass is performed, the drill rapids to the retract point, as defined by “R”.
Rapid Traverse
Programmed Feedrate
Cycle Retract Point
CL
TI2809
Figure 13.7 - G83 Drilling Cycle: Tool Motion
M-320A 13-13
* Rapid-to-Feed Distance,
Factory set to .05,
Defined by parameter 8258
1.500 .100
CL
Start Point
.500
*
TI2807
Figure 13.8 - G83 Drilling Cycle: Sample Workpiece

G00 G98 Y.1 ;
G83 Y-1.5 Q.5 R.1 F5. :
G80 ;
.
.
13-14 M-320A
G84 TAPPING CYCLE
- CAUTION -
Programmed feedrates MUST NOT be overridden while a tapping cycle is be-
ing executed. To eliminate the possibility of the machine operator overriding
the programmed feedrate during the tapping cycle, program an M79 before
each tapping cycle on the end-working turret. Program an M78 to enable the
lower axis feedrate override function after the tapping cycle is completed.
Refer to the sample program segment on page 13-17.
The G84 tapping cycle can be used for right-hand tapping ONLY.
Command Line Format

G84 Y-___ R___ P___ F___ ;
Y: Absolute coordinate value for final tap depth plus lead-in
R: Incremental distance from part face to cycle retract point
P: Amount of dwell at bottom of tapped hole (in 1/1000 of seconds)
F: Thread Lead (inches or millimeters)
- NOTE -
The Y value definition in this section is based on setting the tool offset from the end
of the tap, not the first full thread. Modify the Y value accordingly if the tool offset is
based on the first full thread.
The term “lead-in” is used to identify the leading section of the tap that does not cut
a full thread.

Cycle Retract Point
Y
Depth of
R
Thread
CL +Y
TI2812
Figure 13.9 - G84 Tapping Cycle: Data Word Definitions
M-320A 13-15
Machining Sequence
grammed feedrate.
2. The tap feeds continuously at the programmed feedrate until full depth is achieved.
3. When full depth is achieved, the main spindle automatically reverses and programmed
dwell is executed.
4. When dwell is completed, the tap feeds out to the retract point (defined by “R”).
5. Spindle automatically switches to M03 ( Spindle Forward) direction.
Programmed Feedrate
Cycle Retract Point
CL
TI2813
Figure 13.10 - G84 Tapping Cycle: Tool Motion
13-16 M-320A
This example assumes:
1/4-28 tap
Tap lead-in of 3/32" [2.5 mm].
Spindle speed preset at 500 rpm (M03)
Sample Program Segment:

M79 ;
G101 ;
G00 Y.3 ;
G84 Y-1.3438 R.3 P800 F17.8 ;
G80 ;
M60 ;
G100 ;
M81 ;
M60 ;
M78 ;
.
.
1.3438
1.25 .300
CL
Start Point
(Y.3)
TI2814
Figure 13.11 - G84 Tapping Cycle: Sample Workpiece
M-320A 13-17
ALARM MESSAGES
PMC ALARMS
ALARM ALARM ALARM

NUMBER MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
5030 Command END without start END command (G100) was read by the control while a START
registration command. command (G101, G102, or G103) was NOT active.
5031 Start regist. command again. The control has read a second START command (G101, G102, or
G103) without reading an END command.
5032 New movement command
while executing B axis.
5033 Cannot be registered by Insufficient part program memory available to store the current
memory full. sub-routine.
5034 Two or more movements are Two or more M or T codes were programmed in a G110 block.
commanded in G110.
5035 No feed rate of B axis. No feedrate specified for axis motion
5036 No R point data in canned No retract point specified for G81, G83, or G84 cycle.
cycle.
5037 No cutting depth in G83. Cutting depth Q is not defined in a G83 cycle or is defined as “0"
(zero).
5038 Six or more M codes of start Six or more M codes of start movement are programmed for the
movement. end-working turret.
5039 Non-registration program. M81 commanded when G101 sub-routine not defined.
M82 commanded when G102 sub-routine not defined.
M83 commanded when G103 sub-routine not defined.
5040 Cannot execute B axis.
5041 Cannot command G110 A G101, G102, or G103 sub-routine is active when the control
simultaneously. reads a G110 command. Sub-routine must complete execution
before G110 command can be executed.
CNC ALARMS
ALARM ALARM ALARM

NUMBER MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
1805 Lower Axis Overtravel Overtravel condition on the lower axis (Y).
1808 Ram Turret M or T Code Illegal M or T code commanded within a G101, G102, G103 sub-
Error. routine.
1810 Y must be w/G101, 102, 103, Y data word must be programmed within a G101, G102, G103
110 sub-routine or in a G110 “one-shot” command block
13-18 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 13-19
- NOTES -
13-20 M-320A
CHAPTER 14 - THERMAL GROWTH COMPENSATION
- NOTE -
This chapter applies only to CONQUEST® T42SP Super-Precision® CNC Lathes.
INTRODUCTION
- CAUTION -
The actual thermal compensation function is performed by macro program
O9027, which uses macro variables 142, 144, 145, 146, 147, 148, 527, 528, 529,
530, and 531. DO NOT alter these macro variables or use them for any other
macro programs.
When thermal compensation is required, it must be activated BEFORE Tool
Nose Radius Compensation (G41 or G42) is activated. DO NOT activate ther-
mal compensation after Tool Nose Radius Compensation has been activated.
Undesirable axis motion may occur.
- NOTE -
When general precision work is to be performed on a CONQUEST T42SP Super-
Precision Lathe, it is not necessary to program the M88 Command.
CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision Lathes are designed with a thermal compensation fea-
ture. This feature allows the programmer to command the CNC control, through the part pro-
gram, to compensate for thermal growth as the machine tool warms up. Thermal compensation
cannot be commanded while the CNC control is in Manual Data Input mode.
The programmer commands the CNC control to initiate thermal compensation through the use
of the M88 command, which can be programmed as many times as needed in the part program.
Each time the control reads the M88 command, compensation is performed according to the
M88 command line.
The M88 command line may consist of only the M88 command or the M88 command with
optional parameters. When M88 is programmed without optional parameters, predefined default
values will be in effect. Refer to “Programming the Compensation Feature”, on the next page, for
information on the optional parameters and default values.
When executing programs with short cycle times, it may be sufficient to program the M88
command once in the part program. In this case, the M88 command line is programmed on the
line immediately following the program number.
When executing programs with longer cycle times, it may be desirable to program more than
one M88 command in the part program. In this case, the M88 command is programmed at the
beginning of each finishing tool operation.
M-320A 14-1
PROGRAMMING THE COMPENSATION FEATURE
COMMAND STRUCTURE
Thermal compensation is activated using the following command:
M88 M<n> R<n>
M88 Activates the compensation function.
M<n> (Optional parameter) indicates how often thermal compensation is to take
place. <n> can be any whole number ≥ “2.”. The decimal point MUST be
programmed.
If the M word is omitted, the CNC control assumes “1.”.
R1. (Optional parameter) indicates that the control is operating in radius mode.
The decimal point MUST be programmed.
Diameter mode is the default mode. Omit the R word when the control is
operating in diameter mode.
EXAMPLES
Example #1:
O1234 ; Program Number
M88 ; Compensation feature is activated. Thermal compensation will occur every
time the M88 command is read by the CNC control. Compensation is per-
formed in diameter mode.
Example #2:
M88 M2. ; Compensation feature is activated. Thermal compensation will occur every
second time the M88 command is read by the CNC control. Compensation is
performed in diameter mode.
Example #3:
M88 M3. R1. ; Compensation feature is activated. Thermal compensation will occur every
third time the M88 command is read by the CNC control. Compensation is
performed in radius mode.
14-2 M-320A
OPERATOR INFORMATION
PART PROGRAM INTERRUPTION
The control Reset key and Emergency Stop push button have no effect on the M88 compen-
sation feature. Part program execution is resumed in the normal manner.
LIMIT VALUES
There are two limit values established in the CNC control that relate to the thermal compensa-
tion feature:
Limit value #1 sets a non-critical limit which, when exceeded by the calculated compensation
value, causes a minimum compensation to take place. This minimum compensation will continue
to occur until the calculated compensation value does not exceed limit value #1. Once the calcu-
lated compensation value becomes ≤ limit value #1, full compensation will occur.
Limit value #2 sets a critical limit which, when exceeded by the calculated compensation
value, forces an alarm condition and causes an alarm message to be displayed on the control
display screen. No compensation will be performed and part program execution will stop. Refer
also to “Alarm Message”, below.
ALARM MESSAGE
The compensation feature uses the following alarm message to alert the machine operator
that one of two alarm conditions has occurred:
504 X COMPENSATION SYS. FAIL
The possible alarm conditions are:
1. The compensation hardware has malfunctioned.
2. The required correction value that was calculated by the CNC control exceeds a prede-
fined critical limit (limit value #2). Refer also to “Limit Values”, above.
If one of these alarm conditions occurs, no compensation will be performed and the control
will go into an alarm condition. Part program execution will stop. Pressing the control Reset push
button will clear the alarm message; however, the alarm will continue to occur each time the
CNC control reads the M88 command line until the problem causing the alarm is corrected.
Refer also to “Enabling Machine Operation”, below.
- NOTE -
To correct this alarm condition, it will be necessary to contact the Hardinge Service
Department.
Enabling Machine Operation

Machine operation is possible after this alarm condition has occurred by removing the M88
command line from the part program. Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 Lathe Operator’s Manual
(M-321) for information on editing part programs. However, be aware that thermal compensation
will not be active and the desired level of accuracy may not be achieved.
M-320A 14-3
- NOTES -
14-4 M-320A
- NOTE -
Refer to Chapter 16 for information on the optional ball screw driven sub-spindle.
INTRODUCTION
The sub-spindle allows the workpiece to be machined at both ends without stopping the ma-
chine to end-for-end the workpiece. This reduces cycle time by reducing or eliminating handling
of the workpiece by the machine operator.
Drilling, boring, turning, and facing operations can be performed on a workpiece which is
chucked in the sub-spindle. Depending on the machining sequence which is selected, the first
end of the workpiece is machined in either the main spindle or sub-spindle. The workpiece is
then transferred to the other spindle to complete machining of the second end. The sub-spindle
travel specifications are shown in Figure 15.1 . Refer to Appendix One for more complete infor-
mation on machine travel specifications.
TRAVEL SPECIFICATIONS
Travel Specification Notes:
1. Dimensions are shown as inches [millimeters].
2. All measurements are from the face of the main spindle.
3. Full travel is 11.500 [292.10 mm].
4.75 13.125 [333.38]

[120.7] Fixed Home Position
Main Spindle Sub-Spindle
CL
1.625 [41.28]
Forward Position
TI2708
Figure 15.1 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications
M-320A 15-1
SUB-SPINDLE G CODES
Most of the G codes are programmed in the same manner, regardless of whether the work-
piece is in the main spindle or the sub-spindle. However, there are G codes that deserve extra
attention to be sure the proper G code is used.
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02/G03)

Circular Interpolation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same manner as Circu-
lar Interpolation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
G02 is a clockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the bed of the
machine.
G03 is a counterclockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the
bed of the machine.
Refer to Chapter 3 for complete information on Circular Interpolation.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41/G42)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same man-
ner as Tool Nose Radius Compensation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
G41 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool.
G42 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool.
Refer to Chapter 2 for complete information on Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
Tool Quadrant Q3 Tool Quadrant Q4
G42 G41
G03 G02
Main Spindle Z0 Sub-Spindle Z0
-Z Inside Part +Z Move for -Z Move for +Z Inside Part

Clearance Clearance
TI2753
Figure 15.2 - Programming Circular Interpolation and

Tool Nose Radius Compensation
15-2 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE M CODES
The following M codes are used only in conjunction with sub-spindle operation.
M07 Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle
- CAUTION -
Be sure the machine tool is equipped with “matched” collets when the use of
the M07 command is required.
When using a bar feed with a machine equipped with an optional sub-spindle,
feeding the bar while running the two spindles in synchronization is NOT
recommended.
- NOTE -
M32 MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the workholding device of
the sub-spindle to match the main spindle. This allows the transfer of non-symmetrical parts
between the main spindle and the sub-spindle. M07 is programmed in a block by itself. The
sub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit. Refer to Figures 15.3 and 15.4 .
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync with Main Spindle
- CAUTION -
recommended.
M32 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the sub-spindle to match the main
spindle. This mode is only used for part transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
The sub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit.
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant)
M33 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the forward direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute (IPM) or Inch per Revolution (IPR) programming is allowed. The
sub-spindle is rotating in the forward direction when rotating clockwise, as viewed from the sub-
spindle end of the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30, M34,
M35, or by pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 15.3 . Refer to
M03, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle forward command.
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant)
M34 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute (IPM) or Inch per Revolution (IPR) programming is allowed. The
sub-spindle is rotating in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise, as viewed from
the sub-spindle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30,
M33, M35, or by pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 15.4. Refer
to M04, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle reverse command.
M35 Sub-Spindle Stop
M35 commands the sub-spindle to stop. M35 remains active until canceled by M07, M32,
M33, or M34. M35 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02,
M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop. Refer to M05, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle stop com-
mand.
M-320A 15-3
M46 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON
M46 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply to turn ON.
M47 Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF
M47 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply to turn OFF.
M56 Sub-Spindle Open
M56 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to open, releasing the workpiece. M56 remains
active until canceled by M57. Refer to M21 for the corresponding command for the main spindle.
M57 Sub-Spindle Close
M57 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to close, gripping the workpiece. M57 remains
active until canceled by M56. Refer to M22 for the corresponding command for the main spindle.
M69 commands the control to use the sub-spin-
dle collet closer with external gripping style work- Rotational Direction: Right-hand Drilling.
O.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.
holding devices. External chucking is activated I.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.
through Manual Data Input mode.
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 series lathe op-
erator’s manual (M-321) for information on switch-
ing chucking modes.
M70 commands the control to use the sub-spin-
dle collet closer with internal gripping style work- Spindle Command:
M33 - Sub-Spindle Forward
holding devices. Internal chucking is activated TI2754
through Manual Data Input mode.
Figure 15.3 - Sub-Spindle Forward
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 series lathe op- Rotation
erator’s manual (M-321) for information on switch-
ing chucking modes. Rotational Direction: Left-hand Drilling.
O.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.
M84 Sub-Spindle Forward I.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.
M84 commands the sub-spindle carriage to

move toward the main spindle at a rapid traverse
rate of 300 in/min. [7620 mm/min.] until it trips a
rapid-to-feed switch. At that point, the sub-spindle
goes to a feedrate that is preset by the machine
operator.
M85 Sub-Spindle Home Spindle Command:
M34 - Sub-Spindle Reverse
M85 commands the sub-spindle carriage to
TI2755
move away from the main spindle at a rapid tr-
averse rate of 300 in/min. [7620 mm/min.] and Figure 15.4 - Sub-Spindle Reverse
stop at the fixed home position. Rotation
15-4 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFT OFFSET
- CAUTION -
The work shift file contains an X and a Z register. The X axis register should
be set to zero at all times.
The value entered into the Z axis work shift register MUST be a NEGATIVE
number.
The work shift offset MUST be modified whenever the workpiece is trans-
ferred between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
The work shift offset sets the face of the workpiece to Z0 (zero) and is programmed as a
NEGATIVE number regardless of whether the workpiece is in the sub-spindle or the main spin-
dle.
Program a G10 line at the beginning of each tool operation to be sure the proper work shift is
active for that particular operation.
Main Spindle Z0
3.125
Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-3.125 ;

TI2756
Figure 15.5 - Sample Main Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
Safe Index
Z-4.5
Sub-Spindle Z0
10.625
Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-10.625 TI2757
Figure 15.6 - Sample Sub-Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
M-320A 15-5
PROGRAMMING AXIS MOTION
U/X AXIS MOTION
Programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during sub-spindle operation
is the same as programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during main
spindle operation.
W/Z AXIS MOTION

- WARNING -
Z Axis motion required to clear the workpiece during sub-spindle operation is
in the opposite direction of that required to clear the workpiece during main
spindle operation.
The control assumes all numerical data to be positive (+) unless a minus (-)
sign is programmed. When required, be sure the minus (-) sign is pro-
grammed.
When the workpiece is in the main spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of the
workpiece is to the right of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are positive (+)
W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are positive (+). Therefore, to clear
the workpiece on the Z axis, program either a positive (+) W or positive (+) Z move along with
whatever X axis move that may be required. Refer to Figure 15.2 .
When the workpiece is in the sub-spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of the
workpiece is to the left of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are negative (-)
W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are negative (-). Therefore, to clear
the workpiece on the Z axis, program either a negative (-) W or negative (-) Z move along with
15-6 M-320A
TOOL OFFSETS
Tool Offsets are established and activated for sub-spindle operations in the same manner as
they are for main spindle operations. Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, for
complete information on tool offsets.
- CAUTION -
Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can only
be mounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS

A point of concern when programming for sub-spindle operations is the tool nose orientation
code. (Refer to Figure 15.2) Be sure the proper orientation codes are entered in the tool offset
registers. Refer also to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4.
TOOL WEAR OFFSETS

Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, for information on entering Tool Wear
Offsets into the control.
X Axis Tool Wear Offsets
When the X axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diame-
ter will increase.
When the X axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closer
to the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diameter will
decrease.
Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets
When the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the face of the main spindle (closer to the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axis
coordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will increase during main spindle operations and
decrease during sub-spindle operations.
When the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closer
to the face of the main spindle (further from the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axis
coordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will decrease during main spindle operations and
increase during sub-spindle operations.
M-320A 15-7
SUB-SPINDLE SAFE START AND SAFE END SUBPROGRAMS
- NOTE -
Use of the Hardinge Safe Start and Safe End subprograms is strongly recom-
mended.
- WARNING -
NEVER use subprograms O1, O2, or O999 when machining on the sub-spin-
dle. Personal injury and/or damage to the tooling and the machine tool may
result.
NEVER use subprograms O3, O4, or O998 when machining on the main spin-
result.
During sub-spindle operation the tool typically engages the workpiece with positive (+) Z
moves and clears the workpiece with negative (-) Z moves. This is just the opposite of machining
a workpiece in the main spindle.
Three Safe Start and Safe End subprograms have been developed specifically for use when
machining on the sub-spindle. These sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End subprograms are
NOT to be used when machining on the main spindle.
Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Safe Start and Safe End subprograms to be used
when machining on the main spindle.
The sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms are as follows:
INCH MODE
O3 ; SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
N1 G00 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Cancel Tool Nose Radius
Compensation, RPM Limit,
IPM Feed.
N2 M98 P998 ; Call Safe Index Subprogram.
N3 M99 ; Return to calling program.
O4 ; I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM

N1 G00 G97 G98 Z-.4 ; Positioning Mode, RPM Limit, IPM Feed, Z Pullback.
N2 G40 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation.

N1 T0 ; Clear Active Tool Offset and Turret Station.
N2 X12.5 Z-___ ; X and Z Axis Safe Index Position.
15-8 M-320A
SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Safe Start and Safe End subprograms O3, O4, and O998 should be loaded permanently into
the memory of the control. They are designed for machine safety and to help simplify program-
ming. Subprogram O998 is used to deactivate the tool offset and command the safe index
coordinates.
O3 SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P3 is used at the start of every sub-spindle operation and at the end of
every O.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and that the
turret is in a safe position before indexing.
O4 I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P4 is used at the end of
every I.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures that
+X
the proper G codes are active and that the turret is
in a safe position before indexing.
O998 SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM
- CAUTION - +Z
The Z axis coordinate defined in

subprogram O998 MUST be pro-
grammed as a negative number.
This subprogram deactivates the tool offset and
supplies the coordinates for the safe index posi-
tion. The Z axis value is set by the machine op-
erator. It should be equal to the Z axis distance
from the turret top plate reference point to the tip Z
of the longest tool PLUS 1 inch. Refer to Figure
SAFE INDEX = Z + 1" [25 mm]
15.7 .
TI2766
This subprogram is called by subprograms O3
and O4. Figure 15.7 - Z Axis Safe Index Value
Calculation for Sub-Spindle Operations
METRIC MODE
When programming in metric units, the following changes must be made to subprograms O4
and O998.
Line N1 in subprogram O4: Z axis value must be in millimeters.
Line N2 in subprogram O998 : X and Z axis values must be in millimeters.
Subprogram O3 does not require changes.
M-320A 15-9
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING FORMATS
RUNNING THE SUB-SPINDLE ALONE
N__ (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G10 P0 Z-____ ; Establish Work Shift
G97 S1000 M33 (or) M34 ; 1000 RPM and Sub-Spindle Direction
T____ ; Index to Station and Call Tool Offset
X____ Z-____ M8 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset, Coolant ON
If Using Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(Non-Cutting Move Required)
Machine the Workpiece
G1 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece,

Inch per Minute Feed Required
End of Operation
X____ (and/or) Z____ ; Move to clear the Workpiece

M98 P3 (or) M98 P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End Subprogram
M01 ; Optional Stop
The sub-spindle has a 6000 rpm limit.
15-10 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE SYNC WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE
G97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 ; 1000 RPM and Spindle Direction, Coolant ON
T____ ; Index to Station and Call Tool Offset
X____ Z-____ M32 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset and Sync Sub-Spindle
M07 ; Phase Sync Spindles [Optional Command]
If Using Constant Surface Speed
G50 S____ ; Establish Maximum RPM Limit

G96 S____ ; Establish Constant Surface Feet [Meters] per Minute
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(Non-Cutting Move Required)
G1 G99 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece, Inch per Rev Feed
End of Operation

M98 P1 (or) P2 (or) P3 (or) P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End Subprogram
M35 ; Cancel Sync - Stop Sub-Spindle
M01 ; Optional Stop
When running the sub-spindle in sync with the main spindle (M07 or M32):
Constant Surface Speed (G96) and Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) are allowed.
Forward rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M04 or M14 command to the main spindle.
Reverse rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M03 or M13 command to the main spindle.
M-320A 15-11
WORKPIECE TRANSFER
The following sample program segments in this section illustrate the proper format and se-
quence for programming workpiece transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
There are three basic types of workpiece transfers:
1. Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 15.8 through 15.10)
2. Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 15.11 through 15.13)
3. Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle (Figures 15.14 through 15.16)
Transferring the workpiece between the main spindle and the sub-spindle can be accom-
plished by programming the workpiece transfer by using standard programming or by using
macro program O9170, which is designed to simplify the transfer process.
The format of macro program O9170 will vary, depending on whether a bar job transfer or a
slug jog transfer is to be performed.
Examples of each method will be shown in the following sections.
MACRO PROGRAM O9170

Block Format
Inch Format: G65 P9170 S1 B2.4 X±2.4 F1.6
Metric Format: G65 P9170 S1 B3.3 X±3.3 F3.4
Where:
G65 = G Code for Macro Call
P9170 = Macro Program 9170 (Workpiece Transfer)
S = Type of Job Transfer
S1 = Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle
S2 = Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle
S3 = Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle
B = Bar Stock Diameter (Used only with S1 type transfers)
X = End Point of the Cut-off Operation (Used only with S1 type transfers)
F = Feedrate (per revolution) for the Cut-off Operation (Used only with S1
type transfers)
- NOTE -
Decimal point programming is not required with the S word.
15-12 M-320A
TRANSFERRING FROM MAIN SPINDLE TO SUB-SPINDLE
The following two sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for
programming bar job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. The first program seg-
ment uses standard programming and the second program segment makes use of the O9170
macro program. Refer to Figures 15.8 through 15.10 .
(Using Standard Programming)
N10 (Operator Message) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message

G10 P0 Z-2.5 ; Main Spindle Work Shift
G97 S1000 M13 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Forward, Coolant ON
X1.2 Z-2. ; Tool Rapid to Start Point (Figure 15.8)
G50 S3000 ; Establish Maximum RPM Limit
G96 S250 ; Constant Surface Speed, 250 Surface Feet per Minute
M32 ; Sub-Spindle Sync to Main Spindle
M56 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Open
M46 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air ON
M84 ; Sub-Spindle Forward
M57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.9)
M47 ; Sub-Spindle Wiper Air OFF
G1 G99 X-0.04 F0.002 ; Feed Tool to X-.04 Diameter (Cut-off)
G4 U0.1 ; Dwell .1 Second
M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME
G0 X1.1 ; Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 15.10)
M1 : Optional Stop
M-320A 15-13
TI2758
Figure 15.8 - Tool Positioned for Cut-Off Operation
TI2759
Figure 15.9 - Cut-Off Operation
TI2760
Figure 15.10 - Sub-Spindle Moved to Home Position
15-14 M-320A
(Using Macro Program O9170)

G97 S1000 M13 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Forward, Coolant ON
X1.2 Z-2. ; Tool Rapid to Start Point (Figure 15.8)
G65 P9170 S1 B1. X-0.04 F0.002 ; Macro Call with Variables Defined
M1 ; Optional Stop
In this sample program segment, macro program O9170 reads the data words programmed in
the G65 block. Macro program O9170 uses the values specified by these data words to select
and execute the commands listed below in the order that they are listed. When the last of these
commands is executed, the control returns to the main program:
Commands called by the “G65 P9170 S1 B1. X-0.04 F0.002 ;” block:
G1 G99 X-0.04 F0.002 ; Feed Tool to X-.04 Diameter (Cut-off)
G4 U0.1 : Dwell .1 Second
M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME
G0 X1.16 Tool Rapid to Clear Workpiece (Figure 15.10)
M-320A 15-15
The following two sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for
programming slug job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. The first program seg-
ment uses standard programming and the second program segment makes use of the O9170
macro program. Refer to Figures 15.11 through 15.13 .

G97 S100 M3 ; Main Spindle 100 RPM Forward
M85 ; Sub-Spindle HOME (Figure 15.11)
M21 ; Main Spindle Open
G97 S100 M33 ; Sub-Spindle 100 RPM Forward
M1 ; Optional Stop
15-16 M-320A
TI2761
Figure 15.11 - Workpiece Held in Main Spindle
TI2762
Figure 15.12 - Both Spindles Grip Workpiece
TI2763
Figure 15.13 - Workpiece Held in Sub-Spindle

(Sub-Spindle Home)
M-320A 15-17

G65 P9170 S2 ; Macro Call with S Variable Defined
G97 S100 M33 ; Sub-Spindle 100 RPM Forward
M1 ; Optional Stop
In this sample program segment, macro program O9170 reads the S word programmed in the
G65 block. Macro program O9170 uses the value specified by the S word to select and execute
the commands listed below in the order they are listed. When the last of these commands is
executed, the control returns to the main program.
Commands called by the “G65 P9170 S2 ;” block:
15-18 M-320A
TRANSFERRING FROM SUB-SPINDLE TO MAIN SPINDLE
The following sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for pro-
gramming transfers from the sub-spindle to the main spindle. Unlike main spindle to sub-spindle
transfers, the only type of transfer which is used when transferring from the sub-spindle to the
main spindle is slug job transfer. Refer to Figures 15.14 through 15.16.

G10 P0 Z-11.75 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift
M32 Sub-Spindle Sync to Main Spindle
M21 ; Main Spindle Collet Open
M22 ; Main Spindle Close (Figure 15.15)
M35 ; Sub-Spindle Stop
M1 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 15-19
TI2763

(Sub-Spindle Home)
TI2762
TI2761
15-20 M-320A

G10 P0 Z-11.75 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift
G65 P9170 S3 ; Macro Call with S Variable Defined
M1 ; Optional Stop
In this sample program segment, macro program O9170 reads the S word programmed in the
G65 block. Macro program O9170 uses the value specified by the S word to select and execute
the commands listed below in the order that they are listed. When the last of these commands is
executed, the control returns to the main program.
Commands called by the “G65 P9170 S3 ;” block:
M22 ; Main Spindle Collet Close (Figure 15.15)
M-320A 15-21
SUB-SPINDLE SAMPLE PROGRAM
The following sample program is written for a workpiece to be machined from bar stock which
is 1-7/16 inches in diameter. The workpiece will be machined on the main spindle first; then
transferred to the sub-spindle to complete the machining operation.
BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Tool Station
and Offset
Main Spindle Work shift Z-2.75 -
Feed Bar Stock T1010
Rough Facing and Turning Operation T0101
Finish Facing and Turning Operation T0202
Workpiece Cut-off and Transfer T0404
Sub-Spindle Work shift Z-11.625 -

Center Drill T0909
Drop Part
Main Spindle
Work Shift
-2.75 1.50
-11.625
Sub-Spindle Work Shift
13.125
Sub-Spindle Home Position
Main Spindle Face Sub-Spindle Face
TI2764
Figure 15.17 - Sample Program Work Shift Values
15-22 M-320A
2.000
1.200
1.400
1.250
1.125
20°
.100 R 45° x .05

TI1759
SAMPLE PROGRAM
% Stop Code
G20 ; Establish Inch Mode
N10 (Feed Stock) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G10 P0 Z-2.75 ; MAIN SPINDLE WORK SHIFT
G97 S100 M14 ; Main Spindle Reverse 100 RPM, Coolant ON
X0. Z0.1 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point
G1 Z-2. F100. ; Position Stock Stop
G4 U0.2 ; Dwell .2 Seconds
Z0.02 F20. ; Move to Z.02
M22 ; Main Spindle Close
M98 P2 ; Call I.D. Safe End Program O2
M1 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 15-23
N1 (Rough Face and Turn O.D.) Sequence Number and Operator Message
X1.5 Z0.005 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point
G1 G99 X-0.06 F0.005 ; Rough Face the Workpiece
G98 X1.45 Z0.05 F100. ; Move to Clear the Workpiece
G90 G99 X1.3 Z-1.19 F0.008 ; G90 Turning Cycle - Single Pass
G1 G98 X1.025 F75. ; Position for Rough Turn
G99 Z0.005 F0.007 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece
X1.135 Z-0.05 ; Rough Turn the 45 Degree Angle
A180. ; Rough Turn the O.D.
X1.26 Z-1.195 A160. ; Rough Turn the 20 Degree Angle
X1.45 ; Feed to Clear the Workpiece
M1 ; Optional Stop
N2 (Finish R.015 Q3) Sequence Number and Operator Message

G1 G42 X-0.03 Z0.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G99 Z0. F0.003 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece
X1.125 ,C0.05 ; Face and Chamfer Workpiece
A180 ; Finish Turn the O.D.
X1.25 Z-1.2 A160. ; Finish Turn the 20 Degree Angle
M1 ; Optional Stop
(Continued on Next Page)
15-24 M-320A
N4 (.125 Cut-off and Transfer) Sequence Number and Operator Message
X1.5 Z-2.135 M32 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Sub-Spindle Sync
G65 P9170 S1 B1.4375 X-0.05 F0.002 ; Macro Call for Bar Job Transfer
M1 ; Optional Stop

G10 P0 Z-11.625 ; SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFT
G97 S1000 M33 M8 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ON
X1.51 Z-0.1 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Sync Sub-Spindle (Reverse)
G1 G42 X1.5 Z0. F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G99 X-0.03 F0.004 ; Finish Face the Workpiece
G41 ; Tool Nose Radius Compensation Axis Reversal
X1.2 ; Feed to Arc Start
G2 X1.4 Z0.1 R0.1 F0.002 ; Cut Radius
G1 Z0.8 F0.004 ; Finish Turn the O.D.
M98 P3 Call O.D. Safe End Program O3
M1 ; Optional Stop
N09 (#4 Center Drill) Sequence Number and Operator Message

G97 S1000 M33 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM
X0. Z-0.1 S1600 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Spindle and Coolant ON
G1 Z0.28 F8. ; Drill to Depth
M1 ; Optional Stop
M-320A 15-25
N026 (Drop Workpiece) Sequence Number and Operator Message
M26 ; Extend Parts Catcher
M56 ; Sub-Spindle Open
M25 ; Retract Parts Catcher
M1 ; Optional Stop
M30 ; End Program - Rewind
% Stop Code
SUB-SPINDLE SAFETY INTERLOCKS

1. When main spindle and sub-spindle workholding devices are both open, Cycle Start is
inhibited.
2. When main spindle and sub-spindle workholding devices are both closed, M84 (Sub-
Spindle Forward) is an illegal M code and will not be executed.
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING RULES

1. When operating the spindles in sync mode, DO NOT reverse spindle directions.
2. When it is necessary to program M07 (Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle), M32
MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
3. For safety, the Work Shift Offset is programmed after each Operation Sequence number.
4. Be sure to call the correct Safe Start/End subprogram for the spindle being used. Refer
to “Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms”, Page 15-8.
5. Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can only be
mounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
6. Enter a 0 (zero) at the beginning of each sub-spindle operation sequence number to
distinguish sub-spindle operation sequence numbers from main spindle sequence num-
bers.
7. When the operator is running a bar job, the Repeat Mode push button will be activated.
When an M30 command is read by the control, the program rewinds back to the begin-
ning. If Repeat Mode is active when the program rewinds, the program will begin execut-
ing again.
8. When using a bar feed and a new piece of bar stock is loaded in the bar feed, the face
of the bar stock should be flush with the face of the collet in the main spindle since the
part program begins with a feed stock operation.
15-26 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 15-27
- NOTES -
15-28 M-320A
(Ball Screw Axis Drive)
- NOTE -
Refer to Chapter 15 for information on the optional hydraulically driven sub-spindle.
INTRODUCTION
The sub-spindle allows the workpiece to be machined at both ends without stopping the ma-
chine to end-for-end the workpiece. This reduces cycle time by reducing or eliminating handling
of the workpiece by the machine operator.
Drilling, boring, turning, and facing operations can be performed on a workpiece which is
chucked in the sub-spindle. Depending on the machining sequence that is selected, the first end
of the workpiece is machined in either the main spindle or sub-spindle. The workpiece is then
transferred to the other spindle to complete machining of the second end.
PROGRAMMING AXIS MOTION

X/U AXIS MOTION
Programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during sub-spindle operation
is the same as programming incremental and absolute axis motion on the X axis during main
spindle operation.
Y/V AXIS MOTION

- NOTE -
When Y axis motion is programmed by itself, the sub-spindle moves at the pro-
grammed feedrate. When Y axis motion is programmed with X and/or Z axis mo-
tion, the sub-spindle moves at a compensated feedrate to cause the sub-spindle to
complete the move at the same time as the other axes.
The Y and V data words are used to command direction and distance when moving the ball
screw driven sub-spindle. The face of the sub-spindle is the sub-spindle reference point.
Y Data Word
The Y data word commands an absolute move referenced against the Z0 (zero) position
of the machine coordinate position. Positive Y coordinates are to the right of Z0 and negative
Y coordinates are to the left of Z0. The Z0 position will be equal to the face of the main
spindle unless modified through the Work Shift offset. Refer to Chapter 4 for information on
the Work Shift offset.
V Data Word
The V data word commands an incremental move referenced against current position of
the sub-spindle reference point. Positive incremental commands move the sub-spindle away
from the main spindle. Negative incremental commands move the sub-spindle toward the
main spindle.
M-320A 16-1
Y AXIS POSITION VERIFICATION
- CAUTION -
“G53 Y#5024" MUST be commanded before Y axis motion is commanded
whenever the Y axis drive has been turned OFF through the use of the M66
command and turned back ON through the use of the M67 or M68 command.
The “G53 Y#5024" data block commands the control to verify the position of the Y axis. Refer
to the programming examples used in this chapter.
Z/W AXIS MOTION

- WARNING -
Z Axis motion required to clear the workpiece during sub-spindle operation is
in the opposite direction of that required to clear the workpiece during main
spindle operation.
The control assumes all numerical data to be positive (+) unless a minus (-)
sign is programmed. When required, be sure the minus (-) sign is pro-
grammed.
When the workpiece is in the main spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of the
workpiece is to the right of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are positive (+)
W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are positive (+). Therefore, to clear
the workpiece on the Z axis, program either a positive (+) W or positive (+) Z move along with
When the workpiece is in the sub-spindle, all Z axis tool motion away from the face of the
workpiece is to the left of the workpiece. All incremental moves in this direction are negative (-)
W moves. All absolute coordinates on the Z axis in this area are negative (-). Therefore, to clear
the workpiece on the Z axis, program either a negative (-) W or negative (-) Z move along with
FEEDRATE
Sub-spindle feedrate is commanded by the F data word, with a maximum programmable fee-
drate of 394 in/min [10,000 mm/min].
Refer to Chapter 1 for additional information on the F data word.
TRAVEL SPECIFICATIONS
Two different sub-spindle travel specifications are available on CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP
Super-Precision® lathes. The sub-spindle travel is established at the factory. The two configura-
tions available are identified as:
1.600 Offset Sub-Spindle, refer to Figure 16.1 .
0.460 Offset Sub-Spindle, refer to Figure 16.2 .
16-2 M-320A
17.300 [439.42]
Solid Stop
17.080 [433.83]
Software Limit
4.75 17.000 [431.80]
[120.7] Axis Reference Position
Main
Spindle Sub-Spindle
CL
NOTES:
1. Dimensions shown as inches [millimeters].
1.600 [40.64]
Software Limit 2. All measurements are from the face of the main spindle.
1.450 [36.83] 3. Full travel between software limits is 15.480 [393.19 mm].
Solid Stop
TIA2950

(1.600 Offset Sub-Spindle)
16.180 [410.97]
Solid Stop
15.940 [404.88]
Software Limit
4.75 15.875 [403.23]
[120.7] Axis Reference Position
Main
Spindle Sub-Spindle
CL
NOTES:
1. Dimensions shown as inches [millimeters].
0.460 [11.68]
Software Limit 2. All measurements are from the face of the main spindle.
0.310 [7.87] 3. Full travel between software limits is 15.480 [393.19 mm].
Solid Stop
TIA2950

(0.460 Offset Sub-Spindle)
M-320A 16-3
Tool Quadrant Q3 Tool Quadrant Q4
G42 G41
G03 G02
Main Spindle Z0 Sub-Spindle Z0
-Z Inside Part +Z Move for -Z Move for +Z Inside Part

Clearance Clearance
TI2753
Figure 16.3 - Programming Circular Interpolation and

Tool Nose Radius Compensation
SUB-SPINDLE G CODES
Most of the G codes are programmed in the same manner, regardless of whether the work-
piece is in the main spindle or the sub-spindle. However, there are G codes that deserve extra
attention to be sure the proper G code is used. The following G codes are discussed simply to
eliminate possible questions.
CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02/G03)

Circular Interpolation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same manner as Circu-
lar Interpolation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 16.3 .
G02 is a clockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the bed of the
machine.
G03 is a counterclockwise arc as viewed from above the tool and looking down toward the
bed of the machine.
Refer to Chapter 3 for complete information on Circular Interpolation.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41/G42)

Tool Nose Radius Compensation for sub-spindle programming is interpreted in the same man-
ner as Tool Nose Radius Compensation for main spindle programming. Refer to Figure 16.3 .
G41 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the right of the tool.
G42 activates Tool Nose Radius Compensation with the workpiece to the left of the tool.
Refer to Chapter 2 for complete information on Tool Nose Radius Compensation.
16-4 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE M CODES
The following M codes are used only in conjunction with sub-spindle operation.
- CAUTION -
Be sure the machine tool is equipped with “matched” collets when the use of
the M07 command is required.
recommended.
- NOTE -
M32 MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
M07 commands the rotational direction, velocity, and orientation of the workholding device of
the sub-spindle to match the main spindle. This allows the transfer of non-symmetrical parts
between the main spindle and the sub-spindle. M07 is programmed in a block by itself. The
sub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit. Refer to Figures 16.4 and 16.5 .
- CAUTION -
recommended.
M32 commands the rotational direction and velocity of the sub-spindle to match the main
spindle. This mode is only used for part transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
The sub-spindle has a maximum 6000 rpm limit.
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward Rotation (No Coolant)
M33 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the forward direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute or Inch per Revolution programming is allowed. The sub-spindle
is rotating in the forward direction when rotating clockwise, as viewed from the sub-spindle end
of the machine. M33 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30, M34, M35, or by
pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 16.4 . Refer to M03, in
Chapter 1, for the main spindle forward command.
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse Rotation (No Coolant)
M34 commands the sub-spindle to rotate in the reverse direction at the programmed spindle
speed (S word). Inch per Minute or Inch per Revolution programming is allowed. The sub-spindle
is rotating in the reverse direction when rotating counterclockwise, as viewed from the sub-spin-
dle end of the machine. M34 remains active until canceled by M00, M01, M02, M30, M33, M35,
or by pressing the Reset or Emergency Stop push button. Refer to Figure 16.5. Refer to M04, in
Chapter 1, for the main spindle reverse command.
M35 commands the sub-spindle to stop. M35 remains active until canceled by M07, M32,
M33, or M34. M35 is active at machine start-up and can also be activated by M00, M01, M02,
M30, Reset, and Emergency Stop. Refer to M05, in Chapter 1, for the main spindle stop com-
mand.
M-320A 16-5
Rotational Direction: Right-hand Drilling.
M46 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply O.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.
I.D. Tool: Right-hand Tool, Cutting edge up.
to turn ON.
M47 commands the sub-spindle wiper air supply
to turn OFF.
M56 Sub-Spindle Open
M56 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to
open, releasing the workpiece. M56 remains active Spindle Command:
until canceled by M57. Refer to M21 for the corre- M33 - Sub-Spindle Forward
sponding command for the main spindle. TI2754
M57 Sub-Spindle Close Figure 16.4 - Sub-Spindle Forward

Rotation
M57 commands the sub-spindle collet closer to
close, gripping the workpiece. M57 remains active
Rotational Direction: Left-hand Drilling.
until canceled by M56. Refer to M22 for the corre- O.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.
sponding command for the main spindle. I.D. Tool: Left-hand Tool, Cutting edge down.
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF

M66 commands the sub-spindle servo drive
system to turn OFF. Drive OFF mode leaves the
sub-spindle carriage free to move, although signifi-
cant force is required to move it. This mode should
be activated before opening a collet when the
workpiece is held at both ends.
Spindle Command:
M66 is intended to be used during workpiece M34 - Sub-Spindle Reverse
TI2755
transfers between the main and sub-spindle
ONLY. Refer to “Workpiece Transfer”, beginning Figure 16.5 - Sub-Spindle Reverse
on page 16-14, for recommended programming Rotation
structures for workpiece transfer using the M66
command.
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque Mode
- CAUTION -
Be sure to observe the distance and speed limitations when commanding Y
axis motion with Low Torque mode active.
M67 commands the sub-spindle servo drive system to switch to Low Torque mode.
Low Torque mode is only intended for short compensation moves performed at low speed
during workpiece transfers. These compensation moves must not exceed 0.100" [2.5 mm] in
length or 10 in/min [254 mm/min] in speed. Perform all standard Y axis motion with Normal
Torque mode active.
M67 is intended to be used during workpiece transfers between the main and sub-spindle
ONLY. Refer to “Workpiece Transfer”, beginning on page 16-14, for recommended programming
structures for workpiece transfer using the M67 command.
16-6 M-320A
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque Mode
M68 commands the sub-spindle servo drive system to switch to Normal Torque mode. Normal
Torque mode applies full torque to the axis drive ball screw. Perform all standard Y axis motion
with Normal Torque mode active.
M68 is also activated at control power-up, by pressing the control Reset key on the Manual
Data Input keyboard, or when an M30 (End of Program) is read by the machine control.
M69 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with external gripping style
workholding devices. External chucking is activated through Manual Data Input mode.
switching chucking modes.
M70 commands the control to use the sub-spindle collet closer with internal gripping style
workholding devices. Internal chucking is activated through Manual Data Input mode.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 series lathe operator’s manual (M-321) for information on
switching chucking modes.
PART CATCHER OPERATION

When setting up the part catcher to retrieve parts from the sub-spindle, the machine operator
is instructed to position the sub-spindle 13.125 inches [333.38 mm] from the main spindle and
adjust the part catcher to retrieve parts at that position.
When using the part catcher to retrieve parts from the sub-spindle during normal program
execution, it is the programmer’s responsibility to position the sub-spindle 13.125 from the face
of the main spindle to allow for proper retrieval of parts. The programmer can either cancel the
work shift and send the sub-spindle to 13.125 [333.38] or program the appropriate coordinate
value taking the current work shift value into consideration.
M-320A 16-7
SUB-SPINDLE WORK SHIFT OFFSET
- CAUTION -
The work shift file contains an X and a Z register. The X axis register should
be set to zero at all times.
The value entered into the Z axis work shift register MUST be a NEGATIVE
number.
The work shift offset MUST be modified whenever the workpiece is trans-
ferred between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
The work shift offset sets the face of the workpiece to Z0 (zero) and is programmed as a
NEGATIVE number regardless of whether the workpiece is in the sub-spindle or the main spin-
dle.
Program a G10 line at the beginning of each tool operation to be sure the proper work shift is
active for that particular operation.
Main Spindle Z0
3.125
Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-3.125 ;

TI2756
Figure 16.6 - Sample Main Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
Safe Index
Z-4.5
Sub-Spindle Z0
10.625
Z Axis Work Shift Entry: G10 P0 Z-10.625

TI2757
Figure 16.7 - Sample Sub-Spindle Z Axis Work Shift
16-8 M-320A
TOOL OFFSETS
Tool Offsets are established and activated for sub-spindle operations in the same manner as
they are for main spindle operations. Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, for
complete information on tool offsets.
- CAUTION -
Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can only
be mounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
TOOL GEOMETRY OFFSETS

A point of concern when programming for sub-spindle operations is the tool nose orientation
code. (Refer to Figure 16.3) Be sure the proper orientation codes are entered in the tool offset
registers. Refer also to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4.
TOOL WEAR OFFSETS

Refer to “Work Shift and Tool Offsets”, Chapter 4, for information on entering Tool Wear
Offsets into the control.
X Axis Tool Wear Offsets
When the X axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diame-
ter will increase.
When the X axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closer
to the spindle centerline for a given X axis coordinate. As a result, the workpiece diameter will
decrease.
Z Axis Tool Wear Offsets
When the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is increased in value, the tool tip will be positioned further
away from the face of the main spindle (closer to the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axis
coordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will increase during main spindle operations and
decrease during sub-spindle operations.
When the Z axis Tool Wear Offset is decreased in value, the tool tip will be positioned closer
to the face of the main spindle (further from the face of the sub-spindle) for a given Z axis
coordinate. As a result, the workpiece length will decrease during main spindle operations and
increase during sub-spindle operations.
M-320A 16-9
SUB-SPINDLE SAFE START AND SAFE END SUBPROGRAMS
- NOTE -
Use of the Hardinge Safe Start and Safe End subprograms is strongly recom-
mended.
- WARNING -
NEVER use subprograms O1, O2, or O999 when machining on the sub-spin-
result.
NEVER use subprograms O3, O4, or O998 when machining on the main spin-
result.
During sub-spindle operation the tool typically engages the workpiece with positive (+) Z
moves and clears the workpiece with negative (-) Z moves. This is just the opposite of machining
a workpiece in the main spindle.
Three Safe Start and Safe End subprograms have been developed specifically for use when
machining on the sub-spindle. These sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End subprograms are
NOT to be used when machining on the main spindle.
Refer to Chapter 9 for information on the Safe Start and Safe End subprograms to be used
when machining on the main spindle.
The sub-spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms are as follows:
INCH MODE
O3 ; SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
N1 G00 G40 G97 G98 ; Positioning Mode, Cancel Tool Nose Radius
Compensation and RPM Limit, Feed per Minute.
O4 ; I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM

N1 G00 G97 G98 Z-.4 ; Positioning Mode, RPM Limit, Feed per Minute,
Z Pullback.
N2 G40 ; Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation.

N1 T0 ; Clear Active Tool Offset and Turret Station.
N2 X12.5 Z-___ ; X and Z Axis Safe Index Position.
16-10 M-320A
SUBPROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Safe Start and Safe End subprograms O3, O4, and O998 should be loaded permanently into
the memory of the control. They are designed for machine safety and to help simplify program-
ming. Subprogram O998 is used to deactivate the tool offset and command the safe index
coordinates.
O3 SAFE START AND O.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P3 is used at the start of every sub-spindle operation and at the end of
every O.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures that the proper G codes are active and that the
turret is in a safe position before indexing.
O4 I.D. SAFE END SUBPROGRAM
The command M98 P4 is used at the end of
every I.D. sub-spindle operation. This ensures that
+X
the proper G codes are active and that the turret is
in a safe position before indexing.
O998 SAFE INDEX SUBPROGRAM
+Z
- CAUTION -
The Z axis coordinate defined in
subprogram O998 MUST be pro-
grammed as a negative number.
This subprogram deactivates the tool offset and
supplies the coordinates for the safe index posi-
tion. The Z axis value is set by the machine op-
erator. It should be equal to the Z axis distance
from the turret top plate reference point to the tip Z
of the longest tool PLUS 1 inch. Refer to Figure
SAFE INDEX = Z + 1" [25 mm]
16.8 .
TI2766
This subprogram is called by subprograms O3
and O4. Figure 16.8 - Z Axis Safe Index Value
Calculation for Sub-Spindle Operations
METRIC MODE
When programming in metric units, the following changes must be made to subprograms O4
and O998.
Line N1 in subprogram O4: Z axis value must be in millimeters.
Line N2 in subprogram O998 : X and Z axis values must be in millimeters.
Subprogram O3 does not require changes.
M-320A 16-11
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING FORMATS
RUNNING THE SUB-SPINDLE ALONE
G97 S1000 M33 (or) M34 ; 1000 RPM and Sub-Spindle Direction
T____ ; Index to Tool Station and Call Tool Offset
X____ Z-____ M8 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset, Coolant ON
G50 S____ ; Establish RPM Limit

G96 S___ ; Surface Feet (Meters) per Minute
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose Radius
Compensation (Non-Cutting Move Required)
G1 G98 (or) G99 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece,

Feed per Minute/Revolution
End of Operation

M98 P3 (or) M98 P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End Subprogram
M01 ; Optional Stop
16-12 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE SYNC WITH THE MAIN SPINDLE
G97 S1000 M13 (or) M14 ; 1000 RPM and Spindle Direction, Coolant ON
M98 P1 (or) P3 ; Call Appropriate Safe Start Program (01 or O3)
T____ ; Index to Tool Station and Call Tool Offset
X____ Z-____ M32 ; Move to Activate Tool Offset and Sync Sub-Spindle
M07 ; Phase Sync Spindles [Optional Command]
G50 S____ ; Establish Maximum RPM Limit

G96 S____ ; Surface Feet [Meters] per Minute
G1 G41 (or) G42 X____ Z____ F100. ; Activate Tool Nose Radius
Compensation (Non-Cutting Move Required)
G1 G99 X____ Z____ F____ ; Machine the Workpiece, Inch per Rev Feed
End of Operation

M98 P1 (or) P2 (or) P3 (or) P4 ; Call O.D. or I.D. Safe End Subprogram
M35 ; Cancel Sync - Stop Sub-Spindle
M01 ; Optional Stop
When running the sub-spindle in sync with the main spindle (M07 or M32):
Constant Surface Speed (G96) and Inch per Revolution feedrate (G99) are allowed.
Forward rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M04 or M14 command to the main spindle.
Reverse rotation of the sub-spindle will be an M03 or M13 command to the main spindle.
M-320A 16-13
WORKPIECE TRANSFER
The sample program segments in this section illustrate the recommended formats and se-
quence for programming workpiece transfer between the main spindle and the sub-spindle.
There are three basic types of workpiece transfers:
1. Bar Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 16.9 through 16.11)
2. Slug Job Transfer from Main Spindle to Sub-Spindle (Figures 16.12 through 16.14)
3. Slug Job Transfer from Sub-Spindle to Main Spindle (Figures 16.15 through 16.17)
Examples of each type of part transfer will be shown in the following sections.
TRANSFERRING FROM MAIN SPINDLE TO SUB-SPINDLE

The following sample program segments illustrate the recommended format and sequence for
programming bar job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. Refer to Figures 16.9
through 16.11 .
COLLET STOCK STOP NOT INSTALLED IN SUB-SPINDLE COLLET
N12 (CUT OFF & TRANSFER) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G10 P0 Y-2.94 ; Sub-Spindle Work Shift for Workpiece Transfer
G97 S2000 M14 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Reverse, Coolant ON
X1. Z-2.5 M32 ; Rapid to Start and Sync Sub-Spindle (Figure 16.9)
G0 Y-1. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to 1" over Part (Figure 16.10)
M67 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Low Torque Mode
G4 U.2 ; Dwell .2 Seconds
M57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Close
M66 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive OFF
M68 ; Sub-Spindle Axis Drive to Normal Torque Mode
G1 G99 X-.02 F0.0025 ; Feed Tool to X-.02 Diameter (Cut-off)
G53 Y#5024 ; Y Axis Position Verification
G28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home Position
M1 : Optional Stop
16-14 M-320A
Revised: July 3, 1997
COLLET STOCK STOP INSTALLED IN SUB-SPINDLE COLLET
- NOTE -
When a collet stock stop is used during workpiece transfer, Low Torque mode must
be activated and the stock stop must be fed against the workpiece.
Test results indicate better part length accuracy WITHOUT the use of a collet stock
stop.
N12 (CUT OFF & TRANSFER) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G97 S2000 M14 ; Main Spindle 1000 RPM Reverse, Coolant ON
X1. Z-2.5 M32 ; Rapid to Start and Sync Sub-Spindle (Figure 16.9)
G1 G98 V-.05 F10. ; Feed Stock Stop against Workpiece
G1 G99 X-.02 F0.0025 ; Feed Tool to X-.02 Diameter (Cut-off)
G28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home Position
M1 : Optional Stop
These formats activate Low Torque mode before the sub-spindle collet is closed. Stay in Low
Torque mode while opening the main spindle collet. After the part has been transferred, program
M66 and M68 to return the sub-spindle to Normal Torque mode BEFORE the rapid move to
Home position.
M-320A 16-15
TI2758
Figure 16.9 - Tool Positioned for Cut-off Operation
TI2759
Figure 16.10 - Cut-off Operation
TI2760
Figure 16.11 - Sub-Spindle Moved to Home Position
16-16 M-320A
The following sample program segment illustrates the recommended format and sequence for
programming slug job transfers from the main spindle to the sub-spindle. Refer to Figures 16.12
through 16.14 .
N84 (TRANSFER TO SUB) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message

G97 S2500 M14 ; Main Spindle 2500 RPM Reverse
G28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home Position (Figure 16.14)
M1 ; Optional Stop
This format activates Low Torque mode before the sub-spindle collet is closed. Stay in Low
Torque mode while opening the main spindle collet. After the part has been transferred, program
Home position.
M-320A 16-17
TI2761
TI2762
TI2763

(Sub-Spindle Home)
16-18 M-320A
TRANSFERRING FROM SUB-SPINDLE TO MAIN SPINDLE
The following sample program segments illustrate the proper format and sequence for pro-
gramming transfers from the sub-spindle to the main spindle. Unlike main spindle to sub-spindle
transfers, the only type of transfer which is used when transferring from the sub-spindle to the
main spindle is slug job transfer. Refer to Figures 16.15 through 16.17 .
N84 (TRANSFER TO MAIN) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message

G97 S2500 M14 ; Main Spindle 2500 RPM Reverse
M36 ; Main Spindle Air Blast ON
G0 Y-1. ; Rapid Part 1" into Main Spindle (Figure 16.16)
M22 ; Main Spindle Collet Close
M37 ; Main Spindle Air Blast OFF
G53 Y# 5024 ; Y Axis Position Verification
G28 V0. ; Rapid Sub-Spindle to Home Position (Figure 16.17)
M1 ; Optional Stop
This format activates Low Torque mode before the main spindle collet is closed. Stay in Low
Torque mode while opening the sub-spindle collet. After the part has been transferred, program
Home position.
M-320A 16-19
TI2763

(Sub-Spindle Home)
TI2762
TI2761
16-20 M-320A
SUB-SPINDLE SAMPLE PROGRAM
The following sample program is written for a workpiece to be machined from bar stock which
is 1-7/16 inches in diameter. The workpiece will be machined on the main spindle first; then
transferred to the sub-spindle to complete the machining operation.
BASIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

Tool Station
and Offset
Main Spindle Work Shift Z-2.75 -
Feed Bar Stock T1010
Rough Facing and Turning Operation T0101
Workpiece Cut-off and Transfer T0404
Sub-Spindle Work Shift Z-15.500 -

Center Drill T0909
Drop Part
Main Spindle
Work Shift
-2.750 1.500
-15.500
Sub-Spindle Work Shift
17.000
Sub-Spindle Home Position
Main Spindle Face Sub-Spindle Face
TI2764
Figure 16.18 - Sample Program Work Shift Values
M-320A 16-21
2.000
1.200
1.400
1.250
1.125
20°
.100 R 45° x .05

TI1759
SAMPLE PROGRAM
% Stop Code
G20 ; Establish Inch Mode
N10 (Feed Stock) ; Sequence Number and Operator Message
G1 Z-2. F100. ; Position Stock Stop
Z0.02 F20. ; Move to Z.02
M22 ; Main Spindle Close
M1 ; Optional Stop
16-22 M-320A
N1 (Rough Face and Turn O.D.) Sequence Number and Operator Message
X1.5 Z0.005 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point
G1 G99 X-0.06 F0.005 ; Rough Face the Workpiece
G98 X1.45 Z0.05 F100. ; Move to Clear the Workpiece
G90 G99 X1.3 Z-1.19 F0.008 ; G90 Turning Cycle - Single Pass
G1 G98 X1.025 F75. ; Position for Rough Turn
G99 Z0.005 F0.007 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece
X1.135 Z-0.05 ; Rough Turn the 45 Degree Angle
,A0. ; Rough Turn the O.D.
X1.26 Z-1.195 ,A20. ; Rough Turn the 20 Degree Angle
M1 ; Optional Stop

G1 G42 X-0.03 Z0.1 F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G99 Z0. F0.003 ; Feed to Face of Workpiece
X1.125 ,C0.05 ; Face and Chamfer Workpiece
,A0 ; Finish Turn the O.D.
X1.25 Z-1.2 ,A20. ; Finish Turn the 20 Degree Angle
M1 ; Optional Stop
(Continued on Next Page)
M-320A 16-23
N4 (.125 Cut-off and Transfer) Sequence Number and Operator Message
X1.5 Z-2.135 M32 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Sub-Spindle Sync to Main
G0 Y-.5 ; Position Sub-Spindle to Grip Workpiece
M67 ; Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque Mode
M57 ; Sub-Spindle Collet Closed
M66 ; Sub-Spindle Drive OFF
M68 ; Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque Mode
G1 G99 X-.02 F.002 ; Cut off Workpiece
G28 V0. ; Sub-Spindle Rapid Traverse to Home Position
G0 X1.5 ; Rapid Tool Clear of Bar Stock
M1 ; Optional Stop

G97 S1000 M33 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM, Coolant ON
X1.51 Z-0.1 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Coolant ON
G1 G42 X1.5 Z0. F100. ; Move to Activate Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G99 X-0.03 F0.004 ; Finish Face the Workpiece
G41 ; Tool Nose Radius Compensation Axis Reversal
X1.2 ; Feed to Arc Start
G2 X1.4 Z0.1 R0.1 F0.002 ; Cut Radius
G1 Z0.85 F0.004 ; Finish Turn the O.D.
M98 P3 Call O.D. Safe End Program O3
M1 ; Optional Stop
16-24 M-320A
N09 (#4 Center Drill) Sequence Number and Operator Message
G97 S1000 M33 ; Sub-Spindle Forward 1000 RPM
X0. Z-0.1 S1600 M8 ; Rapid Tool to Start Point, Spindle and Coolant ON
G1 G99 Z0.28 F.009 ; Drill to Depth
M1 ; Optional Stop
N026 (Drop Workpiece) Sequence Number and Operator Message

M26 ; Extend Parts Catcher
M56 ; Sub-Spindle Open
M25 ; Retract Parts Catcher
M1 ; Optional Stop
M30 ; End Program - Rewind
% Stop Code
M-320A 16-25
SUB-SPINDLE PROGRAMMING RULES
1. Cycle Start is inhibited when the main spindle and sub-spindle workholding devices are
both open.
2. When operating the spindles in sync mode, DO NOT reverse spindle directions.
3. When it is necessary to program M07 (Sub-Spindle Phase Sync with Main Spindle), M32
MUST be programmed in the block immediately preceding the M07 block.
4. For safety, the Work Shift Offset is programmed after each Operation Sequence number.
5. Be sure to call the correct Safe Start/End subprogram for the spindle being used. Refer
to “Sub-Spindle Safe Start and Safe End Subprograms”, page 16-10.
6. Be aware that square shank tooling used for sub-spindle operations can only be
mounted at EVEN NUMBERED turret stations.
7. Enter a 0 (zero) at the beginning of each sub-spindle operation sequence number to
distinguish sub-spindle operation sequence numbers from main spindle sequence num-
bers.
8. When the operator is running a bar job, the Repeat Mode push button will be activated.
When an M30 command is read by the control, the program rewinds back to the begin-
ning. If Repeat Mode is active when the program rewinds, the program will begin execut-
ing again.
9. When using a bar feed and a new piece of bar stock is loaded in the bar feed, the face
of the bar stock should be flush with the face of the collet in the main spindle since the
part program begins with a feed stock operation.
16-26 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A 16-27
- NOTES -
16-28 M-320A
APPENDIX ONE
Z0
14.625 [371.48] Solid Stop
14.150 [359.41] Software Limit
14.000 [355.60] Axis Reference Position
Turret Top Plate

-0.690 [-17.53] Solid Stop
+X
13.192 [335.08] Solid Stop

+Z 12.500 [317.50] Axis Reference Position 12.632 [320.85] Software Limit

Main Spindle
1
0.970 [24.64] Solid Stop
2
1.330 [33.78] Solid Stop
CL
1
All machines NOT equipped with optional sub-spindle.
2
Sub-spindle machines ONLY.
Notes:
1. All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].
2. All measurements for X are diameter values from the spindle centerline.
3. All measurements for Z are from the face of the main spindle.
4. Full programmable travel on the X axis is 10.998 [279.35], measured on the diameter.
5. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is 13.900 [353.06].
TI3330
Figure A1.1 - Turret Travel Specifications

(CONQUEST® T42 and T42 Super-Precision® Machines)
M-320A A1-1
Z0
24.625 [625.48] Solid Stop
24.000 [609.60] Axis Reference Position
Turret Top Plate

-0.690 [-17.53] Solid Stop
+X
13.192 [335.08] Solid Stop

+Z 12.500 [317.50] Axis Reference Position 12.632 [320.85] Software Limit

Main Spindle
0.970 [24.64] Solid Stop
CL
Notes:
1. All dimensions are shown in Inches [Millimeters].
2. All measurements for X are diameter values from the spindle centerline.
3. All measurements for Z are from the face of the main spindle.
4. Full programmable travel on the X axis is 10.998 [279.35], measured on the diameter.
5. Full programmable travel on the Z axis is 23.900 [607.06].
TI3330
Figure A1.2 - Turret Travel Specifications

(CONQUEST® T42-L Machines)
A1-2 M-320A
3.250 [82.55]
(Tool Stop 1.500 [38.10]
Dimension)
0.375 [9.53] 0.625 [15.88]

6.9675 [176.975]
0.375 [9.53]
13.9350 [353.949]
0.7500 [19.050]
0.633 [16.08] 0.7500 [19.050] 0.750 [19.05]
1.990 [50.55]
1.500 [38.10] M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP

1.500 [38.10]
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions TI2693
Figure A1.3 - 12 Station Turret Top Plate Dimensions

(3/4" Tooling)
M-320A A1-3
3.671 [93.24]
(Tool Stop 1.500 [38.10]
Dimension)
0.375 [9.53] 0.625 [15.88]

6.9675 [176.975]
0.375 [9.53]
13.9350 [353.949]
0.7874 [20.000]
0.633 [16.08] 0.7874 [20.000] 0.787 [20.00]
1.990 [50.55]
1.500 [38.10] M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP

1.500 [38.10]

(20mm Tooling)
A1-4 M-320A
13.9350 [353.949]
6.9675 [176.975]
3.250 [82.55]
(Tool Stop 1.500 [38.10]
Dimension)
0.375 [9.53]
0.625 [15.88]
0.375 [9.53]
0.7500 [19.050]
0.633 [16.08] 0.750 [19.05]
0.7500 [19.050]
1.990 [50.55]
1.500 [38.10] M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP
1.500 [38.10]

(3/4" Tooling)
M-320A A1-5
13.9350 [353.949]
6.9675 [176.975]
3.671 [93.24]
(Tool Stop 1.500 [38.10]
Dimension)
0.375 [9.53]
0.625 [15.88]
0.375 [9.53]
0.7874 [20.000]
0.633 [16.08] 0.750 [19.05]
0.7874 [20.000]
1.990 [50.55]
1.500 [38.10] M6 - 1.0T x 0.629 [15.98] DP
1.500 [38.10]

(20mm Tooling)
A1-6 M-320A
† 17.50
[444.5]
† 6.00
[152.4] ‡
4.75
[120.7]
0.50
[12.7]
CL
† Due to the fact that this value may vary slightly from machine to
machine, only approximate values are listed.
‡ This dimension is dependent upon the tailstock center used.
NOTE: Inch [Millimeter] Dimensions
TI2694
Figure A1.7 - Tailstock Travel Specifications

(CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP Super-Precision® Machines)
† 27.50
[698.5]
† 6.00
[152.4] ‡
4.75
[120.7]
0.50
[12.7]
CL
† Due to the fact that this value may vary slightly from machine to
machine, only approximate values are listed.
‡ This dimension is dependent upon the tailstock center used.
TI2694
Figure A1.8 - Tailstock Travel Specifications

(CONQUEST T42-L Machines)
M-320A A1-7
4.50
4.75 [114.3]
[120.7]
.25 .25
[6.3] [6.3]
13.90
[353.1]
1.25 1.25
[31.7] [31.7]
5.50
Main Spindle [139.7] Sub-Spindle
.43
[10.9]
CL
1.625 [41.27]
Forward Position
13.125 [333.38]

TI2786
Figure A1.9 - Sub-Spindle Travel Specifications with

Work Envelope for Main Spindle Turret Tooling
4.50
4.75 [114.3]
[120.7]
.25 .25
[6.3] [6.3]
5.00
[127.0]
1.25
[31.7]
13.90
[353.1]
5.50
[139.7]
Main Spindle
.43
[10.9]
CL
Sub-Spindle
1.625 [41.27]
Forward Position
13.125 [333.38]

TI2787

Work Envelope for Sub-Spindle Turret Tooling
A1-8 M-320A
4.50
4.75 [114.3]
[120.7]
.25 .25
[6.3] [6.3]
13.90
[353.1]
1.25 1.25
[31.7] [31.7]
5.50 Sub-Spindle
Main Spindle [139.7]
.43
[10.9]
CL
1.600 [40.64]
-Y Software Limit
17.080 [433.83]
+Y Software Limit

TI2955

(1.60 Offset Ball Screw Axis Drive)
4.50
4.75 [114.3]
[120.7]
.25 .25
[6.3] [6.3]
5.00
[127.0]
1.25
[31.7]
13.90
[353.1]
Main Spindle 5.50 Sub-Spindle
[139.7]
.43
[10.9]
CL
1.600 [40.64]
-Y Software Limit
17.080 [433.83]
+Y Software Limit

TI2956

M-320A A1-9
4.50
4.75 [114.3]
[120.7]
.25 .25
[6.3] [6.3]
13.90
[353.1]
1.25 1.25
[31.7] [31.7]
5.50
Main Spindle [139.7] Sub-Spindle
.43
[10.9]
CL
0.460 [11.68]
-Y Software Limit
15.940 [404.88]
+Y Software Limit

TI2957

4.50
4.75 [114.3]
[120.7]
.25 .25
[6.3] [6.3]
5.00
[127.0]
1.25
[31.7]
13.90
[353.1]
Main Spindle 5.50 Sub-Spindle

[139.7]
.43
[10.9]
CL
0.460 [11.68]
-Y Software Limit
15.940 [404.88]
+Y Software Limit

TI2958

A1-10 M-320A
4.75 18.03 [457.96]
[120.7] Solid Stop
17.560 [446.02]
Software Limit
17.500 [444.50]
3.91 [99.3]
.125 [3.18]
Main
Spindle
CL
2.250 [57.15]
Software Limit
1.780 [45.21]
Solid Stop

TIA2695
Figure A1.15 - End-Working Turret Travel Specifications
M-320A A1-11
1
CONQUEST® T42 and T42SP machines.
2
CONQUEST T42-L machines.
Headwall 0.25
4.75 (Reference)
1.25
0.50
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
-X Software Limit
0.438 1
13.90
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 23.90
-Z Software Limit +Z Software Limit
TI2544
Figure A1.16 - Work Envelope with 16C Collet
A1-12 M-320A
1
2
6.81 0.25
Headwall
4.75 1.25
(Reference) 0.50
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
0.438 -X Software Limit

1
11.60
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 21.60
2.80
+Z Software Limit
TI2545
Figure A1.17 - Work Envelope with 16C "S-16" Master

Step Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck
M-320A A1-13
1
2
7.14 0.25
Headwall
4.75 1.25
(Reference) 0.50
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
-X Software Limit
0.438 1
11.28
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 21.28
3.125
+Z Software Limit
TI2547
Figure A1.18 - Work Envelope with 16C HQC-42

Quick Change Collet
A1-14 M-320A
† CHUCK DEPTH
6" Chuck = 5.09"
8" Chuck = 6.62"
‡ Z AXIS TRAVEL
CONQUEST® T42 & T42SP Machines:
6" Chuck = 9.31"
8" Chuck = 7.75"
CONQUEST T42-L Machines:
6" Chuck = 19.31"
8" Chuck = 18.78"
9.72
Headwall 0.25
†
4.75 1.25
(Reference)
0.50
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
-X Software Limit
0.438
‡
Z AXIS TRAVEL
+Z Software Limit
TI2546
Figure A1.19 - Work Envelope with 16C

Thru-Hole Jaw Chucks
M-320A A1-15
Revised: January 7, 1999
1
2
Headwall 0.25
4.75 (Reference)
1.25
0.57
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
-X Software Limit
0.438 1
13.90
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 23.90
-Z Software Limit +Z Software Limit
TI2544
Figure A1.20 - Work Envelope with 20C Collet
A1-16 M-320A
1
2
6.78 0.25
Headwall
4.75 1.25
(Reference) 0.57
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
0.438 -X Software Limit

1
11.67
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 21.67
2.80
+Z Software Limit
TI2545
Figure A1.21 - Work Envelope with 20C "S-20" Master

Step Chuck and Extra-Depth Step Chuck
M-320A A1-17
1
2
7.78 0.25
Headwall
4.75 1.25
(Reference) 0.57
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
-X Software Limit
0.438 1
10.70
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 20.70
3.77
+Z Software Limit
TI2547
Figure A1.22 - Work Envelope with 20C HQC-65

Quick Change Collet
A1-18 M-320A
1
2
9.72
Headwall 0.25
5.62
4.75 1.25
(Reference) 0.50
+X Software Limit
5.31
X AXIS TRAVEL
CL
-X Software Limit
0.438
1
8.85
2
Z AXIS TRAVEL 18.85
+Z Software Limit
TI2546
Figure A1.23 - Work Envelope with 20C

Thru-Hole Jaw Chucks
M-320A A1-19
SPINDLE TORQUE / HORSEPOWER CURVES
Ten Horsepower Main Spindle Motor

Base Speed = 1250 rpm Standard Torque Spindle Torque
All values are 30 minute ratings
Spindle Power
45.00 12.00
11.00
40.00
10.00
35.00
9.00
30.00 8.00
Spindle Torque, (Ft-Lbs)
Spindle Power, (HP)

7.00
25.00
6.00
20.00
5.00
15.00 4.00
3.00
10.00
2.00
5.00
1.00
0.00 0.00
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000
Spindle Speed, (rpm) TI3209
Ten Horsepower Main Spindle Motor

Base Speed = 750 rpm Spindle Torque
High Torque Option
Spindle Power
80.00 12.00
11.00
70.00
10.00
60.00 9.00
8.00
50.00
Spindle Power, (HP)
7.00
40.00 6.00
5.00
30.00
4.00
20.00 3.00
2.00
10.00
1.00
0.00 0.00
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600 2800 3000
Spindle Speed, (rpm)
TI3210
A1-20 M-320A
Fifteen Horsepower Main Spindle Motor
Base Speed = 1100 rpm High Torque Option Spindle Torque
All values are 30 minute ratings Spindle Power
80.00 16.00
70.00 14.00
60.00 12.00
50.00 10.00
Spindle Power, (HP)

40.00 8.00
30.00 6.00
20.00 4.00
10.00 2.00
0.00 0.00
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400
TI3211
Base Speed = 1500 rpm

Fifteen Horsepower Main Spindle Motor
High Speed Option Spindle Torque
Spindle Power
60.00 16.00
14.00
50.00
12.00
40.00
10.00
Spindle Power, (HP)
30.00 8.00
6.00
20.00
4.00
10.00
2.00
0.00 0.00
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 6000
TI3212
M-320A A1-21
Five Horsepower Sub-Spindle Motor
Base Speed = 1500 rpm Standard Torque Spindle Torque
All values are 30 minute ratings Spindle Power
18.00 6
16.00
14.00
12.00 4
Spindle Power, (HP)

10.00
8.00
6.00 2
4.00
2.00
0.00 0
0 400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000 4400 4800 5200 5600 6000
TI3213
A1-22 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A A1-23
- NOTES -
A1-24 M-320A
APPENDIX TWO
G CODES
CODE GROUP DEFINITION
G00 1 Rapid Traverse Positioning Mode
G01 1 Linear Interpolation
G02 1 Clockwise Circular Interpolation
G03 1 Counterclockwise Circular Interpolation
G04 0 Dwell
G10 0 Offset Value Setting
G17 16 X,C Work Plane Selection [Option]
G18 16 X,Z Work Plane Selection [Option]
G19 16 Z,C Work Plane Selection [Option]
G20 6 Inch Data Input
G21 6 Metric Data Input
G22 9 Stored Stroke Limits ON
G23 9 Stored Stroke Limits OFF
G32 1 Threadcutting Routine (Constant Lead)
G34 1 Threadcutting Routine (Variable Lead) [Option]
G40 7 Cancel Tool Nose Radius Compensation
G41 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Right)
G42 7 Tool Nose Radius Compensation (Part Left)
G50 0 Maximum RPM Limit used with Constant Surface Speed (G96)
G65 0 User Macro Call
G70 0 Automatic Finishing Cycle
G71 0 Automatic Rough Turning Cycle
G72 0 Automatic Rough Facing Cycle
G73 0 Automatic Rough Pattern Repeat Cycle
G74 0 Automatic Drilling Cycle
G76 0 Automatic Threading Cycle
G80 10 Cancel Face Machining Cycle
G81 10 Single Pass Face Drilling Cycle
G83 10 Peck Face Drilling Cycle
G84 10 Face Tapping Cycle
G90 1 Canned Turning Cycle
G92 1 Canned Threading Cycle
G94 1 Canned Facing Cycle
G96 2 Constant Surface Speed
G97 2 Direct RPM Programming
G98 5 Inches/mm per Minute Feedrate
G99 5 Inches/mm per Revolution Feedrate
G100 - End End-Working Turret Sub-Routine [Option]
G101 - Start End-Working Turret Sub-Routine #1 [Option]
G107 - Activate Cylindrical Interpolation [Option]
G112 - Activate Polar Interpolation [Option]
G113 - Cancel Polar Interpolation [Option]
M-320A A2-1
STANDARD M CODES
M00 Program Stop

M01 Optional Stop
M02 End of Program
M03 Spindle Forward
M04 Spindle Reverse
M05 Spindle Stop/Coolant OFF
M08 Coolant ON
M09 Coolant OFF
M13 Spindle Forward/Coolant ON
M14 Spindle Reverse/Coolant ON
M17 Headwall Coolant ON
M18 Headwall Coolant OFF
M21 Open Main Collet
M22 Close Main Collet
M28 External Chucking Mode (Main Collet Closer)
M29 Internal Chucking Mode (Main Collet Closer)
M30 End of Program
M31 Program Rewind and Restart
M42 No Corner Rounding - Exact Stop
M43 Corner Rounding
M44 Main Turret Bi-Directional Index Enabled
M45 Main Turret Bi-Directional Index Disabled
M48 Enable Feedrate and Spindle Speed Overrides
M49 Disable Feedrate and Spindle Speed Overrides
M58 Enable Constant Surface Speed
M59 Disable Constant Surface Speed
M98 Subprogram Call
M99 Subprogram End
A2-2 M-320A
OPTIONAL M CODES
AIR BLAST:
M36 Main Spindle Air Blast ON
M37 Main Spindle Air Blast OFF
C-AXIS:
M23 C-Axis Enabled
M24 C-Axis Disabled
END-WORKING TURRET:
M60 Synchronization Code
M78 Enable Lower Axis Feedrate Override
M79 Disable Lower Axis Feedrate Override
M81 Execute Sub-Routine #1
GUARD DOOR:
M38 Guard Door Open
M39 Guard Door Closed
HIGH PRESSURE COOLANT:

M10 Coolant ON
M11 Coolant OFF
LIVE TOOLING:
M51 Live Tooling Forward
M52 Live Tooling Reverse
M53 Live Tooling Forward / Coolant ON
M54 Live Tooling Reverse / Coolant ON
M55 Live Tooling Stop
M71 Simultaneous Live Tooling/Main Spindle (Forward)
M72 Simultaneous Live Tooling/Main Spindle (Reverse)
PART CATCHER:
M25 Part Catcher Retract
M26 Part Catcher Extend
ROBOT:
M62 Robot Request No.1
M63 Robot Request No.2
M-320A A2-3
STEADY REST:
M93 Steady Rest Open
M94 Steady Rest Closed
SUB-SPINDLE:
M33 Sub-Spindle Forward RPM
M34 Sub-Spindle Reverse RPM
M56 Sub-Spindle Collet Open
M57 Sub-Spindle Collet Close
M66 Sub-Spindle Drive OFF (Ball Screw Drive)
M67 Sub-Spindle Drive Low Torque (Ball Screw Drive)
M68 Sub-Spindle Drive Normal Torque (Ball Screw Drive)
M84 Sub-Spindle Forward (Hydraulic Drive)
M85 Sub-Spindle Home (Hydraulic Drive)
THERMAL COMPENSATION:
M88 Activate Thermal Compensation
TAILSTOCK:
M84 Tailstock Forward
M85 Tailstock Home
A2-4 M-320A
PMC GENERATED ALARMS
Alarm Alarm
Number Message Cause(s)
1000 Hydraulic OVL (OL-1, OL-4) Hydraulic motor overload (OL-1) on contactor
(MS1) tripped.
Hydraulic heat exchanger overload (OL-4) on
contactor (MS1) tripped. (On Super-Precision®
lathes only)
The control is put in an alarm condition and
the machine in Emergency Stop.
1001 Collet/Chuck P-SW Fault Collet Close/Open pressure switches are
faulty. Main spindle pressure switch inputs in-
dicate same state for more than 3.5 seconds.
The control is put in an alarm condition.
1002 Sub Spindle Chuck P-SW Fault Sub-spindle collet Close/Open pressure
switches are faulty. Sub-spindle pressure
switch inputs indicate same state for more
than 3.5 seconds. The control is put in an
alarm condition.
1003 Turret Unclamped Main turret top plate not properly seated. Tur-
ret index time exceeds two seconds. Turret
proximity switch is faulty. The control is put in
an alarm condition.
Turret index has been interrupted by Reset or
Emergency Stop.
To clear the fault:
1. Clear the Emergency Stop, if necessary.
2. Press and hold the Zero Return push but-
ton.
3. Press the Turret 1 Index push button.
The turret will index to station #1 and seat.
Alarm will clear.
1004 Main Spindle Brake Fault Spindle brake pressure switch input contra-
dicts the state of the brake solenoid valve.
(Spindle free lamp indicates status of brake
solenoid). The control is put in an alarm condi-
tion.
1005 Tailstock Fault Tailstock overtraveled beyond the rapid-to-
feed dog. The control is put in an alarm condi-
tion.
1007 Barfeed Fault Bar Feed tube out of position. Hydraulic motor
protection relay trip condition. The control is
put in an alarm condition.
M-320A A2-5
1008 Spindle Unit Fault Spindle drive/motor overload condition. The
control is put in an alarm condition and the
machine in Emergency Stop.
1009 Battery Level Low Low voltage condition on control memory bat-
tery back-up. DO NOT POWER DOWN THE
MACHINE!
Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe mainte-
nance manual (M-322) for instructions to re-
place the battery.
1012 Coolant Pump Overload (OL-2) Coolant pump motor overload (OL-2) on con-
tactor (MS2) tripped. The control is put in an
alarm condition and the machine in Emer-
gency Stop.
1017 Main Air Pressure Low Low air pressure to machine.
1020 Chuck Open Spindle collet/chuck is open.
1022 End of Bar (Cycle Strt Inhb) End of bar condition exists. The control is put
in an alarm condition.
1025 Tailstock Breakaway Switch Tailstock breakaway limit switch has been
tripped. The control is put into an alarm condi-
tion and the machine in Emergency Stop.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 lathe mainte-
nance manual (M-322) for information on re-
setting the tailstock.
1027 Invalid M-code Programmed M word is programmed for an option not avail-
able/enabled on the machine.
M word is not defined in the control.
M word format error.
1031 Tool Touch Probe LS Fault Tool touch probe Up/Down limit switches indi-
cate same state (logic “0"). Fault is generated
if tool probe travel time exceeds 5.0 seconds.
The control is put in an alarm condition.
1034 Collet Setup Wrong Stopped Illegal collet setup during a sub-spindle opera-
tion. For example, both collets are open. Not
allowed.
1040 Low Hydraulic Pressure Machine hydraulic pressure has dropped be-
low 60 psig [4.1 bars].
A2-6 M-320A
1044 X Torque Limiter, Check Zero The X axis torque limiter has tripped. The con-
trol is put into an alarm condition and the ma-
chine in Emergency Stop.
setting the torque limiter.
1045 Z Torque Limiter, Check Zero The Z axis torque limiter has tripped. The con-
trol is put into an alarm condition and the ma-
chine in Emergency Stop.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 lathe mainte-
setting the torque limiter.
1501 Move Tlstk into Clear Area Tailstock out of position. Move tailstock to
either the retract position or the fixed home
position. Cycle Start is inhibited.
1502 Lube System Failure Lubrication system fault. The machine is put
into a reset condition. All axis motion stops,
coolant and air blast are automatically turned
OFF.
Check and repair lubrication system.
1503 Tool Group Life End ! All of the tools in one or more tool groups
have reached the tool life specified in the Tool
Life Management program and an M30 “End
of Program” has been read by the control.
Refer to the CONQUEST T42 lathe operator’s
manual (M-321) for instructions on resetting
the tool group counter(s).
1504 Part Catcher Not At Home Part catcher is not in the retract position. Cy-
cle Start and tailstock motion is inhibited until
the part catcher is in the retract position.
1505 Illegal Use of Part Chute Illegal sequence of parts catcher M codes. Po-
sition of parts catcher is checked before exe-
cution of M25 or M26 command.
M-320A A2-7
1802 Turret 2 Unclamped End-working turret top plate is not properly
seated. Turret index time exceeds two sec-
onds. Turret proximity switch is faulty. The
control is put in an alarm condition.
Turret index has been interrupted by Reset or
Emergency Stop.
To clear the fault:
1. Clear the Emergency Stop, if necessary.
2. Press and hold the Zero Return push but-
ton.
3. Press the Turret 2 Index push button.
The turret will index to station #1 and seat.
Alarm will clear.
1803 Battery Low in Ram Turret Control Low voltage condition on control memory bat-
tery back-up. DO NOT POWER DOWN THE
MACHINE!
nance manual (M-322) for instructions to re-
place the battery.
1804 General Alarm in Ram Trt Control General end-working turret control hardware
failure.
1805 Lower Axis Overtravel Lower axis overtravel condition. The control is
put in an alarm condition and the machine in
Emergency Stop.
1806 TT Cover OFF Auto Inhibited Cover for tool touch probe is removed while
the machine is in Automatic, Manual Data In-
put, or Single mode. Machine must be in Jog
mode when cover is removed.
1807 Live Tool Drive Failure General live tooling hardware failure.
1808 Ram Turret M or T Code Error Illegal M or T code programmed in a G101,
G102, or G103 subroutine or a G110 program
block.
1809 Door Opened in Sync Mode Main guard door opened during a sub-spindle
“sync” mode operation.
1810 Y Must Be W/G101,102,103,110 End-working turret motion must be pro-
grammed within a G101, G102, G103 subrou-
tine or with the G110 “one-shot command”.
1811 Verify Door Sw[s] Machine power-up message. Open and close
the main coolant guard door to perform the
guard door switch verification and clear the
verification alarm.
A2-8 M-320A
PMC GENERATED MESSAGES
Message
Number Message Cause
2013 T_T Probe not at Home Pos. Tool touch probe is not in the home position.
Cycle Start is inhibited until the probe is in the
home position.
2019 Guard Door Open Coolant guard door is open. Cycle Start is in-
hibited until the guard door is closed.
2023 Lube Low Refill ! Low lubrication oil level. The Single Block indi-
cator light begins blinking as a warning to the
operator. Refer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe
operator’s manual (M-321) for instructions on
refilling the lubricator.
If the lubricator is not refilled within 25 min-
utes, the Single Block indicator light turns ON
and the control forces Single Block mode.
2026 Invalid T-code Programmed The T word exceeds the maximum number of
turret stations on the top plate.
T word format error.
2027 Invalid M-code Programmed M word is programmed for an option not avail-
M word is not defined in the control.
M word format error.
2029 “B” Code or Hardware Error B word orient angle is greater than 360 de-
grees.
B word is programmed for an option not avail-
B word format error.
2031 Jog Mode Reqd To Open Collet For machines equipped with bar feed option
and option is turned ON, Jog mode must be
selected before manually opening the collet.
2050 An Access Door is Open An interlocked access door is open. Cycle
start is inhibited until the door is closed.
2090 Super-Precision Measuring System General measuring system hardware failure.
Failure (Only on Super-Precision® lathes)
2091 Mist Collector Motor Overload Coolant mist collector overload has tripped.
2092 Chip Conveyor Motor Overload Coolant chip conveyor overload has tripped.
2112 Part Count Satisfied The part count specified has been completed.
Part program execution is halted.
M-320A A2-9
2501 Lube Fail,5 Min To Shutdown ! Lubrication system hardware failure. The op-
erator has 5 minutes to move the tooling off
the workpiece.
Check lubrication system pressure switches
and lubrication lines. For more information, re-
fer to the CONQUEST® T42 lathe mainte-
nance manual (M-322).
2502 Z Axis Overloaded Adj Feedrate The Z axis thrust is limited to 1,500 pounds
[6,672 N]. This limit has been exceeded. The
machine is put into a feed hold condition.
Turn Feedrate 1 Override switch down by 10%
and press Cycle Start. Repeat until message
clears. Adjust the feedrate in the part program
by the percentage that was required to clear
the message.
2503 Y Axis Overloaded Adj Feedrate The Z axis thrust is limited to 1,500 pounds
[6,672 N]. This limit has been exceeded. The
machine is put into a feed hold condition.
Turn Feedrate 1 Override switch down by 10%
and press Cycle Start. Repeat until message
clears. Adjust the feedrate in the part program
by the percentage that was required to clear
the message.
2611 New Tool Used on Part A tool in the currently active tool group has
reached the tool life specified in the Tool Life
Management program. The next tool in the ac-
tive tool group has been selected.
A2-10 M-320A
- NOTES -
M-320A A2-11
- NOTES -
A2-12 M-320A
“Performance Has Established Leadership for Hardinge”®
Hardinge Inc.
Elmira, New York 14902-1507 USA
Phone: 607-734-2281 Fax: 607-734-8819
www.hardinge.com

M A-0009500-0320 Hardinge PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

M A-0009500-0320 Hardinge PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROGRAMMER’S MANUAL

Revised: September 28, 1999

Manual No. M-320A Litho in U.S.A.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

This manual covers the programming of Hardinge CONQUEST® T42

CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

© 1997, Hardinge Inc. M-320A

HARDINGE SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS

CONSULT YOUR SUPERVISOR when in doubt as to the correct way to do a job.

DON’T REMOVE any warning or instruction tags from machine.

DON’T OPERATE EQUIPMENT if unusual or excessive heat, noise, smoke, or vibration

DISCONNECT MAIN ELECTRICAL POWER before attempting repair or maintenance.

DON’T ALLOW the operation or repair of equipment by untrained personnel.

ASCERTAIN AND CORRECT cause of a shutdown caused by overload heaters before

DON’T USE a toxic or flammable substance as a solvent cleaner or coolant.

REMOVE CHUCK WRENCHES before starting the machine.

DRY CYCLE a new setup to check for programming errors.

BE CAREFUL of sharp edges when handling newly machined workpieces.

DON’T ADJUST tooling or coolant hoses while the machine is running.

DON’T CHECK finishes or dimensions of workpiece near running spindle or moving

ANY ATTACHMENT, TOOL, OR MACHINE MODIFICATION not obtained from Hardinge

DON’T USE worn or broken tooling on machine.

REPLACE DEFECTIVE CHUCK before starting machine.

DON’T EXCEED the rated capacity of machine.

DON’T LEAVE the machine unattended while it is operating.

DON’T CLEAN the machine with an air hose.

DON’T OVERFILL tote pans.

KEEP TOTE PANS a safe distance from machine.

FOR YOUR PROTECTION - WORK SAFELY

CHAPTER 1 - PART PROGRAM LANGUAGE

PROGRAMMING THE GE FANUC 18T CONTROL

U (Coordinate) G00, G01, G02, G03 U±2.4 0.0001 - U±3.3 0.001 -

X (Tool Offset) G10 X±2.4 0. - X±3.3 0. -

I (Circ. Inter.) G02, G03 I±3.4 0. 999.9999 I±4.3 0. 9999.999

F (per min) [X/U]11 G98 F3.2 0.01 472.00 F5.0 1. 12000.

S (Spindle rpm) 2 G50, G97 S4 0 5000 S4 0 5000

B (Spin. Orient) - B3 0 360 B3 0 360

T (Tool Function) - T4 0 1232 T4 0 1232

A (Angle) G00, G01 A3.4 0.0001 359.9999 A3.4 .001 359.9999

Table 1.1 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments

U (Coordinate) G00, G01, G02, G03 U±2.5 0.00001 - U±3.4 0.0001 -

X (Tool Offset) G10 X±2.5 0. - X±3.4 0. -

I (Circ. Inter.) G02, G03 I±3.5 0. 999.99999 I±4.4 0. 9999.9999

F (per min) [X/U]11 G98 F3.2 0.01 472.00 F5.0 1. 12000.

S (Spindle rpm) 2 G50, G97 S4 0 5000 S4 0 5000

B (Spin. Orient) - B3 0 360 B3 0 360

T (Tool Function) - T4 0 1232 T4 0 1232

A (Angle) G00, G01 A3.4 0.0001 359.9999 A3.4 .001 359.9999

Table 1.2 - Data Word Formats and Min/Max Increments

Data Word Formats

CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathes F1.6 F3.4

CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathes F1.6 F3.4

Data Word Formats

Data Word Formats

CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe X±2.4 X±3.3

CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe X±2.5 X±3.4

Data Word Formats

CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe U±2.4 U±3.3

CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe U±2.5 U±3.4

Data Word Formats

CONQUEST® T42 and T42-L Lathe Z±2.4 Z±3.3

CONQUEST T42SP Super-Precision® Lathe Z±2.5 Z±3.4

Data Word Formats

N _ (_______) Sequence Search Number and Message

X (and/or) Z Clear Part by 3 Times the Tool Tip